Home

T800 Visual Supervisor Handbook Issue 8 - E

1. OVERVIEW PROGRAMMER RECIPE LOGGING HOME Figure 2 2 1 The Standard Interface top level ACCESS SYSTEM and ALARMS appear on every instrument others appear only if configured Of these PRO GRAMMER and Recipe are the most frequently used Below this menu level there are usually two or three further levels of functions overall that give users successively more detailed control of different aspects of programs applications and the instrument itself 2 2 2 Information entry Information entry is by touching areas on the screen with a finger the eraser end of a pencil or similar Hard sharp or pointed implements such as pens keys and fingernails must never be used or damage will be caused to the touch screen There are two main areas of the screen 1 The Main pane which displays the keys menus pick lists dialogue boxes and fields of the Standard Interface 2 row of touch sensitive keys near the bottom of the screen The keys and other items of the Standard Interface are not all touch sensitive and those that are sensitive active are not active all the time You can tell which items are active at any time by their pale yellow background and you can tell which active item was the last one you selected by its bright yellow background Chapter 2 HA261376 Page 2 6 Issue 8 Jly 04 VISUAL SUPERVISO 2 3 N
2. 8 8 Numeric display 3 28 JBUS 2 6 1 L Operator access 4 28 Labelling symbols 1 4 4 4 4 44 0000 00 0 1 1 Operator 8 2 Language selection 4 42 a Sieb doc Pes B 1 23 n ERI eee 4 18 4 22 LIN database variables 5 66 8 2 Linear Bus layout enge ts 7 6 Pan control ME E 3 30 3 32 Panel agent declaration 5 44 Literal text ineo neces 5 65 ies 5 26 3 37 4 18 4 22 customisation queen 2 55 Load Save program Id 3 2 Panel driver declaration IGI 4 28 Panel navigation 5 2 5 36 5 69 2 13 Se 5 36 11 Logging f 4 27 4 16 Exbi 8 5 Data groups 4 15 Display pane ic t ore Detect 2 13 rinter i Ree _ Profibus See Chapter 7 File type 4 16 Wa ode as EORR 1 11 4 15 4 rise deter ette 7 10 Interval
3. 6 12 6 2 2 6 USER ALARM 5 4 44 eee 6 12 6 2 2 7 PARAMETER BLOCKS emm 6 12 6 2 2 8 IN STRUM EN T DIAGNOSTIC BLO 6 12 0 2 3 The UY enr dti ex Yo etu e ne eaa e tp hec EE hd 6 13 06 2 3 1 EXAM PUE eet b Y 6 14 6 2 3 2 SCALING iie temere 6 14 6 2 3 3 COMMEN TIN Go ose erc Rh RR e nee 6 14 Chapter 7 PROFIBUS 20000022050 e oer eie Ie 7 1 Fade 95 LEER p ber etc Pob 7 1 7 2 DEVOLVED CON TROL MO DU LES wisi erre rer t c rn 7 1 7 252 INTOOUCHON Ss thin ee EP ERE 7 1 7 22 DEMScava lable irre cer i De a erc Er 7 2 72222 1 O P BLOCKS es eo ote terree 7 2 7T 2 2 2 RAM P BLOCKS 7 2 7 2 2 3 MODULE BLOCKS 7 2 7 2 2 4 CHAN NELBLOCKS 00 7 2 7 2 2 5 USER WIRING BLOCKS 4 7 2 7 2 2 6 USER ALARM 5 0 7 2 2227 ioa ceo i de ete 7 3 7 2 2 8 IN STRUM EN T DIAGNOSTIC BLOCKS 7 3 7 3 7 3 1 COMMENTIN
4. 1 8 1 3 1 1 MASTER SLAVE COMMS SOCKETS 1 10 1 3 1 2 ALIN ARCN ET SO CKETS 1 11 1 3 1 3 PRO TIBUS CONN ECTO RS 1 11 1 3 1 4 BAR CODE READER CREDIT CARD SCANNER 1 12 1 3 1 5 PARALLEL PRIN TER PORT me 1 12 1 3 1 6 SERIA L PRIN TER PO RT i 1 12 1 3 1 7 ETHERN 100 10 BASE T CONNECTOR 1 13 1 3 1 6 USB CONNECTOR incer eterne rte 1 13 1 3 2 Signal wiring visual supervisor to 2500 1 14 CONNECTORS AND CABLES i p rcr rrr e re 1 14 1 3 3 Signal wiring Configuration port 1 14 1 3 3 1 VISUAL SUPERVISOR TO CONFIGURATION PC 1 14 1 3 3 2 2500 TO PC RUNNING iTOOLS 1 16 1 3 3 3 2500 TO PC RUNNING ITO OLS VIA TALKTHRO UGH 1 16 1 3 4 Permanentlink to a PC running SCADA _ 1 16 1 17 1 3 6 Supply voltage 0 444 4 Hmmm 1 18 13 6 LAC SUPPLY fe 1 18 1 3 6 2 DC S DDDY oed ve rae era ne o ee toe ERES 1 19 1 3 6 3 FUSE REPLACEMENT SM ALL FRAME UNITS 1 20 1 3 6 4 FUSE REPLACEMENT LARGE FRAME UNITS 1 21 1 4 SWITCHING COMMUNICATIO S
5. No Context Class Max Text 919 AMCDIAG ITEM_TITLE 27 Total Cyclic Updates 920 AMCDIAG ITEM_TITLE 27 Late Cyclic Updates 921 AMCDIAG ITEM_TITLE 27 Node Fault 922 AMCDIAG ITEM_TITLE 27 Line Fault 923 AMCDIAG ITEM_TITLE 27 Line Number 924 AMCDIAG ITEM_TITLE 27 Node Number 925 AMCDIAG BUTTON_TEXT 12 RESET 929 AMCDIAG ITEM 8 lt ALL gt 930 MAINTMEN MENU_TITLE 16 Maintenance 931 MAINTMEN LEGEND 11 MAINT 932 FILEMGR PAGE_TITLE 20 File Manager 933 FILEMGR LEGEND 11 FILE MGR 934 FILEMGR ITEM_TITLE 16 Device 935 FILEMGR ITEM_TITLE 16 Filter 936 FILEMGR ITEM_TITLE 16 File 937 FILEMGR ITEM_TITLE 16 Size 938 FILEMGR ITEM_TITLE 16 Free Space 939 FILEMGR ITEM_UNITS 9 Bytes 940 FILEMGR BUTTON_TEXT 12 COPY 941 FILEMGR BUTTON_TEXT 12 DELETE 942 FILEMGR PAGE_TITLE 20 Copy File 943 FILEMGR PARA 24 Copy To 944 FILEMGR PAGE_TITLE 20 Confirm Delete 945 FILEMGR ITEM_TITLE 16 Segment 946 FILEMGR ITEM_TITLE 16 Node 947 FILEMGR ITEM UNITS 9 Local 948 FILEMGR MESSAGE 128 Remote file access Please wait 951 AGP ITEM_TITLE 12 Missing 952 AGP ITEM_TITLE 12 Wrong 953 AGP ITEM_TITLE 12 Unknown 954 AGP ITEM_TITLE 12 Comm Err 961 AGP ITEM_TITLE 12 Sensor Break 962 AGP ITEM_TITLE 12 CJC Fail 963 AGP ITEM_TITLE 12 Not Used 964 AGP ITEM_TITLE 12 OP Sat 965 AGP ITEM_TITLE 12 Init 966 AGP ITEM_TITLE 12 Inv Cal 968 AGP ITEM_TITLE 12 Mod Fail 970 AGP ITEM_TITLE 3 971 ITEM
6. HOME 2 SYSTEM from the pop up menu f SUMMARY APPLN Press menu key 3 Select SETUP 3 SETUP Press SETUP 4 2 Press STARTUP STARTUP CLOCK 4 Select STARTUP INTERNAT PANEL RESET Startup Strategy Hot Start YES Cold Start YES The Start up Strategy page appears Hot start time 00 00 00 Brown out time 00 05 00 SAVE CANCEL HA261376 Chapter 4 Issue 8 Jly 04 Page 4 39 VISUAL SUPERVISOR HAN DBO 4 5 2 1 STARTUP STRATEGY PAGE Cont Hot start Cold Start Hot start time Brown out time A Hot start uses data about the current application that the instrument automatically saves in case of power variation or failure Using this information which is preserved through any power loss the instrument can automatically restart the process at any time after normal power returns In the fields on the Start up Strategy page the following items need to be configured 1 Whether the process is to start automatically after a power loss 2 A maximum time period time out after the expiry of which a hot start is inappropriate Cold Start data is application data not just program data so its scope is much wider This depends upon the process under control If the process can tolerate only a short time without normal power before either the plant or the load requires manual at
7. 8 2 3 38 Display pane 2 10 Recipe selection 3 37 Forms 5 55 Batch Dictionary s 5 61 History Balen Giles 5 62 3 19 Batch Phases erected tiri teni ds 5 63 Display addding notes to 3 18 Block Page 3 16 Creation eet ellen 4 25 Time display 3 16 8 2 Two line display 2 12 3 17 Value 2 8 2 3 21 Brightness of 4 44 Names iN EN MC ME 5 49 BIOWD OUE uie etie PS e Pee 4 39 Responding to 3 16 at es 4 40 Sumbtmary 3 19 Alarm event customisation 5 27 C APP MGR iet deep 4 19 4 19 Cached alarms 8 2 Application Capture recipe eee 4 54 4 47 Changing 4 47 4 41 eee eee o m nee ee 4 47 Date Time format 2 2 0 0 4 43 Saving nnde ec RU ee cete 4 21 from Access level to User 4 30 Deletion 4 22 Hot Cold Start settings 4 40 Diaghnostics 2 uet aet 4 23 Language 4 43 L
8. Use this pan slider or the those at the arrow keys to select that part of cursor time the time base to be viewed and date Left moves back in time 2 Cursor date Cursor time Zoom factor Back Live key Figure 3 3 2c Review mode controls Chapter 3 HA261376 Issue 8 Jul 04 Page 3 10 VISUAL SUPERVISOR HAN DBO OK 3 4 LOGGING DATA This section describes how incoming data can be logged archived to an archive device 3 4 1 Types of files The selection of file type ASCII Binary UHH is made in the Logging Groups window described in section 4 2 below ASCII This is a text file that is human readable and which can be imported into standard spreadsheets Files of this type have extensions of the following type ASC AS1 to AS9 or A01 to A99 BINARY This is a tamper proof non human readable format which can be interpreted only by the Review software package Files of this type have extensions of the following type PKD PK1 to PK9 or PO1 to P99 UHH This format available only with Enhanced instruments is another non human readable file format which wherever possible should be used in preference to the Binary format described above as it is more efficient and allows more data to be extracted by Review software Like the Binary format UHH files can be interpreted only by Review soft ware UHH files have Sequence file names see below and th
9. Figure 8 2 2a Signature Configuration page ACCESS LEVELS As can be seen from figure 8 2 2a above a number of instrument features can have an access level assigned to them The possible access level definitions are as follows No Confirmation The instrument behaves as if electronic signatures are turned off Confirm only A dialogue box with OK and CANCEL buttons appears before the action is undertaken Signature A pasword entry by a user with Signature Permissions is required before the action is per formed Sign amp Authorise A pasword entry by a user with Signature Permission and a further entry by a user with Authorization permission are required before the instrument will respond to the requested action Action Disabled This causes the relevant button caption to be greyed out thus becoming inaccessible to the user Thus the action may not be undertaken at all Note Some functions cannot be allocated some access levels Administrative functions for example always require a minimum level of Signature and some functions cannot be assigned Action Disabled The available functions are in a number of categories a picklist of categories being displayed when the Function field is touched Figure 8 2 2b below shows this picklist The button functions at the bottom of the page are as follows SAVE Saves all changes to all functions CANCEL Cancels all changes made since last S
10. 149 50 Hmm 4 50 4 72 Calling the file manager osse ceo tpe EX 4 50 amp 73 File Copy and Delete ce Re 4 51 4 7 4 Reloading the application me 4 52 Contents HA261376 Page 6 Issue 8 Jly 04 VISUAL SUPERVISOR HAN DBO OK LIST OF CONTENTS Cont Section Page 4 8 RECIPE MANA GEMEN EE REED PARET 4 52 4 8 1 Creating recipe Tiles ioo he P Seine 4 52 4 8 2 Recipe eding 4 52 4 8 2 1 ADD RECIPE UN E eee re hr rtc redes 4 52 486252 ADD A VARIABLE seri eR 4 53 4 8 2 3 TAG REFEREN CES eere ke nne en neris 4 53 4 8 224 RECIPE VALUE tener e conned 4 53 4 8 2 5 ADDING RECIPE 1 21 4 53 4 8 2 6 DEIETIN G RECIPES wiv 4 53 4 82 17 SAVING Rer RR E Peer rette s 4 53 4 8 2 8 RECIPE FILE PROPERTIES 4 54 4 8 3 1 net trt RR n epos re 4 54 4 9 OEM rece rete e e n coda c lett 4 55 4 9 1 Intellectual Property Right Protection 4 55 4 9 9 1 MODIFYING IPRP SETTINGS 2 4 2 4 55 Chapter 5 CUSTOMISING 5 1 Sel INTRODUCTION us cena Suis tan peto ew dera reete
11. eese 5 35 Signature configuration 8 11 Programs Recipes se 4 47 Specification PROPERTIES 4 33 Communications 2 3 Protocols communications 4 37 3etieral cione A 1 Relay ifs etum des A 2 Q E 4 18 4 22 _ 4 39 Question mark 2 11 STATS GV 4 34 8 6 R Step Sivit oed pti iS 4 4 STOP iue 4 18 4 20 cu HE Da E RR 4 4 Symbols used on labels 1 1 ems 4 4 000 18 4 19 4 35 euh gin cene 4 4 System Type 4 4 Data Rate units selection 4 4 2 4 12 4 48 Recipe Importing exporting 4 48 Adding 4 53 D ice 8 2 Capture ise etate 4 54 Summary diee e 2 5 Downloading seei aiei niihi Ra 3 33 2 nione cc t eec 5 56 ce tnr 5 3 Management 2 2 ete 4 52 New languages 5 3 3 35 System variables es 5 67 Recipe 5
12. Screw lt lt E Nut a Studding Lock nut Note Panel mounting angles are as shown for the small frame Panel mounting details unit in figure 1 2a above Figure 1 2c Large frame unit mechanical installation pre mid June 2002 HA261376 Chapter 1 Issue 8 Jul 04 Pagel 7 VISUAL SUPERVISOR HAN DBO 1 3 ELECTRICAL INSTALLATION Note Before carrying out any wiring please read the Safety Notes preceding this chapter This section consists of 1 3 1 Rear panel layout and connector pinouts 1 3 2 Operational signal cabling 1 3 3 Configuration signal cabling 1 3 4 Cabling from a Visual Supervisor to a controlling PC running SCADA 1 3 5 Cable schedule 1 3 6 Supply voltage wiring Note For large frame units manufactured prior to mid June 2002 the information given for small frame units applies 1 3 1 Rear panel layout and connector pinouts Configuration 1 3 3 1 or serial printer 1 3 1 6 port Function selected in Comms set up 4 5 O Safety Earth Top cover retaining screw mmm Supply voltage connector 81 3 6 ALIN ARCNET 1 3 1 2 dhdh OR Profibus connectors RJ45 Profibus connector 9 way D type 81 3 1 3 5 1 ELIN Ethernet 1 3 1 7 se ces Printer port parallel Relay connector NC NO C NCNO C Healt
13. X Ec 288 0mm 11 34 z E S View on right hand side uid Mounting slot Flap Left hand side ig open MEM Open flap for disk card access m 281 0 x 281 0 mm 0 0 1 0 mm View on underside 277 0 mm 10 9 in 11 07 x 11 07 in 0 00 0 05 in PANEL CUTOUT DETAILS Minimum recommended inter unit spacing Side clamps Top bottom clamps x 25 mm 1 inch x 2 12 5 mm 0 5 in 12 5 0 5 25 mm 1 inch MAXIMUM INSTALLED ANGLE a b 15 degrees PANEL MOUNTING Figure 1 2b Large frame unit mechanical installation current design Chapter 1 HA261376 Pagel 6 Issue 8 Jul 04 VISUAL SUPERVISOR HAN DBO OK 1 2 MECHANICAL INSTALLATION Cont Mounting Guide four places A Panel cutout T Clamp mounting spigot four places 281mm x 281mm both 1 0 11 1inx11 1in Wh 1101017170 both 0 05 0 _ Fay 000 137 mm Minimum recommended inter unit spacing EI 55 55 4 80 mm 220 mm 201 mm 288 mm Front View 04 Lift here to release for disk access This nut MUST be fitted as shown all 4 clamps or damage will be caused to the rear of the display screen
14. see section 4 5 1 3 if fitted ALIN Arcnet Fig 1 3 1 2 9 LM Pairs of connectors are ixed plug Fig 1 3 1 8 wired in parallel Modbus Master OR Section 1 3 1 1 E E S 8 gt pO Cable clamp ELIN Ethernet Fig 1 3 1 7 Modbus Slave Section 1 3 1 1 o Health NC Relay output Health NO Health Run 1 6 Keyboard Run COM CFG Comms Health Yell R Yellow Green Red Relay status LED Status Unit status Health Run Red Green Off De energised De energised Off Powering up De energised De energised On Application loaded Energised De energised Off Application running Energised Energised SLIN Comms activity at CFG port Yellow LED Status Data transfer in progress On Data transfer not in progress Off Figure 1 3 1b Rear panel details large frame units Caution When connecting the power cable ensure that it is properly secured in the cable clamp leaving a loop only just long enough to permit the connector to mate at 90 degrees to the rear panel If the loop is too short the connector may not mate correctly leading to early failure If too much cable is left in the loop or if the loop is left unclamped the connector can be disconnected accidentally In either case loss of any associated process control will ensue HA261376 Chapter 1 Iss
15. 2 17 2 10 1 Running Auto database create 2 18 PROGRAMMER jer pco nen egere en ede de ee Ds 2 18 o E TED E 2 18 te 2 18 ciet ite e baee oae ip cae emque E ep sh 2 18 2 10 2 Database 944 eene nnne 2 19 2 10 3 Database reia MNO sinet cs eene et Ee mee ee Ere uiis 2 19 Chapter 3 OPERATION 3 1 3 1 RUNNING A PROGRAM sssee Hmmm 3 1 3 1 1 Running a program now seb eli etx rr c ea 3 1 3 12 RUANING TOM a ice eerie 3 3 3 1 3 Scheduling a 1 Henne 3 4 3 1 3 1 SPECIFYING THE PROGRAM START DATE 3 5 3 1 3 2 SPECIFYING THE PROGRAM 3 5 3 1 3 3 CHANGING THENUMBER OF ITERATIO N S RUN S 3 6 3 1 4 Segment sklp vcre vinta rct p od tert EE eret cere ae sin 3 7 3 1 4 1 SEGMENT TRAN SITION CON SEQUENCES 3 7 FROM DW SET OR SEVO SPOR PV TO ANY OTHER TYPE 3 7 FROM erotici pt tt Y RR Rr petet gi Pn oce vezes 3 7 FRO M RAM P TO DW EUG iii eoe rer n irre eni e nent 3 7 FROM RAMP TO END STARTING 3 7 FROM RAMP TO COMPLETE IN FIN ITE DW 244 3 7 TO RAMP FROM AN
16. No Context Class Max Text 265 COMMS COMMS_ITEM 8 RS232 266 COMMS COMMS_ITEM 8 RS422 267 COMMS COMMS_ITEM 8 RS485 268 COMMS COMMS_ITEM 8 ARCNET 270 CLOCK PAGE_TITLE 20 Clock Setup 271 CLOCK LEGEND 11 CLOCK 272 CLOCK ITEM_TITLE 16 Date 273 CLOCK ITEM_TITLE 16 Time 274 CLOCK BUTTON_TEXT 12 SET 275 CLOCK BUTTON_TEXT 12 Hr 1 276 CLOCK BUTTON_TEXT 12 Hr 1 277 CLOCK INTRO 64 Clock configured as master 278 CLOCK INTRO 64 Clock configured as slave 280 SYSSUM ITEM_TITLE 18 SPP SFC 281 SYSSUM ITEM 8 SPP 282 SYSSUM ITEM 8 SFC 283 SYSSUM ITEM 8 DB 288 SYSSUM ITEM_TITLE 21 IPR Protection 289 SYSSUM SYSSUM_ITEM 8 Auditor 290 INTERNAT PAGE_TITLE 20 Internationalise 291 INTERNAT LEGEND 11 INTERNAT 292 INTERNAT ITEM_TITLE 14 Language 293 INTERNAT ITEM_TITLE 14 Date Format 294 INTERNAT ITEM_TITLE 14 Time Format 295 INTERNAT ITEM_TITLE 14 Duration Fmt 296 INTERNAT BUTTON_TEXT 12 CHANGE 300 INTERNAT LANGUAGE 12 English 301 INTERNAT LANGUAGE 12 French 302 INTERNAT LANGUAGE 12 German 303 INTERNAT LANGUAGE 12 Italian 304 INTERNAT LANGUAGE 12 Spanish 305 INTERNAT LANGUAGE 12 Lang_5 306 INTERNAT LANGUAGE 12 Lang 6 307 INTERNAT LANGUAGE 12 Lang 7 308 INTERNAT LANGUAGE 12 Lang 8 309 INTERNAT LANGUAGE 12 Lang 9 310 PANEL PAGE TITLE 20 Panel Setup 311 PANEL LEGEND 11 PANEL 312 PANEL PARA 24 BACK LIGHT 313 PANEL ITEM_TITLE 32 Brightness 314 PANEL ITEM_TITLE 32 Saver brightness 315 PANEL ITEM_TITLE 32 Timeout 316 PANEL PARA 24 PAGE TI
17. Press the required type in this case Ramp Dwell Step 1 Ramp 6 m Ramp highlights yellow 00 35 00 Dwell Step In 1 tape a Press the green Return key E x e t w SAMPLE D mese ae The dialogue box reappears now showing Ramp in field followed by an extra field Ramp at This field only when changing to Ana Segment a Ramp _ jjSetPoint In 1 Rampi Ramp at BO m Press the yellowed Ramp at field currently showing 0 0 m standing Digi to for zero units per minute HA261376 Chapter 4 Issue 8 Jly 04 4 5 VISUAL SUPERVISOR HAN DBO 4 1 3 1 CHANGING RAMP TYPE Cont E SAMPLE A numeric keyboard is displayed showing the current value of the ramp in a black confirmation bar at the top Key in the required ramp rate As soon as the first digit is entered the rest of the bar clears When the new entry is complete press Return The dialogue box reappears displaying the new value for the ramp rate T Press DONE z Setpoint Ana In 1 Rampe t os Ramp at 1 0 m A new Ramp to value is shown in the cell To save the new ramp type to press the Option key at the bottom of the screen then press the SAVE but ton that appears on
18. yi tiyu ilo p sidi hiji ki 4 112 fi 2 xul X fe Caps lock key Use up arrow key to select alternative keyboards RESET 800 nimi 2 uf uy gt lt fe 2 2 RESET T800 BapBat iei Security Access Enter required level and password then CHANGE Current Level LOCKED New Level OPERATOR Password CHANGE 2 2 E BapBat Security Access Enter required level and password then CHANGE Current Level OPERATOR New Level OPERATOR Password Wes CHANGE HA261376 Issue 8 Jly 04 Chapter 2 2 15 VISUAL SUPERVISOR HAN DBO 2 8 1 2 USER ID ACCESS METHOD 2 9 In order to gain access using this system a User Identity is entered instead of an access level before the password is entered User ID access level and password are all entered as described in section 4 4 3 To access the Security Access page either touch the logging pane SVGA units only or touch the menu key then the ACCESS key as described in Section 2 8 1 1 above
19. LU ee A 4 16 llati 7257 10 Name types ed deett ge 4 16 nsta Linear Bus layout see 7 6 Io Maximum no of nodes 7 1 E o m 3 12 E Operation tices ed 7 9 Trouble shooting 2 7 8 HA261376 Index Issue 8 Jly 04 Pagei 3 VISUAL SUPERVISOR HAN DBO P Cont S Cont Program Segment io 3 8 Changing duration 4 8 Changing the name 4 11 Changing the identifier 4 7 Creation etel 4 1 Deletiorniof inae eee nee reete 4 9 Display pane oreet 2 8 Insertingia i 4 8 Editing dete 4 1 OK e tace 3 7 Editor ACCESS tOta n ees 4 3 Timing display 4 14 Hold ERI 3 8 SEVO eti eee 4 4 Herato 3 6 Setpoint Monitoring cie aah 3 9 iir 4 4 Properties ive ds 4 11 Running SAVING iue BER he ae 4 13 From polnt ete 3 3 Setting and re setting passwords 4 28 From whieh eats 3 5 SET EE E aa ance tea 4 35 Running more than 3 2 4 47 Scheduling ee teet es 3 4 Sign amp 2 8 11 Programmer Sigriatule eH DRE 8 11 Text dictionary
20. 4 23 Horizontal with faceplate 3 31 Names etiem tede eit 5 49 ue pret eus 3 28 Fuse replacement Vertical fullwidth 3 31 1 21 Vertical with faceplate 3 29 Small Frame sss 1 20 e re ea teres het 4 4 Index HA261376 Pagei 2 Issue 8 Jly 04 VISUAL SUPERVISOR HAN DBO OK G M lossalty nma altes ebur C 2 Key nse stents eode 8 6 Group MAINT Key 4 Lente 4 34 n eee etus 3 21 Maintenance security 5 8 6 7 10 Max Login 8 5 Mechanical installation 1 4 H Message 8 2 Holdback 4 9 Home page declaration 5 46 Display Acknowledge 5 gt Horizontal display with faceplates 3 31 uus cedes e nep 4 40 Min alarm event 8 2 d EMMANUEL 4 40 Min ID length ne ciere ees 8 5 Houly Min Password
21. 4 42 4 52 41 LAIN GUA G vet epe dnt teas 4 43 4 5 4 2 DATE FORMAT ie rupit rar rar ec pero to ede 4 43 45 43 TIM E FORM AT rece Tester dentes 4 43 4 5 5 Setting up the panel 4 44 4 5 5 1 ACCESS TO THE PAN ELSETUP PAGE 4 44 4 5 5 2 DISPLAY BRIG HTN ESS 5 4 45 feed TIMEOUTS atin sider eto er dete men ree vri Fr rtr nnn 4 45 AD DA DATAEN meo neck 4 45 4 6 CLONING AN 4 4 4 46 4 6 1 Accessing the cloning page eene 4 46 460 2 Cloning application data oer kt ecce Rea e 4 47 4 6 2 1 EXPORTING APPLICATION DATA 4 47 4 6 2 2 IMPORTING APPLICATION 4 47 4 6 3 Cloning system instrument data 4 48 4 6 3 1 SELECTING SYSTEM DATA 4 48 4 6 3 2 EXPO SYSTEM DATA 4 48 4 6 3 3 IMPORTING SYSTEM DATA 1 3 4 48 4 6 4 Cloning both application and system data 4 49 4 7 FIIE MAN AGER i5 sit hp 4 50 4 7 1 Stopping the
22. 3 8 2 Recipe selection If applicable a specific recipe can be selected for loading from a pick list which appears if the Recipe field area is touched 3 8 3 Batch customising The Batch ID is initially chosen as unique by the instrument The name can be edited in the normal way In addition to the batch ID there can be up to six custom items in the example shown there are three viz Order No Customer and Contact Again these items are editable in the normal way The titles of these custom items e g Order No are set up using the customising techniques described in Chapter 5 below 2 61376 Chapter 3 Issue 8 Jul 04 Page 3 37 VISUAL SUPERVISOR HAN DBO 3 8 4 Batch initiation Please confirm starting of batch Once all the batch data has been entered operation of the START key causes one of the following to occur according as the batch has been configured 1 batch starts immediately 2 dialogue box appears asking for confirmation of Batch Start Operation of the OK button starts the batch 3 A dialogue box appears asking for the current user s password Entry of the password followed by operation of the OK button starts the batch OK CANCEL Batch Start Confirm Please confirm your password to start batch Password OK CANCEL 3 8 5 Batch monitoring The batch may be monitored from the Batch Status screen
23. 4 4 3 2 USER ID MANAGEMENT Cont New Users New users are entered using the NEW key at the bottom of the page first using the Option key to display it if nec essary The new identity and the password are entered as described in the example above The new information appears in green until the SAVE key is operated If necessary use the Option key to display the SAVE key Notes 1 For instruments fitted with the Auditor option it is not possible to create a new user with a previously retired ID See section 8 for more details 2 For instruments fitted with the Auditor option it is not possible to edit any aspect of an account once the SAVE key has been operated It is therefore essential to ensure that all entries are correct before saving Account properties Figure 4 4 3 2c below shows a typical properties page called by operating the PROPERTIES key at the bottom of the screen See section 8 for Audit pack variances Min User Id Length 2 Min Password Length 0 Max Login Attempts 0 Password Expiry days User Timeout 0 minutes OK CANCEL Figure 4 4 3 2c Properties page typical Note Please also refer to Section 8 4 1 if the Auditor Option is fitted Min User ID Length 208 Min Password Length 0 8 Max Login attempts 0 to 99 0 no limit Values greater than 0 show the number of attempts at logging in that may be made before the account is disa
24. Use this PAN slider or the arrow keys to select that part of the time base to be viewed Down moves back in time Cursor initially at top edge of screen 1 i HPR Moving this ZOOM slider right left increases decreases the amount of time base displayed Buttons have similar effect but provide step changes Zoom factor is shown below the display 17 02702 ISAS IA x2 Cursor date Cursor time Zoom factor Back Live key Faceplate NO A values are those at the DSP cursor time and date ak Figure 3 6 39 Trend review controls Chapter 3 HA261376 Page 3 30 Issue 8 Jul 04 VISUAL SUPERVISOR HAN DBO OK 3 6 3 DISPLAY MODES Cont VERTICAL TREND FULL WIDTH This view fills the width of the screen with no faceplates displayed Review mode is as described above Figure 3 6 3h Vertical full width display mode HORIZONTAL TREND WITH FACEPLATE The horizontal trend displays are similar to the vertical trend displays The main difference apart from the length of data displayed and that the traces move from right to left is the swapping of the Pan and Zoom control locations in Trend review mode Latest data is the right hand edge of the screen Figure 3 6 3 Horizontal trend with faceplates HA261376 Chapter 3 Issue 8 Jul 04 3 31 VISUAL SUPERVISOR HAN DBO
25. 4 En a E 5 66 SYSTEM VARIABLES 5 67 ENUMERATIO 5 rii reto ree e he P D e 5 67 5 15 5 Number of memes 5 68 5 15 6 Number of decimal 5 68 51537 nee o Eee ud 5 68 5 15 60 Usera em dpt ir ente e t e mb acte butts 5 69 Chapter 6 5 6 1 6 1 MO DBUS GATEWAY eie eer Rem LP nd 6 1 6 1 1 Overview of the Modbus 6 1 SLEI MAIN FEATURES pero rrr eroe eee 6 1 6 1 1 2 FUNCTION ALDESCRIPTIO 6 1 6 1 1 3 MODBUS JBUS FUNCTION CODES SUPPORTED 6 2 6 1 2 Principles of operationis ERR ate ER 6 2 6 1 2 1 REFRESH RATES AND TIMING INFORMATION 6 3 6 1 2 2 MEMORY USE AN D REQUIREMENTS 6 5 6 1 2 3 CO N VERSION sir aa Ret eg 6 6 6 1 3 Using the diagnostic table 6 7 6 1 3 1 IN TERN AL DIAGN O STIC 5 6 7 6 1 3 2 MO DBUS TABLE STATUS AND CON TRO L REGISTERS 6 7 6 1 3 3 SLAVE MODE DIAGNOSTIC TABLE REGISTERS
26. In the Properties window press the current value for iterations displayed in the Iterations field A numeric keyboard pop up menu appears allowing the default number of iterations to be set between 0 and 999 where 0 results in continuous running At End Endetinateypwell Iterations 3 4 1 8 Changing setpoint names Analogue and digital setpoint names can be changed but not while the program is running For analogue setpoints the holdback values can also be amended see section 4 1 6 above SIMPLE IDLE 22 22 22 simple With the program stopped press the setpoint whose name is to be edited in this example Ana In 1 For an analogue setpoint a window is displayed offering the option to change Setpoint name and Mode shown opposite For a digital setpoint the only editable field is Setpoint name Holdback NONE Press the yellowed field ciis DONE Setpoint in 1 Key in the new name up to a maximum of 16 characters FOLLOWED BY ENTER Ee aoe numm gnum 00 06 00 00 50 00 00 35 00 Ana In Holdback Dig in Mode NONE DONE Press DONE HA261376 Chapter 4 Issue 8 Jly 04 Page 4 13 VISUAL SUPERVISOR HAN DBO 4 1 9 Segment timing display Normally segment timing is shown and edited in terms of the duration of each seg
27. 1 22 14 1 51 UNIS xin tercie Der ER ere Pe re Pet en ro er oes 1 22 1 42 Large frame unit s ere eet re inse e 1 23 1 5 GETTING FIRST ACCESS eroe rere enn ree re rr e e n 1 24 1 6 SETTING CIO iiie eerte rrr trt or ere Rr Rn te RE ERR rr RR RR 1 24 1 7 MANUA TESTS siti Rodi rea Re eit c Pee rnt ol dr t Peor en 1 24 Tb Battery test reta eed he mn er en er rer 1 24 1 7 2 Relay eee e eer rero ek irl deter eder gd 1 25 1 7 3 5 emen enne nnn nnns 1 25 Chapter 2 GETTING STARTED 2 1 2 1 SWITCH ON AND THE OPENING DISPLAY 2 1 2 1 2 1 2 The 1 meme enne nnns 2 1 241 3 The staridafd interia Ceu eee eo vede ree ek exiis 2 1 2 1 3 1 DISPLAY PAN ES d Re Redde 2 2 2 1 3 2 NAVIGATION 2 Hmmm 2 3 2 1 3 3 KEYBOARD OPERATION 4 40 11 2 4 2 1 4 The Opening diSplay c ih ER Ec Pe Y RER 2 5 FREE MAINS PR Ro tole te dena el pte TUN 2 6 2 24 Inforimauonsdisplay sies coris utt a 2 6 2 22 Information ena asser e ERR e PRU RE UH IRR Te CR D ern d 2 6 Contents HA261376 Page 2 Issue 8 Jly 04 VISUAL SUPERVISOR HAN DBO OK LIST OF CONTENTS Section Page 2 3 THEPOP UP MENU
28. No Context Class Max Text 66 ALMMENU LEGEND 11 LOG 67 ALH PAGE_TITLE 20 Event Log 68 ALMMENU LEGEND 11 EVT LOG 71 ALMMENU PAGE_TITLE 20 Alarm Archive 12 ALMMENU LEGEND 11 ARCHIVE 73 ALMMENU INTRO 64 Archive to disk the alarm history 74 ALMMENU DIALOGUE_TITLE 28 Acknowledging All Cached Block Alarms 75 ALMMENU ITEM_TITLE 16 Remaining 76 ALMMENU ITEM TITLE 16 Block 77 PRINTER ALM_TYPE 3 ACK 78 PRINTER ALM_TYPE 3 ACT 79 PRINTER ALM_TYPE 3 CLR 80 FP PAGE_TITLE 20 T800 Starting 81 FP FP 32 Attempting Cold Start 82 FP FP 32 Attempting Warm Start 83 FP FP 32 Attempting Hot Start 84 FP FP 32 Unpacking Database 85 FP FP 32 Start Up Error 86 FP FP 32 Initialising 87 FP FP 32 Loading Application 88 FP FP 32 Unloading Application 89 FP FP 32 Please wait 90 APPMGR DIALOG_TITLE 28 Load Error 91 FATAL FATAL_ERROR 20 No cold hot start 92 FATAL FATAL_ERROR 20 No hot start 93 FATAL FATAL_ERROR 20 No cold start 101 MONTH MONTH 3 Jan 102 MONTH MONTH 3 Feb 103 MONTH MONTH 3 Mar 104 MONTH MONTH 3 Apr 105 MONTH MONTH 3 May 106 MONTH MONTH 3 Jun 107 MONTH MONTH 3 Jul 108 MONTH MONTH 3 Aug 109 MONTH MONTH 3 Sep 110 MONTH MONTH 3 Oct 111 MONTH MONTH 3 Nov 112 MONTH MONTH 3 Dec 113 ALH DATE POOR CHAR 1 114 ALH TIME POOR CHAR 1 120 GLOBAL BUTTON_TEXT 12 OK 121 GLOBAL BUTTON_TEXT 12 OK ALL 122 GLOBAL BUTTON_TEXT 12 CANCEL 123 GLOBAL BUTTON_TEXT 12 ABORT 124 GLOBAL BUTTON_TEXT 12 SKIP 125 GLOBA
29. TEE HA261134U005 Issue 1A The UserScreen Editor 2 2 HA260749U005 Issue 1A The LIN Blocks Reference M HA082375U003 Issue 7 LIN tools 2000 On line user guide RM263001U055 Issue N A The LIN ALIN Installation and User Guide HA082429U005 Issue 2 The 2500 Controller User M 2 7773 Issue 2 The iTools User M HA026179 Issue 2 All registered and unregistered trademarks are properties of their respective holders HA261376 Contents Issue 8 Jly 04 Page 1 VISUAL SUPERVISOR HAN DBO LIST OF CONTENTS Section Page INCOMES stat petes mon tette eie 1 1 SYMBOLS USED ON THE EQUIPMENT LABELLIN G 1 2 PREVEN TIVE MAIN TENAN C Erreari tbt ee Feo 1 2 Chapter 1 INSTALLATION 1 3 UN PACKIN diee i eee crt 1 3 1 2 iori hie heo ht Eb n ets 1 4 1 21 Saga c Ere epe Er t e ERROR RET vas 1 4 1 2 2 Large frame units pre midJune 2002 0 2 0 1 4 1 4 ELEC TRIG ALIN N dep PE HERE Nr UR tea 1 8 1 3 1 Rear panel layout and connector
30. tte ute 9 1 DIAGS wusssssssessssssessssenessessuseseseusesenenscsenessenesecseneseecsos 4 23 Files with capture variables 5 58 Dictionary Files with Monitor Variables 5 59 asl 0 5 28 Floppy disk eicere titer 2 16 3 12 5 30 rane nee eer ae 5 51 igo TT 5 1 Formatting attributes 5 68 Programmer text 4 44 5 35 FotmSx 33 58 cake te dae aa Utd wreck ie tis 4 47 System text 5 2 5 69 4 32 9 1 4 0 400 100049 00 00 012 n 5 35 9 1 Dictionary text 42 0 0 4 0 004440 5 66 TIMGOUL 9 1 Disable Function block 4 27 BIST 3 12 Display Order coccccceccccccccccccecceteeececececececeutteesensess 4 26 ACCOSS id PP 2 16 Faceplate hoi foals Tales ad Pict SD A IP Lord 3 23 Display Brightness 4 44 12 3 23 Display mode Di4 module ied 3 24 3 26 Horizontal 440 50 9 9 0 3 29 3 27 Vertical ete e 3 28 Bain se E pis 3 25 Faceplat 0 e esie ien puis 3 28 Manager
31. 3 11 3 20 Data formats TRUE ERE 7 10 Event message Data integrity aes 3 15 5 34 Database New language 2 5 34 Automatic creation 2 17 Event 5 34 Names oenn 5 2 5 49 Event text dictionary 5 30 Date Exception 6 9 Format Exporting application 4 47 SeleCtlOniz 2 Pct tut 4 42 F Daylight 4 41 DC supply voltage Faceplate display mode 3 28 Fuse 1 20 1 25 File DCM Available 7 1 4 51 eae 1804522 Header 5 56 Deleting Management 0 00 3 14 Files from disk 3 14 Man get tes ih rie os 4 50 Segments 4 16 User 4 32 Hourly Daily 3 11 8 7 File een 5 62 Diagnostics Modbus 6 7 File System
32. PROPERTIES MAINT REVISION DEPLOY gt Figure 8 1 3a Security Access As can be seen from the figure the page is divided into a number of columns Name Access and Reference columns are all as described in section 4 4 3 above Other columns are used as follows HA261376 Chapter 8 Issue 8 Jul 04 Page 8 3 VISUAL SUPERVISOR HAN DBO 8 1 3 USER ID CONTROL Cont IDENTITY Touching a users Identity cell calls the Identity pop up to appear figure 8 1 3b This allows a new password to be entered for the ID in the normal way The new password has a 24 hour expiry so the user has to login and provide a further new password with this time period The pop up also allows IDs to be Retired or Disabled richard Identity Password 0908 Confirm OK CANCEL enne DISABLE Figure 8 1 3b Identity pop up RETIRE retired user is permanently removed from the Security Access page and all access privileges are terminated Re tired users Identities Names and passwords may not be reused It is therefore recommended that a note is kept of all Retired users details DISABLE Users who are disabled Identity and Name in Red lose their access privileges in a non permanent way To reinstate a Disabled user the Identity cell is touched the User s password entered and confirmed and OK touched If the pass word is correct the User is re e
33. HIGH amp LOW Holdback ane 1 Mode i Value 777 4 4 10 261376 Issue 8 Jly 04 VISUAL SUPERVISOR HAN DBO OK 4 1 7 Changing program properties In the Program Editor page press the SP Setpoint cell at top left The Properties window appears prompting for Name a Rate Units At End aa Name SAMPLE Rate Units Minutes At End B definitegDwell Di n 159 Iterations Dig DONE From this screen the possible tasks are To change the name of a program section 4 1 7 1 To change the rate units section 4 1 7 2 To choose an action to be taken at the end of each run section 4 1 7 3 To change the default number of iterations section 4 1 7 4 To save any new settings press the Option key at the bottom of the screen and then the SAVE button 4 1 7 1 CHANGING PROGRAM NAMES Note A program name should be changed only if non file name characters are to be included If this is the case it should be remembered that the file name of the program takes the name of the program by default In other words the program name overrides the file name Therefore if a program is saved to a new file two programs of the same name will exist embedded within different files SAMPLE IDLE 22 22 22 In the Properties window press the c
34. Up Down Left Right Cycle Option Menu screens Figure 2 1 3a SVGA screen layout Figure 2 1 3b 1 4 VGA screen layout Chapter 2 HA261376 2 2 Issue 8 Jly 04 VISUAL SUPERVISO 2 1 3 2 NAVIGATION KEYS APMIS OY UP DOWN LEFT RIGHT CYCLE OPTION MENU SCREENS Figure 2 1 3 2 The Navigation keys These touch sensitive printed keys at the bottom of the screen carry the following functions UP Goes up one level of menu hierarchy DOWN Goes down one level or cycles the screen according to context LEFT Jumps across left in the hierarchy at the same level Also moves forward left between successive pages of tabular data Action depends upon context RIGHT Jumps across right in the hierarchy at the same level Also moves back right between successive pages of tabular data Action depends upon context CYCLE SCREENS For SVGA displays only this key allows the ways in which information is displayed to be scrolled through The cycle screens key does not appear with 1 4VGA screen units its function is carried by the Down key OPTION Brings up a menu or an extra set of keys for options specific to the page on display MENU Brings up the main top level Pop up menu of the hierarchy 2 61376 Chapter 2 Issue 8 04 Page 2 3 VISUAL SUPERVISOR HAN DBO OK 2 1 3 3 KEYBOARD OPERATION It is possible to set up the un
35. 2 12 Issue 8 Jly 04 VISUAL SUPERVISO 2 7 LOGGING This area is displayed only versions of the instrument Touching this area calls the logging menu shown below The logging function allows data to be saved to floppy disk as described in section 3 4 of this manual That section also shows how to access the logging menu from the menu key MONITOR OFF LINE MANAGE GROUPS Figure 2 7 Logging menu 2 8 ACCESS PANE This area is displayed only by SVGA versions of the instrument Touching this area calls the first of the access pages described in Gaining access below This is an alternative to using the menu key followed by ACCESS as described below 2 8 1 Gaining access There are two methods of gaining access to the instrument configuration the standard system described in section 2 8 1 1 below and the User ID method described in Section 2 8 1 2 The instrument is supplied with the standard access system in operation but it can be converted irreversibly to the User ID version as described in section 4 4 of this manual For units fitted with the Auditor option see also section 8 2 8 1 1 STANDARD ACCESS For the Visual Supervisor there are nominally three types of users Operators Commissioning Engineers and Engi neers Each of these three types has what is known as a level of access to the facilities of the instrument based upon the
36. A in figure 1 3 6 4a and the pan head screws B and C All these fixings should be retained for use in re assembly For current in struments screws A are T8 Torx headed screws Previous versions used cross head screws For previous ver sions items C were two part plastic rivets 3 Once all the fixings have been removed the cover can be removed by lifting its bottom edge upwards and out wards figure 1 3 6 4b 4 As shown in figure 1 3 6 3c disconnect the harnesses connecting the electronics card cage to the display the inverter harness the display flexi cable and the touch screen flexi cable 5 As shown in figure 1 3 6 3c undo the two screws securing the card cage to the chassis 6 cage can now be rotated out of the chassis to reveal the power supply with its fuse figure 1 3 6 3d 7 Replace the fuse Part Number CH280252 located on the PSU board as shown in figure 1 3 6 4d A Ay 0 lt B a e C Figure 1 3 6 4a Remove cover fixings g lt JJ m m 2 Figure 1 3 6 4c Disconnect harnesses Undo securing screws Figure 1 3 6 4d Fuse location HA261376 Chapter 1 Issue 8 Jul 04 Page 1 21 VISUAL SUPERVISOR HAN DBO OK 1 4 SWITCHING COMMUNICATIONS PARAMETERS For MODBUS comms only this section shows how to swap between 5 wire and 3 wire communications This is accomplished by setting links on the interconnect board within the in
37. Invensys EUROTHERM Invensys EUROTHERM Declaration of Conformity Manufacturer s name Eurotherm Limited Manufacturer s address Faraday Close Worthing West Sussex BN13 3PL United Kingdom Product type Visual Supervisor Models T800 small frame Status level Q36 and above T800 large frame Status level Q16 and above Safety specification EN61010 1 EMC emissions specification EN61326 EMC immunity specification EN61326 Industrial Eurotherm Limited hereby declares that the above products conform to the safety and EMC specifications listed Eurotherm Limited further declares that the above products comply with the EMC Directive 89 336 EEC amended by 93 68 EEC and also with the Low Voltage Directive 73 23 EEC Signed lr ts Davis Dated Ath Ja OF Signed for and on behalf of Eurotherm Limited William Davis General Manager 1A249986U430 Issue 2 Jly 04 2004 Eurotherm Limited All rights are strictly reserved No part of this document may be reproduced modified or transmitted in any form by any means nor may it be stored in a retrieval system other than for the purpose to act as an aid in operating the equipment to which the document relates without the prior written permission of Eurotherm limited Eurotherm Limited pursues a policy of continuous development and product improvement The specifications in this document may therefore be changed without notice
38. ON in the Logging field and select OFF from the pick list followed by Enter HA261376 Chapter 3 Issue 8 Jul 04 Page 3 13 VISUAL SUPERVISOR HAN DBO 3 4 5 The Manage facility The MANAGE facility allows deletion of files from the disk For internal archive devices itt also allows the export of files to a removable storage device Example From the Logging Monitor page it is clear that the disk is getting full but all the data from this run is re quired to be contained on one disk and it is not desirable to change disk in mid run The MANAGE facility is used to delete enough unwanted files usually the oldest ones to make space for the remainder of the run as follows Archive Manage File Type Binary 1 From the Logging Monitor page press MANAGE File 00001000 PKD After a short delay the Archive Manage page appears displaying isle 4 kBytes information about the file currently recording Media Size 1425 kBytes File Type ASCII or PACKED Free Space 199 kBytes File Name In the format 8 char name typ For example Free Time 222772 as010323 asc m DELETE MONITOR File Size Number of kBytes Media Size Capacity of the disk 1 44MB Free Space kBytes of free space left Free Time hh mm ss 2 return to the Logging Monitor page press the MONITOR key 3 To select a file to delete press the yellowed File Name field 4 On the left of the
39. Press SYSTEM key ACCESS SYSTEM ALARMS 4 6 1 Accessing the cloning page PROGRAMMER LOGGING HOME 1 Press the Menu key 2 Select SYSTEM Press CLONING 3 Select CLONING Cloning The Cloning page appears 4 Press the Application field yellowed EXPORT IMPORT Cloning Application i 2 c NC System pick list appears allowing System Application or ALL to be Acces el selected All The highlighted field Application in this example indicates which IMPORT type of data was last selected for cloning x Chapter 4 HA261376 Issue 8 Jly 04 Page 4 46 VISUAL SUPERVISOR HAN DBO OK 4 6 2 Cloning application data This consists of 1 Exporting application data Section 4 6 2 1 2 Importing application data Section 4 6 2 2 4 6 2 1 EXPORTING APPLICATION DATA From the Cloning page select Application ESE Control Database NO The Application Data Cloning page appears displaying the following fields SFCs NO described below Programs Recipes NO User Pages NO 1 Control Database 2 mm ror 2 SFCs Sequential Function Charts ee eee EXPORT CLEAR 3 Programs Recipes 4 User pages 5 Forms 6 Comms Profiles Control Database SFCs Programs Recipes U
40. 538 SPP SPP_AT_END 24 Starting Values 539 SPP ITEM_TITLE 16 Ref 540 SPP DIALOG_TEXT 80 Program Limits Exceeded 550 SPP ITEM_TITLE 20 Rate Units 551 SPP SPP_RATE_UNITS 16 Seconds 552 SPP SPP_RATE_UNITS 16 Minutes 553 SPP SPP_RATE_UNITS 16 Hours 554 SPP SPP_RATE_UNITS 16 days 555 SPP DIALOG_TEXT 80 No program loaded 561 SPP ITEM_TITLE 16 Id 562 SPP DIALOG_TEXT 80 Common Block Refs 563 SPP ITEM_TITLE 16 Iterations 570 SPP BUTTON_TEXT 12 SKIP 571 SPP BUTTON_TEXT 12 LAYOUT 572 SPP PAGE_TITLE 20 Editor layout 573 SPP ITEM_TITLE 16 Long SP names 574 SPP ITEM_TITLE 16 Segment start 575 SPP ITEM_TITLE 16 Segment duration 576 SPP ITEM_TITLE 16 Segment finish Chapter 5 HA261376 Page 5 12 Issue 8 Jly 04 VISUAL SUPERVISOR HAN DBO 5 2 4 THE DICTIONARY Cont No Context Class Max Text 577 SPP ITEM_TITLE 16 Start Time 578 SPP ITEM_TITLE 16 Finish Time 598 SIGN BUTTON_TEXT 12 OK 599 SIGN BUTTON_TEXT 12 CANCEL 600 SIGN PAGE_TITLE 20 Signature 601 SIGN PAGE_TITLE 20 Confirmation 602 SIGN PARA 24 Authorised by 603 SIGN ITEM_TITLE 16 Reason 604 SIGN PARA 24 Signed by 605 SIGN ITEM_TITLE 16 Old Value 606 SIGN ITEM_TITLE 16 New Value 607 SIGN ITEM_TITLE 16 Confirm Action 608 SIGN PAGE_TITLE 20 Signature Rejected 609 SIGN ITEM_TITLE 16 Action Result 610 TEST PAGE_TITLE 20 Self Tests 611 TEST LEGEND 11 TEST 612 TEST LEGEND 11 BATTERY 613 TEST LEGEND 11 RELAYS 61
41. BY For examples If the value of the block PID1 options is 42 then Pid1 options 8 YZ prints 42 as an 8 bit binary value with leading zeros 00101010 Pidl options 8XZ prints 42 as 0000002 and Pid1 options 4xL prints 42 as 2a00 where 9 represents a space If the value of the block PID1 options is 42 0 then Pidl options 8S prints 42 as 0004 2E1 where 9 represents a space BARGRAPHS Simple bargraphs consisting of a horizontal line of asterisks can be included in the report by the entry of scale low and high values and the adding of the letter B after the width character For example if the user entered scale is 0 to 50 and the width is 20 then a value of 0 is represented by zero asterisks and a value of 50 is represented by 20 aster isks Thus for this example each asterisk represents 20 50 or 0 4 of the scale If the value is not a whole number of asterisks then rounding is applied Thus a value of 42 would be represented by 42 x 0 4 16 8 17 asterisks but a value of 41 41 x 0 4 16 4 would be represented by 16 asterisks The 17th asterisk would turn on when the process value reached 41 5 The following entry includes literal text entries to show the low and high scale values 0 Loop1 PV gt 0 lt 50 20B 50 For a value of 42 this produces the following printout 0 RAR 50 FURTHER INFORMATION 1 Variables of type ENUM are printed textually even in
42. DICT SI W 8W S DICT ADD W 1 14 WU 11 This construct may particularly useful in scanning a list of text items into the W dictionary which may then be used as input to a report HA261376 Issue 8 Jly 04 Chapter 5 Page 5 69 VISUAL SUPERVISOR HAN DBO This page is deliberately left blank Chapter 5 HA261376 Page 5 70 Issue 8 Jly 04 VISUAL SUPERVISOR HAN DBO OK CHAPTER 6 MODBUS 6 1 This chapter describes the two implementations of Modbus available on this instrument The two versions are called Modbus Gateway 6 1 and Modbus DCM Devolved Control Module 6 2 See also Chapter 1 Section 1 3 for cabling details Note Modbus Gateway version does not support Modbus Master mode MODBUS GATEWAY This section describes the implementation of the Modbus gateway in the Unit controller supervisor The main topics covered are Overview of the Modbus gateway 6 1 1 Principles of operation 6 1 2 Using the diagnostic table 6 1 3 Modbus diagnostic function codes 6 1 4 Modbus exception responses 6 1 5 Notes on Modbus JBUS implementation 6 1 6 Modbus JBUS interface performance figures 6 1 7 tn 6 1 1 Overview of the Modbus gateway The Modbus JBUS gateway provides a serial interface to the LIN database By using the techniques of block caching the gateway can access data in other nodes distributed on the LIN as well as
43. HA261376 Issue 8 Jly 04 VISUAL SUPERVISO HANDBOOK APPENDIX C REFERENCE C1 ASCII CODES The following table contains representations of the characters set UNICODE Latin 1 available on the unit Character Code Character Code Character Code Character Code Space 20 50 D DO 21 Q 51 Al N DI 22 R 52 A2 D2 23 S 53 A3 D3 24 T 54 A4 D4 25 U 55 AS D5 amp 26 V 56 A6 D6 i 27 W 57 7 D7 28 X 58 2 D8 29 Y 59 A9 U D9 2 7 5 a AA U DA 2B 5B AB U DB 2 5 U DC 2 5D AD Y DD 2 5 DE 2F E SF 2 AF B DF 0 30 60 1 31 61 Bl a El 2 32 b 62 2 B2 2 3 33 63 3 B3 a E3 4 34 d 64 B4 a 4 5 35 65 u B5 E5 6 36 f 66 B6 E6 7 37 g 67 B7 E7 8 38 h 68 8 8 8 9 39 69 B9 E9 3A i 6A 0 3B k 6B BB EB lt 3C 1 6C 1 3D m 6D i ED gt 3E 6E a BE i EE 6F 4 0 40 70 CO FO A 41 q 71 Cl 1 42 72 C2 5 2 43 s 73 C3 F3 D 44 t 74 C4 F4 E 45 u 75 C5 5 46 76 C6 F6 G 47 w 77 C7 a F7 H 48 x 78 C8 F8 I 49 y 79 C9 F9 J 4A 2 7 FA K 4B 7 FB L 4C 7 i CC ii FC M 4D 7D CD FD N 4E 7E CE 4 y FF Table C ASCII codes HA261376 Appendix C Issue 8 Jly 04 Pa
44. HA261376 Chapter 3 Issue 8 Jul 04 Page 3 27 VISUAL SUPERVISOR HAN DBO 3 6 3 DISPLAY MODES Cont FACEPLATE DISPLAY This display shows the contents of the group as what are called faceplates This particular display is fully described in the Overview section 3 6 1 above To scroll to the next display mode touch the down arrow key or for SVGA units only the Cycle Screens key 8 8888 ad OOOOOOOO s ssssss A v OO0000000 Mo dut 8 888888 A V LAS gt Use down arrow to change view Figure 3 6 3a Faceplate display mode NUMERIC DISPLAY This shows point values as seven segment displays with faceplates Figure 3 6 3b Numeric display mode VERTICAL BARGRAPH This mode shows the current point values as vertical bars with faceplates The height of each bar is proportional to the current value of its associated point Zero and full scale values appear to the left of the bars 400 800 800 800 400 B Figure 3 6 3c Vertical bargraph display mode Chapter 3 HA261376 Page 3 28 Issue 8 Jul 04 VISUAL SUPERVISOR HAN DBO OK 3 6 3 DISPLAY MODES Cont HORIZONTAL BARGRAPH This mode shows the cu
45. certes 3 261376 Issue 8 Jly 04 VISUAL SUPERVISOR HAN DBO C Cont E Config sizes and limits Modbus 6 5 Editing Gonfirmonly s eet Rr tes 8 11 AAPM NAMES 25 4 5 49 Connector Error messages 5 29 cte desto 1 11 Event messages 5 34 Elite i 1 12 Function block names 5 49 ProflDus autetn esce 1 11 Recipes cese o ER re 4 52 Consumer selection 40 440 8 2 Electrical 1 8 Control Database 4 47 Electronic signatures 8 10 Creation of Blocks sss 4 25 ET cote heal tant MER 4 38 Credit card scanner connection 1 12 Empty Strings 5 65 3 30 3 32 DC I MM 4 12 Customisation of 5 26 Engineer level access 4 28 5 1 Enumerations 5 50 5 67 Error Message 5 29 Daily Text dictionary 5 28 5 69 File 222 2 4 16 ETHERNET s hoe toe teet 4 38 PIGS
46. is a set of up to 16 data values that are recorded to one file The data can be drawn from the same source or from different sources If from the same source the data can be recorded at different data rates with each data rate assigned to a different group It is possible to record just one group or several groups simultaneously If several groups are to be recorded simulta neously the groups can be saved to one file or to separate files Typically logging groups of data is used for 1 General audit records for subsequent analysis with MS Excel for instance 2 Quality control of product and plant 3 Monitoring staff performance 4 2 1 Log initiation ACCESS ALARMS PROGRAMMER LOGGING 1 Press the Menu key then LOGGING then GROUPS The Logging Groups page appears showing data for a single group 2 V Press LOGGING 1 To scroll between groups press either the lt or gt keys can be used key Press menu key For any group the fields are as follows MONITOR OFF LINE GROUP NAME This is an identifier given to each group of data To name a file or to change a file name first turn MANAGE GROUPS Logging to OFF see next paragraph then re enter the name Logging Groups ee Group Name lgrpi LOGGING This shows ON OFF or On Event What is Logging shown depends upon whether logging
47. keys as described below Figure 2 1 3a shows a large frame SVGA unit figure 2 1 3b a small frame 1 4 VGA unit These drawings are not to the same scale HA261376 Chapter 2 Issue 8 Jly 04 2 1 VISUAL SUPERVISOR HAN DBO OK 2 1 3 1 DISPLAY PANES The main pane This area contains the keys menus pick lists dialogue boxes windows and pages that make up the standard menu system of the Visual Supervisor The program pane This displays information about the state of the program that is currently loaded or running The alarm pane This displays alarm signals and messages The logging pane For SVGA units only touching this area calls the logging menu to the main pane The logging pane does not appear on 1 4VGA units The access pane For SVGA units only displays the currently logged in user Touching this area calls the access menu to the main pane The access pane does not appear on 1 4VGA units The recipe pane For SVGA units fitted with the recipe software option only this pane shows the status of the current recipe line See chapters 3 and 4 for details of the recipe application 3 5 LOCKED T800 BadBat Page Title me System Summary Logging Pane Program Pane Page title bar Page title bar Main pan Main pane UP DOWN LEFT RIGHT OPTION MENU Navigation keys
48. rotor ch ee EE HERE SY E p Ex 2 7 2 4 THE PRO GRAM eii erbe ent irt dad ee iit Pu ceret RS 2 8 2 4 1 Displaying program status 2 8 W ITH NO PROGRAM 1 2 8 WITH A PROGRAM 11 10 2 8 2 4 2 Programmer menu ACCESS eene nnns 2 8 2 5 IHE PRO GRAMMER M EN U encre nn ee Penn n ie nere ves 2 9 2 6 THE ALARM PAN Eirci rintaa eee PR Per ero e ihn A Re rite e do ees 2 10 2 6 1 Alarm state indication 2 10 ACTIVE MESSAGE DISPLAY 2 11 2 6 2 Responding to 2 2 4 4 4 2 1 2 11 ALARM HISTO PAG E edo eire eerie er e nrc e ee eer 2 11 TWO TIN E DISP DAY eere ere he E E thee ne eos 2 12 ALARM ACKNOW 1 2 12 2 1 JOGGING ere n Rt vcr Co Pr bn E e 2 13 2 0 ACCESS Eee e 2 13 2 81 Gaining aC ESS e si eter ete e ri e edd 2 13 2 01 1 STAN DARD AC C ESS rr rh re RR 2 13 2 8 1 2 USER ID ACCESS 4 1 7 2 16 2 0 THE FLOPPY DISK Rate aec des e dei n rri een 2 16 2 10 CREATING A DATABASE AUTO MATICALLY
49. 1185 RECIPE DIALOG_TITLE 28 SAVE AS 1186 RECIPE ITEM TITLE 16 File Name 1187 RECIPE DIALOG TITLE 28 Load Recipe File 1188 RECIPE DIALOG TEXT 80 Recipe already loaded 1189 RECIPE DIALOG TITLE 28 UNSAVED EDITS 1190 RECIPE DIALOG TEXT 80 This operation will result in the loss of recipe edits which have not yet been saved 1191 RECIPE DIALOG TEXT 80 Overwriting 1192 RECIPE DIALOG TITLE 28 Delete Variable 1193 RECIPE DIALOG TITLE 28 Properties 1194 RECIPE DIALOG TITLE 28 Insert Variable 1195 RECIPE DIALOG TITLE 28 RECIPE FILE DELETE 1196 RECIPE DIALOG TITLE 28 CREATE AS 1197 RECIPE DIALOG TITLE 28 SELECT LINE 1198 RECIPE DIALOG TITLE 28 Capture Recipe 1199 RECIPE DIALOG TEXT 80 Capturing 1200 BATCH LEGEND 11 BATCH 1201 BATCH MENU TITLE 16 Batch Chapter 5 HA261376 Page 5 20 Issue 8 Jly 04 VISUAL SUPERVISOR HAN DBO 5 2 4 THE DICTIONARY Cont No Context Class Max Text 1202 BATCH BATCH_STATE 12 RESET 1203 BATCH BATCH_STATE 12 IDLE 1204 BATCH BATCH_STATE 12 STARTING 1205 BATCH BATCH_STATE 12 RUNNING 1206 BATCH BATCH_STATE 12 COMPLETE 1207 BATCH BATCH_STATE 12 HOLDING 1208 BATCH BATCH_STATE 12 HELD 1209 BATCH BATCH_STATE 12 RESTARTING 1210 BATCH BATCH_STATE 12 PAUSING 1211 BATCH BATCH_STATE 12 PAUSED 1212 BATCH BATCH_STATE 12 RESUMING 1213 BATCH BATCH_STATE 12 STOPPING 1214 BATCH BATCH_STATE 12 STOPPED 1215 BATCH BATCH_STATE 12 ABORTING 1216 BATCH BATCH_STATE 12 AB
50. 223 COMMS DIALOG_TITLE 28 Hardware check 224 COMMS DIALOG_TEXT 80 IMPORTANT Ensure comms cables are unplugged 228 COMMS 229 COMMS 224 COMMS 230 COMMS 231 COMMS 233 COMMS 234 COMMS 235 COMMS 236 COMMS 237 COMMS 238 COMMS 239 COMMS 240 COMMS 241 COMMS 242 COMMS 243 COMMS 244 COMMS 245 COMMS 246 COMMS 247 COMMS 248 COMMS 249 COMMS 250 COMMS 251 COMMS 252 COMMS 253 COMMS 254 COMMS 255 COMMS 256 COMMS 259 COMMS 260 COMMS 261 COMMS 262 COMMS 263 COMMS COMMS_ITEM COMMS_ITEM OPTION_BUTTON COMMS_ITEM COMMS PORT COMMS PORT COMMS PORT COMMS PORT COMMS PORT COMMS PORT COMMS PORT COMMS PORT COMMS ATTR COMMS ATTR COMMS ATTR COMMS ATTR COMMS ATTR COMMS ATTR COMMS ATTR COMMS ATTR COMMS ATTR COMMS ATTR COMMS ATTR COMMS ITEM COMMS ITEM COMMS ITEM COMMS ITEM COMMS ITEM COMMS ITEM COMMS ITEM COMMS ITEM COMMS ITEM COMMS ITEM COMMS ITEM OO OO OO OO OO OO OO OO NO NO NO NO NO NO NO NO NO NO NO Un CA CA CA before pressing OK to continue Ethernet AT102 HARDWARE 1284 SLV MST PBUSI PBUS2 ALIN LPT KBD PORT Hardware Protocol Node No Baud Parity Data Bits Stop Bits Timeout Talk Thru Ind Table None SLIN TermCfg Modbus S Modbus M WDB Reader Keypad NONE EVEN ODD HA261376 Issue 8 Jly 04 Chapter 5 5 7 VISUAL SUPERVISOR HAN DBO OK 5 2 4 THE DICTIONARY Cont
51. 4 Select INTERNAT RESET Internationalise Language migis Date Format DD 1M YY The Internationalise page appears Duration Fmt CHANGE The following subsections describe each of the four yellowed fields displayed on the Internationalise page Chapter 4 HA261376 Page 4 42 Issue 8 Jly 04 VISUAL SUPERVISOR HAN DBO OK 4 5 4 CHANGING LANGUAGE DATE FORMAT Cont 4 5 4 1 LANGUAGE If the Language field is touched a pick list appears showing which lan guages are available Select the required language and press Return The pick list disappears Press CHANGE The Language field shows the selected language 4 5 4 2 DATE FORMAT If the Date Format field is touched a pick list of the available Date For mats appears Select the required format and press Return The pick list disappears Press CHANGE The Date Format field shows the selected format 4 5 4 3 TIME FORMAT If the Time Format field is touched a pick list of the available time for mats appears Select the required format and press Return The pick list disappears Press CHANGE The Time Format field shows the selected time format If the Duration Format field is touched a pick list of the available time duration formats appears Select the required format and press Return The pick list disappears Press CHANGE The Duration Format field shows the selecte
52. A further operation of the Up Arrow calls a keyboard of accented lower case letters A final operation returns the original keyboard to the display In entering the password as described in step 8 below the charac ters can be selected from all three keyboards as required 8 Enter the first character of the password It appears in the black confirmation bar at top left and the cursor moves under the next space Enter the next character and so on Erroneous characters can be deleted by positioning the cursor under the relevant character and pressing the C key Alterna tively to return to the Security Access page press the red cross key 9 When the confirmation bar shows the correct password press the Return key The Security Access page reappears unchanged from step 6 10 Press CHANGE The display blanks momentarily and returns showing the selected level OPERATOR ENGINEER or COMMISSION in the Current Level field as well as the new level field If not an incorrect password must have been entered Check that the password is correct for the level selected in step 4 and then repeat from step 3 onward 2 2 RESET T800 J Security Access Enter required level and password then CHANGE Current Level LOCKED New Level OPERATOR Password CHANGE 800
53. ALM_HIST 0 Alarm history 1 Alarm summary BATCH 0 Batch load start 1 Batch status LOGGING 0 Monitor 1 Off line 2 Archive Management 3 Groups MESSAGE 0 All messages on view 1 Single message on view RECIPE 0 Recipe selection 1 Recipe status 2 Recipe Monitor 3 Recipe editor SPP 0 Monitor 1 Programs 2 Schedule 3 Preplot 4 Edit 5 Preview 6 Run From TEST 0 Battery test 1 Relay test 2 Reset instrument Table 5 7 46 Agentsub menus for entry points 21 Chapter 5 Page 5 48 HA261376 Issue 8 Jly 04 VISUAL SUPERVISOR HAN DBO OK 5 8 DATABASE NAMES The LIN database within any Visual Supervisor consists of a number of function blocks some of which are set by Instrument manufacturer and are common to all Visual Supervisors and some of which function block names alarm names and Enumerations are specified by the user for the process to be controlled Function block names are open to change using LINtools either by customers or by OEMs Enumerations are also editable but not via LinTools see section 5 8 3 These three types of names text items are held in Database Names files called wyn files These files are optional but where they exist there will be one per database application They take the name lt appname gt uyn 5 8 1 Function block names Function block names are displayed in two facilities Alarm History and Logging Groups and in addition are used in logging files where they a
54. Applies only to units fitted with the Auditor Option HA261376 Issue 8 Jly 04 Chapter 5 Page 5 33 VISUAL SUPERVISOR HAN DBO 5 4 1 Editing Event Messages The Event dictionary supplied forms a part of the _system uyl file To customise it the principle is the same as for the System and Error text dictionaries 1 In the Event text dictionary find the text to be replaced 2 Note its reference number 3 Key in the reference number and then the replacement text related by V lt N gt lt text gt where lt N gt is the reference number of the record to be changed lt text gt is the replacement text For example V41 Appn loaded 5 4 2 Creating new language error text Any additional language dictionaries that are created must be named _event0 uyl _event uyl _event2 uyl and so on up to event9 uyl one dictionary for each language to be implemented PROCEDURE Using a standard text or spreadsheet editor 1 Write a first column of reference numbers from V1 to at least V116 2 In the second column write the error message in the required language Files should be saved as CSV files 5 4 3 Event priorities All events are initially priority 1 It is possible to assign other priorities in order for example to filter events for use with the printer logging or trends using the ALARM blocks As with alarms each event may be assigned a priority of 0 to 15 inclusive where priority 0 disables the even
55. TITLE 3 DI4 972 AGP ITEM TITLE 3 DO4 973 AGP ITEM_TITLE 3 AO2 974 AGP ITEM TITLE 3 AI3 975 AGP ITEM TITLE 3 DIS 976 AGP ITEM TITLE 3 14 977 ITEM_TITLE 3 AO4 978 AGP ITEM_TITLE 3 DO8 979 AGP ITEM_TITLE 3 14 980 ITEM_TITLE 3 DI6 990 AGP ITEM_TITLE 16 XP HA261376 Chapter 5 Issue 8 Jly 04 Page 5 17 VISUAL SUPERVISOR HAN DBO 5 2 4 THE DICTIONARY Cont No Context Class Max Text 991 AGP ITEM_TITLE 16 TI 992 AGP ITEM_TITLE 16 TD 993 AGP ITEM_TITLE 16 RCG 994 AGP ITEM_TITLE 16 CBH 995 AGP ITEM_TITLE 16 CBL 996 AGP ITEM_TITLE 16 MR 997 AGP ITEM_TITLE 16 Act 1000 AGP PAGE_TITLE 20 FB Manager 1001 AGP LEGEND 11 FB MGR 1002 FB_MGR ITEM_TITLE 16 Block name 1003 FB_MGR ITEM_TITLE 16 Block type 1004 FB_MGR ITEM_TITLE 16 Cached from 1005 FB_MGR ITEM_TITLE 4 ms 1006 FB_MGR ITEM_TITLE 16 Update rate 1007 FB_MGR ITEM_TITLE 16 Update rate 1008 FB_MGR ITEM_TITLE 16 Update rate 1009 FB_MGR ITEM 16 No connections 1010 ACCESS INTRO 64 User ID and password then LOG ON 1011 ACCESS ITEM_TITLE 18 Ident 1012 ACCESS ITEM_TITLE 18 Name 1013 ACCESS BUTTON_TEXT 12 LOG ON 1014 ACCESS ITEM_TITLE 18 Access 1015 ACCESS PAGE_TITLE 20 User Password 1016 ACCESS INTRO 64 please re enter User password 1017 ACCESS BUTTON_TEXT 12 PASSWD 1018 ACCESS BUTTON_TEXT 12 USERS 1020 ACCESS BUTTON_TEXT 12 LOG OFF 1021 ACCESS INTRO 64 To change to Multi User mode select OK
56. The Properties window reappears with the Rate Units field showing Name Spl Rate Units 580048 Seconds At End Bndefinite Dwell Press DONE The Program Editor page reappears rate units are not shown 4 1 7 3 CHOOSING END OF RUN ACTION In the Properties window press the yellowed At End field A pick list appears containing Indefinite Dwell and Starting Values Indefinite dwell This leaves all values as they are at the end of the program until new ac ple tion is taken to change them A program with an end condition of Indefi 00 35 00 nite Dwell does not terminate but adopts the COMPLETE state until ABORTED Starting Values Ending on an indefinite dwell is the only circumstance that puts a program into the Complete state and the status panel will show COMPLETE X T ui Starting values This ends the program by restoring its starting values In this case the program adopts the Idle state upon finishing simple Starting Values Select the required action and press the Return key The Properties window reappears showing the selected action and below that the message DONE Press DONE The Program Editor page re appears Chapter 4 HA261376 Page 4 12 Issue 8 Jly 04 VISUAL SUPERVISOR HAN DBO 4 1 7 4 CHANGING DEFAULT ITERATIONS SAMPLE
57. UNLOAD SAVE SAVE AS START Appl n Manager 3 File RISE State RUNNING STOP No application loaded File RISEN LOAD LD RUN DELETE No application loaded Appl n Manager File RISEN Confirm Delete File RISE LOAD LD RUN DELETE Chapter 4 HA261376 Page 4 22 Issue 8 Jly 04 VISUAL SUPERVISOR HAN DBO OK 4 3 8 Displaying application diagnostics Application APP SUM APP MGR From the application menu press DIAGS The Diagnostic menu appears Select Modbus or Profibus as required Diagnostics MODBUS M PROF IBUS M The Master Comms Diagnostics page appears Master Comms Diags This presents a list of diagnostic counters For details of the diagnostics see Node Number lt ALL gt Line Fault NO The LIN Blocks Reference Manual part HA0823754003 the n NO x equests ost ALH DIAG block Requests Aborted 0 Requests Total 495 Replies Good 416 Replies Rejection 0 To show diagnostics for a particular Modbus node change the Node 12 eplies Link Error 0 n Total Cyclic Updates 64 Number from lt ALL gt to the number of the desired node 11 2 To collect statistics from a point in time p
58. are APPLN Press APPLN t menu key Application APP SUM APP MGR 4 DIAGS FBMGR Press APP MGR File RISE State RUNNING STOP HA261376 Chapter 4 Issue 8 Jly 04 Page 4 19 VISUAL SUPERVISOR HAN DBO 4 3 3 Stopping an application With an application running the Appl n Manager page should look like this except for the actual file name File RISE State RUNNING STOP To stop the application press STOP File RISE The display confirms that the application has STOPPED State STOPPED Note While an application is STOPPED the Logging and Programmer facilities will be suspended The duration of the current segment will be extended by the length of time the application stays STOPPED Stopping an application during a critical operation is not recommended UNLOAD SAVE SAVE AS START The keys at the bottom of the display offer four options UNLOAD the application without first saving the application data typically prior to selecting a new application or cloning a new one SAVE the application data typically because the Cold Start values have changed usually from the Terminal Configurator SAVE the data as a different file SAVE AS START the application again SAVE SAVE AS and START are covered in the next
59. automatically appended by the instrument as a six digit number starting at 000001 This number is incremented each time a new file of this form is created HA261376 Chapter 3 Issue 8 Jul 04 Page3 11 VISUAL SUPERVISOR HAN DBO OK 3 4 3 Floppy disk Before logging starts a floppy disk must be inserted The floppy disk runs in the drive behind the flap on the front panel To insert a disk the bottom of the tab in the centre of the flap is pulled outwards When it clicks open the flap can be rotated downward from the top Insert the disk close the flap secure it by hooking the top of the tab under the lip of the casing and press the bottom of the tab shut To ensure maximum integrity of data the following rules regarding the use of floppy disks for logging data should be observed Only new formatted floppy disks may be used for logging Disks used for logging should not be used for recording other types of data Replace floppy disks after one month Floppy disks must never be ejected whilst logging is in progress Always terminate logging by using the OFF LINE facility see MONITOR below Folders directories must never be placed on disks QV Ghi pecu 3 4 4 Training sequence This section describes how to start recording view the contents of the disk stop recording change the disk and start recording again 1 Press the Menu key below the screen The Pop up menu appears 2 Press LOGGING The inst
60. block type and block name have been entered operation of the OK key causes the new block to be created Category and Type are selected from pop up pick lists The block name must typed in SAVE Operating this key saves the database in the same way as the SAVE key in the Application Manager section 4 3 4 NETWORK Operation of this key displays a list of all the external databases defined within the application HA261376 Chapter 4 Issue 8 Jly 04 Page 4 25 VISUAL SUPERVISOR HAN DBO 4 3 9 1 ALPHA NUMERIC BLOCK DISPLAY Note This functionality applies only to instruments fitted with software versions 2 7 onwards Initially the FB Manager page lists the blocks in database order Touching the down arrow key or cycle screens key if fitted re orders the list in alpha numeric order with numeric entries first figure 4 3 9 1 Further operations of the key toggle between the two display orders Use either key re order display T800 lin dext 2500 5 mod5 01 ise diag edb diag ramp5 1 mod5 02 ddr diag edbtable ramp5 2 mod5 03 pnl diag alindiag loop5 1 mod5 04 alh diag SppCtrl loop5 2 mod5 05 amc diag SppDig areal mod5 06 db diag 2404 4 moduls 5 2500 6 Figure 4 3 9 1 Alpha numeric Function bl
61. hex OD T Horizontal tab hex 09 Dollar character hex 24 or Double quotes character hex 22 nn Arbitrary ASCII character in hex e g 7F is DEL If any other character follows then the is ignored Example Cost 5 would match Cost 5 EMPTY STRINGS The empty literal string trailing characters 6699 This matches the end of the input and therefore may be used to reject input that includes Note Any suffix terminating characters specified in the READER block do not count as part of the input for these purposes Example Gr temp PID1 SL 4W2 deg will not allow trailing temperature characters HA261376 Chapter 5 Issue 8 Jly 04 5 65 VISUAL SUPERVISOR HAN DBO OK 5 15 3 Dictionary text References to text in dictionaries are made using the format lt dictionary type id gt lt entry number gt For example U12 will match item 12 in the user dictionary Note The W dictionary is writeable and may be written in a similar manner to LIN database variable E G W 10 8 will write 8 characters into the dictionary entry 10 Each dictionary also has the special entry number which is the current indexed value This is used in conjunc tion with the user actions to modify the entry number written to 5 15 4 LIN database variables Variables may be used in three different ways 1 A variable not specified to b
62. if option fitted The full name of the protocol is Serial Lin It is used for connecing with a PC in SLIN CFG order to transfer files during comissioning and during operation Printer Table 4 5 1 3 Available protocols Changes to Protocol selection become effective at different times as follows CFG ELIN1 2 3 MST SLV On power up for SLIN On application start for Modbus S On power up On application start SLIN ALIN Keypad On power up 4 5 1 4 TALK THRU Talk Thru or tranparent Modbus access is a facility provided to enable use of the Eurotherm iTools package to configure Model 2500 controllers without having to disconnect them from the Visual Supervisor The 2500s are daisy chained from the Instruments s Modbus Master port or the Profibus port on the rear panel via EIA422 link The PC is connected to the CFG port on the front panel via an EIA232 link With the iTools package running on the PC the 2500s can then be configured by talking through the Visual Supervisor Notes 1 In order for TalkThru to work the database must contain Gateway file GWF with the same name as the database file dbf 2 If the Profibus port is used the 2500 unit s must support Profibus DPv1 3 Instead of using PC iTools via an occasional EIA232 link a SCADA facility can be used via a permanent EIA422 link In this case the link must be to the Modbus S port at the back of the
63. 00 03 TREND 10 07 01 11 59 13 Run Prog 10 07 01 11 57 12 PRINTER 10 07 01 11 57 12 Amarillo 10 07 01 11 57 12 Database Started 10 07 01 11 44 52 2500 7 10 07 01 11 44 51 GASCONIC 10 07 01 11 44 50 SEC_CON2 10 07 01 11 44 50 7 10 07 01 11 44 50 7 10 07 01 12 TREND 10 07 01 11 40 02 1800 10 07 01 11 40 02 Database Loaded 10 07 01 11 40 02 Figure 3 5 1b Alarm history display with option bar TWO LINE DISPLAY As described in section 2 6 2 above operating the down arrow key toggles between single line working e g as shown in figure 3 5 1 above and two line working where the second line is used to display the operator ID of the user who was logged on at the time of the alarm See figure 2 6 2c for an example FILTER KEYS ALL Displays all Alarms and Events ALARMS Displays only Alarms EVENTS Displays only Events AREA If an Alarm name is touched highlights yellow then pressing AREA causes only those alarms configured to be in the same Area as the highlighted alarm to be displayed GROUP As for AREA but for Group BLOCK As for AREA but for function block MSGS Displays only messages HA261376 Chapter 3 Issue 8 Jul 04 3 17 VISUAL SUPERVISOR HAN DBO OK 3 5 1 ALARM HISTORY DISPLAY Cont ACK KEY Pressing this key acknowledges after confirmation all current unacknowledged i e flashing alarms Touching an alarm name highlights yellow before pressing ACK causes j
64. 04 3 35 VISUAL SUPERVISOR HAN DBO OK 3 7 2 MONITORING THE RECIPE Cont RECIPE MONITOR PAGE This page is called from the Recipe menu figure 3 7 1b by touching the MONITOR key The monitor page gives recipe values in tabular form as shown below As can be seen the following columns are displayed RCP The recipe variables SP The value held in the recipe file for each variable SP Live The current live database values for each variable Where the SP and SP Live values differ the value is highlighted in red providing a useful diagnostic should a recipe download fail PV Optional values monitored in conjunction with the recipe Might not be present on any recipe file Capture Optional values that would be captured if a recipe CAPTURE is performed Might not be present on any recipe file v Ala SP SP Live PV CAPTURE Methane 90 6724 90 6724 90 6724 90 6724 Nitrogen 3 1284 3 1284 3 1284 3 1284 Carbon Dioxide 0 4676 0 4676 0 4676 0 4676 Ethane 4 5279 4 5279 4 5279 4 5279 Propane 0 828 0 8280 0 8280 0 8280 Water 0 0 0 0000 0 0000 0 0000 HydrogenSulphide 0 0 0 0000 0 0000 0 0000 Hydrogen 0 0 0 0000 0 0000 0 0000 Carbon Monoxide 0 0 0 0000 0 0000 0 0000 Oxygen 0 0 0 0000 0 0000 0 0000 i Butane 0 1037 0 1037 0 1037 0 1037 n Butane 0 1563 0 1563 0 1563 0 1563 i Pentane 0 0321 0
65. 2 Changing the duration of ramp to segments changes the rate of ramp Therefore before making any such change you should consider the possible effect of this upon the operation of the process plant SAMPLE In the dialogue box press the Duration field A numeric keyboard appears with the current duration displayed at the top in hh mm ss format The format can be changed as described in section 4 5 4 Changing the language and date formats Key in the required duration Once the correct duration is keyed in the Return key is used to save it go e ee eee 00 06 00 00 50 00 00 35 00 IR In l to maamo tc moomo to The Program Editor page appears showing the new duration for the seg Ana In 2 msomo to mesmo to ment Ana In 3 f msomo to moomo to Dig in T Dig in 2 Dig in 3 m m 4 1 5 Inserting deleting segments 4 1 5 1 INSERTING A NULL SEGMENT Notes 1 A null segment consists of a dwell of zero duration 2 Inserting or deleting segments can have a knock on effect on subsequent ramp to or ramp at rate segments because the setpoint value at the point when these segments start could change This could affect the duration of ramp at rate segments SAMPLE In the segment preceding the new segment s location press the segment name cell at the top of the column In
66. 2 Select PROGRAMMER from the pop up menu that appears With no program running the Programmer menu which appears has just two options PROGRAMS and SCHEDULE 3 Select SCHEDULE File Name 222209 Start Date 22 92 99 Start Time 22499597 The Schedule Program page appears prompting for information about Iterations the program to be scheduled ACCEPT 4 Press the File Name field The left side of the screen shows a pick list of the programs that the in 22222222 strument holds Schedule Program 5 Select the required program dsample The background of the program name changes to yellow STMAXALL ENMAXSEG Hid ENMAXSP EA 6 Press the Return key the green arrow E PT The pick list disappears and the File Name field shows the name of File Name SAMPIE the selected program Start Date 82022792 Start Time The program is now ready for scheduling Iterations Note If the program is to run immediately after the currently running ACCEPT program ends the Start Date and Start Time can be left undefined as shown here Chapter 3 HA261376 3 4 Issue 8 Jul 04 VISUAL SUPERVISOR HAN DBO OK 3 1 3 SCHEDULING A PROGRAM Cont 3 1 3 1 SPECIFYING THE PROGRAM START DATE 7 Press the Start Date field The left side of the screen shows a numeric keyboard
67. 3506000 i Pentane GasConcl iPentane GasConc2 iPentane 0 032100 0 0473000 0 0509000 Pentane GasConcl nPentane GasConc2 nPentane 0 0443000 0 0324000 0 0480000 GasConcl nHexane GasConc2 nHexane 0 393000 0 0664000 0 0000000 Figure 5 10 2 2 UYR file example with Capture Variables Chapter 5 HA261376 5 58 Issue 8 Jly 04 VISUAL SUPERVISOR HAN DBO 5 10 2 3 FILES WITH OPTIONAL MONITOR VARIABLES To generate a recipe file with monitor points for each recipe line an additional field must be included after each col umn in the title line and for each variable The title line entry should be an item called Monitor The field for the variable is the tag of the field to be monitored Monitor fields must be placed after capture fields if any Figure 5 10 2 3 shows a single line file with monitor and capture points See section 3 7 2 for details of Capture and Monitor UYR 1 9 22 11 00 11 14 02 Richard 30 Setpoint 1 Capture Monitor Amarillo Gulf Coast Ekofisk Methane GasConc Methane GasConc Methane GasConc Methane 90 67241 96 52220 85 90631 Nitrogen CasConc Nitrogen CasConc Nitrogen CasConc Nitrogen 3 128400 0 2595000 1 006800 Carbon dioxide GasConc CrbDiOx GasConc CrbDiOx GasConc CrbDiOx 0 4676001 0 5956001 1 495400 Ethane GasConc Ethane GasConc Ethane GasConc Ethane 4 527901 1 818600 8 491899 Propane GasConc Propane GasConc Propane GasConc Propane 0 8280000 0 4596000 2 301500 Wat
68. 4 34 Issue 8 Jly 04 VISUAL SUPERVISOR HAN DBO 4 5 SETTING UP AND RE SETTING THE INSTRUMENT This section describes the following items Editing Comms parameters Section 4 5 1 Setting the Start up strategy Section 4 5 2 Re setting the clock Section 4 5 3 Changing the language and the data entry formats Section 4 5 4 gt WN Setting up the panel display Section 4 5 5 4 5 1 Editing communications parameters The editing procedure for Communications Parameters consists of displaying the Comms Setup page and setting up or editing the parameters for each port fitted to the unit The SAVE button is used to save the changes or to cancel the changes before saving them the CANCEL button is used Before any saved changes can take effect the application must be stopped and then restarted or the instrument must be powered off and on again Generally parameter changes such as baud rate require only a stop and restart of the application whereas hardware changes such as changing a Modbus master port to a slave port require a power down and up 1 Press the Menu key and select SYSTEM from the Pop up menu Press SYSTEM key ACCESS SYSTEM HOME 2 Press SETUP SUMMARY APPLN 1 wu Press menu key 3 Press COMMS 3 SETUP Press SETUP Press COMMS key STARTUP INTERNAT
69. 5 Page 5 59 VISUAL SUPERVISOR HAN DBO 5 12 THE RECIPE DICTIONARY The recipe dictionary holds text that originates from the recipe files uyr It may not be initialised from a uyl file The text held by this dictionary changes whenever uyr files are loaded or modified from the front panel The dictionary is divided up into sections one for each recipe set each spanning a range of up to 1000 records The sections are allocated as follows 1001 1999 Recipe set number 1 2001 2999 Recipe set number 2 3001 3999 Recipe set number 3 4001 4999 Recipe set number 4 Also the section 1 999 represents the recipe set currently on view and is thus a duplicate of one of the other sections The following table indicates how the records are allocated in each recipe set To get the actual record from recipe set number simply add 1000 n For example to get the record of the user who last edited the recipe 3 uyr file use record number 3014 Record Value 1 File name excluding uyr 11 Revisions number of uyr file 14 Name of user who last edited the uyr file 15 Returns YES if the file has been edited but not saved or NO if not edited 111 Name of line number 1 112 Name of recipe selected on line 1 113 Name of recipe active on line 1 114 State of recipe on line 1 121 to 124 As 111 to 114 but for line 2 131 to 134 As 111 to 114 but for line 3 141 to 144 As 111 to 114 but for line 4 151 to 154 As
70. 6 3 DISPLAY MODES Cont VERTICAL TREND WITH FACEPLATE Cont Review mode It is possible to enter review trace history mode by a Touching the screen in either the Standard or the scroll bar displays described above or the full width display described below Using the slider or push button controls in the scroll bar display c Touching the slide area between the slider and a push button Although data is still read and stored in trace history by the instrument the traces remain static on the screen unless the zoom or pan controls are used The Option Live keys or the Back Live key are used to return to the standard scroll bar display CURSOR On entry to review mode a cursor is located at the top of the screen The cursor is repositioned either by touching it a dragging it to the position required or by touching the screen at the desired point or a combi nation of both The exact temporal position of the cursor is shown at the bottom of the screen and the values shown in the faceplates are those at the cursor time and date ZOOM These controls allow the amount of data displayed on the screen to be varied either continuously using the slider or in steps using the keys The expansion contraction of the trends is centred on the cursor position PAN These controls allow a particular section of the trend history to be selected for display The length of this displayed section is determined by the zoom setting
71. 9 Figure 1 3 1 36 Profibus pinout 9 way D type Note A document Installation Guidelines for Profibus Networks 261788 is available from the Manu facturer to help those using Category 5 cable in a Profibus installation HA261376 Chapter 1 Issue 8 Jul 04 1 11 VISUAL SUPERVISOR HAN DBO 1 3 1 4 BAR CODE READER CREDIT CARD SCANNER These items are connected to the unit using the Keyboard KBD connector at the rear of the unit figure 1 3 1a b above 1 3 1 5 PARALLEL PRINTER PORT A parallel printer port can be provided at the rear panel of the instrument as shown in figure 1 3 1a b above Figure 1 3 1 5 shows the pinout for the mating plug 1 1 0599 a 6 6 6 9 9 99 25 way D type Solder side of plug Strobe Auto Feed DBO Error Fault DB1 Printer initialisation DB2 Select DB3 Ground DB4 Ground DB5 Ground DB6 Ground DB7 Ground Acknowledge Ground Busy Ground Paper end Ground Select OIN Figure 1 3 1 5 Pinoutfor parallel printer port 1 3 1 6 SERIAL PRIN TER PORT A serial printer port can be provided at the rear panel of the instrument as shown in figure 1 3 1a b above Figure 1 3 1 6 shows the pinout for the mating socket 9 way D type solder side of socket Figure 1 3 1 6 Pinoutfor serial printer port Chapter 1 HA261376
72. ACCESS ITEM_TITLE 18 Minutes Left 1400 ADMIN MENU_TITLE 16 Administration 1401 ADMIN LEGEND 11 ADMIN 1410 NET_AUDIT PAGE_TITLE 20 Network Audit Trail 1411 NET_AUDIT LEGEND 11 NET AUDIT 1412 NET_AUDIT PARA 24 Destination node 1413 NET_AUDIT ITEM_TITLE 18 LIN Node 1414 NET_AUDIT ITEM_TITLE 18 LIN Segment 1415 NET_AUDIT NAT_STATE 12 Disabled 1416 NET_AUDIT NAT_STATE 12 UNINIT 1417 NET_AUDIT NAT_STATE 12 INIT 1418 NET_AUDIT NAT_STATE 12 CONNECTED 1419 NET_AUDIT NAT_STATE 12 ACTIVE 1420 NET_AUDIT ITEM_TITLE 18 Alarm active 1421 NET_AUDIT ITEM_TITLE 18 Alarm cleared 1422 NET_AUDIT ITEM_TITLE 18 Alarm ack ed 1423 NET_AUDIT ITEM_TITLE 18 Cached alarms 1424 NET_AUDIT ITEM_TITLE 18 System event 1425 NET_AUDIT ITEM_TITLE 18 Block event 1426 NET_AUDIT ITEM_TITLE 18 Operator note 1427 NET_AUDIT ITEM_TITLE 18 Block value change 1428 NET_AUDIT ITEM_TITLE 18 Message active 1429 NET_AUDIT ITEM_TITLE 18 Message cleared 1430 NET_AUDIT ITEM_TITLE 18 Message ack ed 1436 NET_AUDIT ITEM_TITLE 18 Min alarm priority 1437 NET_AUDIT ITEM_TITLE 18 Min event priority 1450 NET_AUDIT ITEM_TITLE 18 Mode 1451 NET_AUDIT NAT_STATE 12 ISOLATED 1452 NET_AUDIT NAT_STATE 12 PROVIDER 1453 NET_AUDIT NAT_STATE 12 CONSUMER 1459 NET_AUDIT ITEM_TITLE 18 Revision 1460 ACCESS BUTTON_TEXT 12 DEPLOY 1461 ACCESS PAGE_TITLE 20 Deploy Access 1462 ACCESS ITEM_TITLE 18 Number of Slave Nodes 1463 ACCESS ITEM_TITLE 18 Slave Nodes 146
73. Amarillo 08 EkoFisk A Methane 90 6724 Nitrogen Properties 3 1284 Variable Name Carbon Dioxide 0 4676 Ethane Verify YES 4 5279 Propane 0 8280 Water 0 0000 Tag references HydrogenSulphide Line 0 0000 SUE ss 0 0000 Carbon Monoxide i 0 0000 Oxygen 0 0000 i Butane OK DELETE INSERT 0 1037 n Butane 0 1563 i Pentane 0 0321 0 0321 0 0321 n Pentane 0 0443 0 0443 0 0443 n Hexane 0 0393 0 0393 0 0393 n Heptane 0 0 0 0000 0 0000 n Octane 0 0 0 0000 0 0000 n Nonane 0 0 0 0000 0 0000 n Decane 0 0 0 0000 0 0000 Helium 0 0 0 0000 0 0000 SAVE CAPTURE CAPTUREAS DOWNLOAD Al 1 lt gt Figure 4 8 2 2 Properties dialogue box 4 8 2 3 TAG REFERENCES Touching a variable in the RCP column calls the Properties menu This menu allows the variable name tag refer ences and verification setting to be edited 4 8 2 4 RECIPE VALUE Touching a value in a recipe column allows a new value to be entered 4 8 2 5 ADDING A RECIPE To add a new recipe select an existing recipe to act as a model and touch that recipe s name Select NEW from the dialogue box which appears The new recipe takes the values of the model and can be edited as required 4 8 2 6 DELETING RECIPES Touch the recipe name at the top of the column then select DELETE from the pop up dialogue box 4 8 2 7 SAVING RECIPES To save changes to the current file name operate the SAVE
74. E eren rere 3 35 SELECTING tc mer eme rte Pere rr e oy 3 35 3 72 Monitoring the cse rece 3 35 REGIPE STATUS eos teste rer pera Fr E ebat 3 35 RECIPE MONITOR Eisen tto t been rr eee pce 3 36 3 8 qe 3 37 3 81 loading m eb bt b cp s 3 37 3 8 2 Recipe selectiom oer b 3 37 31823 Batch Customising i oec 3 37 3 804 Batchiinitiationi i ht c e E PE A gs 3 38 3 845 Batchimonito ring Pe D OL mae De e Peer E aera 3 38 3 80 67 Batch Hold ram rette cogor 3 38 3 8 Bat desee rein nea leve erdt t 3 38 3 8 8 tte ero 3 39 Chapter 4 4 1 4 1 EDITIN G A PRO GRAM 4 1 4 1 1 IN TRO DUCTION iier eren eR nne rei rr eene 4 1 4 1 1 1 CREATING A PROGRAM Hmm 4 1 4 1 1 2 EDITING A PRO GRAM 1 4 1 4 1 2 Program Editor Page lt memes 4 3 4 1 3 Changing a secte ce cmt Det boner a 4 4 4 1 3 1 CHANGING RAMP TYPE 4 4 TERM G Y 4 4 TO CHANGE THE TYPE OF BAM P
75. From the Clock Setup page press the time field A keyboard is displayed with the current time displayed in green at the top with a cursor flashing under the first hours digit Type in the required time the cursor moves to the next character after each number is keyed in To cancel all the digits the ones at the top of the keyboard display but not the ones in the Clock Setup page in the background or in memory press the C key the digits change to question marks To cancel the whole time change operation and return to the Clock Setup page press the red cross key When new time has been entered press the green Return key When the actual time is the same as the time just entered press the SET key to re start the clock 4 5 4 Changing language and date time formats A different language can be selected only if the instrument holds the appropriate language dictionary file See section 5 2 The System text dictionary Press SYSTEM key 1 Press the menu key ACCESS SYSTEM ALARMS The Pop up menu appears PROGRAMMER LOGGING 2 Select SYSTEM The System Pages window appears y 5 i SUMMARY APPLN LH Press menu key a gt SETUP 3 Select SETUP Press SETUP The Setup window appears etup STARTUP COMMS CLOCK mp INTERNAT PANEL Press INTERNAT
76. Issue 8 Jul 04 VISUAL SUPERVISOR HAN DBO OK 1 2 MECHANICAL INSTALLATION Cont both 1 0 Panel cutout 5 44in x 5 44in both 0 05 0 138mm x 138mm i Top view T Earth Stud porze Use top and bottom OR left and right clamp positions OR for seismic version all four 25 143 mm mm 211 mm see note below 18 mm 1 1 e M e 37 z bois Front view 144 View on right hand 137 mm ide mm SI E Maximum panel thickness 25 Lift bottom of tab to release door Disk drive and config port behind Vertical Maximum installed angles Constraint applies to hard disc options only Case clamping Minimum recommended inter unit spacing Clamp position Top and bottom 7 5 mm 14 mm Figure 1 2a Smallframe unit mechanical installation Left and right Note 211mm dimension was 187mm for units with status levels prior to Q36 HA261376 Issue 8 Jul 04 Chapter 1 Page 1 5 VISUAL SUPERVISOR HAN DBO OK 1 2 MECHANICAL INSTALLATION Cont 288 0mm 23 10mm 11 34 1 91 in i 11 34 in Si 0 91 in gt lt 258 mm 10 16 in max gt
77. Log The event log page is accessed either a by operating the Log key in the alarm menu or b by operating the EVT LOG key in the root menu only with no application loaded The page displays the alarms and events that have been output to trend displays printers or log files This data is lost on power cycling ACK ACKALL HISTORY SUMMARY LOG NOTE ARCHIVE MESSAGES 4 Event Log ACTIVE Shift TREND TREND TREND TREND TREND TREND TREND TREND TREND TREND 3 3 3 E 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 gt HHHHHHHHHBH AAAAAAAAARO OP PRPRPEPREPENWO oO FP NADICOO Figure 3 5 6 Event log display single line display mode TWO LINE DISPLAY The down arrow key can be used to toggle between single line and two line display The two line display adds a sec ond line to each event used to display text that would not fit onto the single line display Chapter 3 HA261376 Page 3 20 Issue 8 Jul 04 VISUAL SUPERVISOR HAN DBO 3 6 AREA AND GROUP DISPLAYS 3 6 1 Overview As a part of configuration Lintools an area page can be defined which can contain up to sixteen groups Each group can contain up to 16 points where each point represents a function block The area page contains group faceplates which when any one is touched displays that group s first six point faceplates For the 1 4 VGA unit if there are more
78. N A 16 characters Note 1 V7 Timeout 8 characters 16 characters V8 Retired User N A 16 characters Note 1 V9 Disqualified 8 characters 16 characters 10 Access change 16 characters 16 characters Log on 8 characters 16 characters V12 Log off 8 characters 16 characters V13 Log fail 8 characters 16 characters V14 Password change 8 characters 16 characters V15 Expired user 8 characters 16 characters V16 Disable user 8 characters 16 characters V17 Enabled user 8 characters 16 characters V18 Deleted user 8 characters 16 characters Note 2 V19 Created user 8 characters 16 characters V20 Purged user N A 16 characters Note 1 V21 AMC mem full 16 characters 16 characters V22 Wr Fail 16 characters 16 characters V30 Profile 8 characters 16 characters V31 ITD mem full 16 characters 16 characters V33 Database Running N A 16 characters V34 Deleted file 8 characters 16 characters V35 Imported file 8 characters 16 characters V36 Deleted Database 8 characters 16 characters V37 Created Database 8 characters 16 characters V38 Renamed Block 8 characters 16 characters Note 2 V39 Created Block 8 characters 16 characters Note 2 VAO Deleted Block 8 characters 16 characters Note 2 V41 Database Loaded 16 characters 16 characters V42 Database Started 16 characters 16 characters V44 Database Resumed 16 characters 16 characters V45 Database Restart 16 characters 16 characters V46 Database Stopped 16 characters 16 characters V47 Database Saved 16 characters 16 characters
79. Navigation 5 36 THE VERSIONS rtt rt rr Er e 5 36 5 7 12 Auditor 5 40 5 7 2 Editing the defaultpnl ener 5 43 Dad Dp eS 5 44 5 7 3 1 PANELAGENT 5 44 5 7 3 2 PAN EL DRIVER 5 45 5 7 3 3 44 5 46 5 7 3 4 ROOT PAGE DECLARATION 5 46 5 7 3 5 INITIALPAGE DECLARATION 5 46 54754 AGENCY PES aa A bed dnt e e PR 5 47 5 8 DATABASE nis n etr x hne e n er ene rer o Eee ates 5 49 55821 Function block names Lene eren 5 49 b 8 2 Alarmihames es cete o d eere EE RUE 5 49 538 3 En merations AS eee 5 50 EE 5 50 261376 Contents Issue 8 Jly 04 Page 7 VISUAL SUPERVISOR HAN DBO LIST OF CONTENTS Cont Section Page 5 9 FORM PILES 5 51 5 9 1 Report RO 5 51 559122 FILE ENTRIES S 5 52 5 92 lt Alarm forms ciet 5 55 5 982 1 EXAMPLE ro e ero
80. OK 3 6 3 DISPLAY MODES Cont HRIZONTAL TREND WITH FACEPLATE Cont Review mode The section describing Vertical trend with faceplate above gives full details of review mode The Cursor appears at the right hand edge of the screen for horizontal traces Moving this zoom slider down up increases decreases the amount of time base displayed Buttons have similar effect but provide step changes Zoom factor is shown below the display Cursor initially at right edge of screen Use this pan slider or the arrow keys to select that part of the time base to be viewed Left moves back in time 17 02 02 Cursor date Cursor time x2 Zoom factor Back Live key Figure 3 6 3k Trend review controls HORIZONTAL TREND FULL WIDTH Figure 3 6 3m Horizontal full width Faceplate values are those at the cursor time and date Chapter 3 Page 3 32 HA261376 Issue 8 Jul 04 VISUAL SUPERVISOR HAN DBO 3 7 DOWNLOADING RECIPES A recipe set consists of sets of instructions recipes for controlling between one and eight identical production facili ties The examples below use paint mixers as an illustration of the four types of recipe available 1 simple recipe This file contains references to a single set of equipment and a single set of values to be ap pli
81. TEXT 12 CREATE 1072 FB_MGR BUTTON_TEXT 12 DELETE 1073 FB_MGR BUTTON TEXT 12 SAVE 1080 FB_MGR DIALOGUE TITLE 28 Block Create 1081 FB_MGR ITEM_TITLE 16 Category 1082 FB_MGR ITEM_TITLE 16 Block Type 1083 FB_MGR DIALOG_TITLE 28 Confirm Block Delete 1084 FB_MGR BUTTON_TEXT 12 NETWORK 1085 FB_MGR PAGE_TITLE 20 Network Set Up 1090 MSG PAGE_TITLE 20 Messages 1091 MSG LEGEND 11 MSG LIST 1092 ALMMENU LEGEND 11 MESSAGES 1093 MSG MESSAGE 16 lt None gt 1100 RECIPE LEGEND 11 RECIPE 1101 RECIPE MENU TITLE 16 Recipe 1102 RECIPE BUTTON_TEXT 12 DOWNLOAD 1103 RECIPE BUTTON_TEXT 12 ABORT 1104 RECIPE BUTTON_TEXT 12 LOAD 1105 RECIPE BUTTON_TEXT 12 SAVE 1106 RECIPE BUTTON_TEXT 12 SAVE AS 1107 RECIPE BUTTON_TEXT 12 CAPTURE 1108 RECIPE BUTTON_TEXT 12 CAPTURE AS 1109 RECIPE BUTTON_TEXT 12 NEW 1110 RECIPE BUTTON_TEXT 12 DELETE 1111 RECIPE BUTTON_TEXT 12 ADD LINE 1112 RECIPE BUTTON_TEXT 12 DELETE 1113 RECIPE BUTTON_TEXT 12 INSERT 1114 RECIPE BUTTON_TEXT 12 CREATE 1115 RECIPE BUTTON_TEXT 12 LINES 1120 RECIPE LEGEND 11 RECIPES 1121 RECIPE PAGE_TITLE 20 Load Save Recipe 1122 RECIPE LEGEND 11 STATUS 1123 RECIPE PAGE_TITLE 20 Recipe Status 1124 RECIPE ITEM_TITLE 16 Downloaded at 1125 RECIPE ITEM_TITLE 16 Version 1126 RECIPE ITEM_TITLE 16 Edited by 1127 RECIPE ITEM_TITLE 16 At 1128 RECIPE ITEM_TITLE 16 Timeout 1130 RECIPE ITEM_TITLE 16 Status 1131 RECIPE ITEM 12 RESET 1132 RECIPE ITEM 12 DOWNLOADING 1133 RECIPE ITEM 12 COMPL
82. TMAXALL 4 Press the name of the program to be edited ENMAXSEG ENMAXSP 5 Press the green Return key AMPTE DELETE The Load Save program page displays the name of the selected pro X gram 6 Press LOAD File Name SAMPLE If the program has components parameters which are not in the LIN database then an error message will appear and the program will not LOAD SAVE DELETE 1 After a successful load the Programmer menu reappears 7 Press EDIT Programmer MONITOR PROGRAMS SCHEDULE The 2 Editor page appears showing the values of the setpoints PREVIEW PRE PLOT 1n tabular form Lod HOLD E Each row represents one setpoint along a horizontal timebase marked RUN FROM SKIP B in segments Some of the rows are for analog setpoints and some are i for digital ones Each column represents a segment and each segment is identified by a name or number shown at the top of the column Under the seg ment identifier is the time duration of the segment the yellowed fields yield further information when pressed HA261376 Issue 8 Jly 04 Chapter 4 Page 4 3 VISUAL SUPERVISOR HAN DBO 4 1 3 Changing a setpoint 4 1 3 1 CHANGING RAMP TYPE Generally there are up to six ways in which you can program the Visual Supervisor to control the value of a setpoint some may not be available on your instrument These methods are call
83. The information in this document is given in good faith but is intended for guidance only Eurotherm Limited will accept no responsibility for any losses arising from errors in this document VISUAL SUPERVISOR HAN DBO OK VISUAL SUPERVISOR HANDBOOK LIST OF CHAPTERS Section Page Ds SINESSTA N oz t ro E din ka ees Eo be 1 1 2 GETTING STARTED et cere er E wate e Ver rara 2 1 Os PERATIOINe 4 e E e AE I ams aab dao tetto Lt 3 1 4 ciere eit Crete ET Een E ve e e 4 1 5 4CUSTO M ISIN G eie ette ea eres 5 1 6 MODBUS COMMUNICATIONS esee 6 1 7 PROFIBUS COMMUNICATIONS 10 5 7 1 8 ADMIN ISTATIVE 5 02 8 1 ESS t EY T 9 1 10 PREVENTIVE 10 1 A gt SRECIFIG ATION m Ex a Ea ooa ener D A bra at ats 1 B ORDERING IN FO RM ATIO N H B 1 ex vetet rh bee POM uo e D RE ROS PUR C 1 EFFECTIVITY This manual refers to instruments fitted with software version number V5 RELATED MANUALS The Setpoint Program Editor Handbook
84. User ID and password then LOG ON Access Identity Password Figure 2 8 1 2 Security access page SVGA The user identity and password can now be entered by touching each yellow area in turn and using the resulting key board to enter the relevant character strings Once this has been completed the LOG ON key is operated If the instrument fails to respond with the relevant access level either the Identity or the Password has been incor rectly entered Note The character strings are case sensitive e g Identity Fred is different from identity FRED THE FLOPPY DISK A floppy disk MS DOS formatted 1 44MB runs in the drive behind the flap on the front panel It can be used for loading and saving programs for logging recording data or for updating the application database with new user screens for example or foreign language files To access the disk drive lift the bottom of the central tab upwards and outwards This centre tab can now be used to pull the flap downward from the top Insert the disk close the flap and secure it by hooking the top of the central tab under the lip of the casing and pressing the bottom of the tab shut Notes 1 Always use newly formatted disk Disks that have previously been used for other purposes should not be used Disks used for logging should be replaced after one month s use Floppy disks should not be removed during data transf
85. V48 Database Unload 16 characters 16 characters V49 Database Stop 16 characters 16 characters Notes 1 Applies only to units fitted with the Auditor Option 2 Not applicable to units fitted with the Auditor Option Chapter 5 HA261376 Page 5 30 Issue 8 Jly 04 VISUAL SUPERVISOR HAN DBO OK 5 4 THE EVENT TEXT DICTIONARY Cont No EVENT NAME MAX LENGTH MAX LENGTH 1 4 VGA SVGA V50 Late 8 characters 16 characters 51 Loaded 8 characters 16 characters V52 No File 8 characters 16 characters V53 Too big 8 characters 16 characters 54 Bad refs 8 characters 16 characters V55 Sch load 8 characters 16 characters V56 Run 8 characters 16 characters V57 Held 8 characters 16 characters V58 Resume 8 characters 16 characters V59 Abort 8 characters 16 characters 60 Finish 8 characters 16 characters V62 Heldback 8 characters 16 characters V63 Restart 8 characters 16 characters 64 Overnest 8 characters 16 characters V65 Bad Prog 8 characters 16 characters V66 Sch Abrt 8 characters 16 characters V67 OverLims 8 characters 16 characters V68 Early 8 characters 16 characters V69 Ramp Dis 8 characters 16 characters V70 DBN Mem Full 16 characters 16 characters V71 Bad _SYSTEM RES 16 characters 16 characters V72 Bad _SYSTEM OPT 16 characters 16 characters V74 Comms Changed 16 characters 16 characters V75 Startup Changed 16 characters 16 characters V76 Instrument Reset 16 characters 16 characters V77 Health Relay 16 characters 16
86. Visual Supervisor 4 PC iTools can also be connected to the Modbus S port but needs an EIA422 485 convertor For an occasional link it is more convenient to use the CFG port on the front panel as described above 5 For more information refer to the iTools User Manual part no HA026179 6 The PC may be connected across ethernet using Modbus TCP instead of one of EIA232 422 485 HA261376 Chapter 4 Issue 8 Jly 04 Page 4 37 VISUAL SUPERVISOR HAN DBO OK 4 5 1 5 ETHERNET The following applies only if the Ethernet option is fitted Notes 1 Before operating the ETHERNET button operate the SAVE button or all changes made so far will be lost 2 Before operating the COMMS button to return to the Comms setup page operate the SAVE button or all changes made in the Ethernet setup page will be lost 3 On the small frame 1 4 VGA version of the instrument the three buttons SAVE CANCEL and ETHERNET are hidden by a scroll bar The Option key is used to toggle between the scroll bar and these buttons 4 The user must have suitable access permission in order to edit the Ethernet setup Ethernet setup is accessed by operating the Ethernet key at the bottom of the comms set up page Figure 4 5 1 5 show the relevant fields To return to Comms setup operate the Comms button Protocol name All Subnet enable MAC ADDRESS Address Assignment IP Address Subnet Mask Default Gateway Number
87. a bar at the bottom of the screen 4 1 3 2 CHANGING SETPOINT VALUE In the Program Editor page select the analogue cell holding the value to be changed Type Step A dialogue box appears showing Dig i thesegment name or number Setpoint Ana In 1 2 the setpoint name for that row 3 the setpoint type 4 the current target value for the setpoint in that cell To change the target value touch the value and enter the new value using the keyboard display which appears Press the Return key The dialogue box reappears this time showing the new value Press DONE The Program Editor page returns with the new value shown in the selected cell To save the setting press the Option key at the bottom of the screen sec ond key from the right and then the SAVE button Chapter 4 HA261376 Page4 6 Issue 8 Jly 04 VISUAL SUPERVISOR HAN DBO OK 4 1 4 Changing a segment In the Program Editor page press the identifier at the top of the column of the segment to be modified For example segment 1 Ana 1 Duration 1 Dig j INS SEG __ f DONE A dialogue box appears with two fields Segment and Duration and three buttons INS SEG DEL SEG and DONE Sections 4 1 4 1 and 4 1 4 2 below show how to change a segment s iden tifier and duration respectively Inserting and deleting segments is de
88. a spare line is available a new line can be added by pressing the ADD LINE button The Option key may need pressing one or more times in order to display this key Once added the RCP Recipe cell at the top left of the dis play can be pressed to change the name of the selected line Chapter 4 HA261376 Page 4 52 Issue 8 Jly 04 VISUAL SUPERVISOR HAN DBO OK 4 8 2 2 ADD A VARIABLE A new variable can be added by touching that cell in the left most RCP column which is immediately above the cell where the new variable is to appear A Properties Menu appears which allows the variable name and tag references to be entered Note variables are executed in top down order so the order in which variables appear can be important To add the first variable press the RCP cell then the INSERT key on the pop up menu The name and tag references of the variable can now be entered If applicable Capture and Monitor values can also be edited The verify field allows the user to define Verify as Yes or No If set to No the variable is not checked during download to ensure that the value is correctly written is used for example where a variable may reset itself or change Figure 4 8 2 2 shows a typical properties dialogue box Fred RCP
89. actual PVs SPs and digital outputs are to the left of the cursor and the target SPs are to the right With the same program loaded but not running Idle the display shown opposite appears showing the profiles programmed for the four vari ables Figure 3 3 2b Preplot display program idle REVIEW MODE Operation of the option key calls the Option bar which contains two keys VIEW and LIVE Operation of the VIEW key causes the page to re draw with zoom and pan controls as shown in figure 3 3 2c below This screen contains only the program traces not the target profile To enter Review Mode allowing the history of the program to be traced the pan zoom controls are adjusted or the trace is touched Once in Review Mode the traces on the screen are no longer updated This is purely a display function the program continues to run as normal To leave review mode and return to the live zoom pan display the LIVE key beneath the zoom slider or the LIVE key in the option bar should be operated To return to the normal pre plot display the option bar VIEW key should be operated Moving this zoom slider down up increases decreases the amount of time base displayed Buttons have similar effect but provide step changes Zoom factor is shown below the display Cursor initially at right edge of screen Faceplate values are
90. address Table 6 1 6 1 summarises this Data type Modbus function codes PLC address Protocol address Read Write Output bits 01 05 15 00001 X x Input bits 02 10001 X X Output registers 03 06 16 40001 X Input registers 04 30001 X Table 6 1 6 1 PLC address offsets for different data types It is the Modbus function code that determines the value of the offset required and therefore whether a given Modbus protocol address is directed at an input or output in a bit or register table HA261376 Chapter 6 Issue 8 Jly 04 Page 6 9 VISUAL SUPERVISOR HAN DBO 6 1 6 2 JBUS In the JBUS implementation there is a direct correspondence between a register or bit address and the Modbus proto col address and no distinction is made between input and output or indeed internal PLC registers Thus Modbus function codes 01 and 02 are treated identically as are codes 03 and 04 All PLC data thus conforms to a single ad dress range 6 1 6 3 OTHER PRODUCTS Other manufacturers gateway implementations conform to the MODICON principle of separate tables for different types of data exchange but the correspondence between PLC base address and Modbus protocol address is user configurable 6 1 7 MODBUS BUS Interface performance figures 6 1 7 1 UPDATE PERIOD In general the update period between the database in a master device and the database in a slave device for continu ously polled values is
91. analogue input module 25 AI3 Access three channel analogue input module D25 AO2 Access two channel analogue output module D25 4 Access four channel analogue output module D25 Access four channel digital input module D25_DI8 Access eight channel digital input module D25 DO4 Access four channel digital output module HA261376 Chapter 6 Issue 8 Jly 04 Page 6 11 VISUAL SUPERVISOR HAN DBO 6 2 2 DCMs AVAILABLE Cont 6 2 2 4 I O CHANNEL BLOCKS D25 AI D25_AICH D25_AO D25_AOCH D25_DI D25_DICH D25_DO D25_DOCH Access single analogue input channel Access single analogue input channel Access single analogue output channel Access single analogue output channel Access single digital input channel Access single digital input channel Access single digital output channel Access single digital output channel 6 2 2 5 USER WIRING BLOCKS D25_R_CV D25_B_CV D25_R_UV Access up to 8 user wiring calculated values real in the I O unit Access up to 8 user wiring calculated values boolean in the I O unit Access the 8 user values real in the I O unit 6 2 2 6 USER ALARM BLOCKS D25_UALM Access the alarms in the I O unit 6 2 2 7 PARAMETER BLOCKS DCM_I8 DCM_UI8 DCM_R8 DCM_W8 DCM_B8 DCM_D8 DCM_S8 DCM_T8 DCM_US8 DCM_Y8 Access up to 8 signed integer 16 bit parameters in the I O unit Access up to 8 unsigned integer 16 bit parameters in the I O unit Access up to 8 signed real number 32 bit param
92. be in capi COMMISSION tals followed by Return then ENGINEER b touching the Password field and entering ADMIN must be in capi tals followed by Return then c pressing LOG ON OK CANCEL USERS The change has been made to a user ID system of access It is now neces sary to create IDs and passwords for other users and assign access levels to them as described in section 4 4 3 2 below Security access Acess ADMIN Name ADMIN Notes Identity 1 For security reasons it is recommended that new ADMIN Id and password are entered before any other actions 2 When logging on it is recommended that the Identity field be ee eost Ws cleared completely of any characters before entry of the new Identity This is be done by positioning the cursor under the first character and operating the key Chapter 4 HA261376 Page 4 30 Issue 8 04 VISUAL SUPERVISOR HAN DBO OK 4 4 3 2 USER ID MANAGEMENT Operation of the USERS key calls up a page which allows user identities passwords and access levels to be assigned The USERS key appears only for users logged in at ADMIN level Figure 4 4 3 2a below depicts the page Hidden columns are accessed by a scroll bar which hides the SAVE CAN CEL NEW etc keys When required these keys are called to the display by operating the Option key one or more times 3
93. bits onto the Modbus address space Booleans are mapped onto a single bit in the Modbus address space Alarms are mapped onto a single bit in the Modbus address space A value of 1 for this bit corresponds to the In alarm status Data conversion of registers All data types can be mapped onto single registers in the Modbus address space However special care should be taken when mapping database values that require more than 16 bits in particular 32 bit integers and floating point numbers Values requiring up to 16 bits of storage Database values that require up to 16 bits of storage one or two bytes are mapped directly onto a single register This includes 8 and 16 bit integers booleans alarms and bitfields 1 a Long signed 32 bit integers When these values are transferred from the database to a Modbus register they are truncated and only the low order 16 bits are written When the register is being transferred from the Modbus to the database the value is sign extended into the high order 16 bits Long unsigned 32 bit integers When these values are transferred from the database to a single Modbus register they are truncated and only the low order 16 bits are written When the register is being transferred from the Modbus to the database the high order 16 bits are assumed to be zero Floating point numbers When these values are transferred from the database to a Modbus register they are scaled according
94. button To make a copy of the file press SAVE AS HA261376 Chapter 4 Issue 8 Jly 04 Page 4 53 VISUAL SUPERVISOR HAN DBO 4 8 2 8 RECIPE FILE PROPERTIES Touching the RCP cell calls the Recipe File properties dialogue box to the display This gives the name of the recipe file and the line currently selected as well as details of the previous file edit The version field is incremented each time the file is saved Further to this there is an editable timeout field allowing a value to be entered to timeout a successful download of a recipe SET1 File Name GASCONIC Line Ds Version 5 Edited by Fred At 11 50 57 23 11 00 Timeout 30 seconds OK INSERT Figure 4 8 2 8 Recipe File properties box 4 8 3 Capturing a Recipe With a recipe file loaded and a recipe selected it is possible to capture live values from the running application for display in the Recipe Monitor page either in the Capture column if available or in the SP Live column if not Operation of the CAPTURE button in the monitor page overwrites the existing values in the selected recipe CAP TURE AS creates a new recipe with the captured values Once values have been captured they can be modified as required in the Recipe edit page Chapter 4 HA261376 Page 4 54 Issue 8 Jly 04 VISUAL SUPERVISOR HAN DBO OK 4 9 OEM FEATURES 4 9 1 Intellectual Property Right Protection IPRP Th
95. characters See Note 1 V78 Run Relay 16 characters 16 characters See Note 1 V80 No GWF Found 16 characters 16 characters V82 Created GWF 16 characters 16 characters V83 Extra Modbus S 16 characters 16 characters V85 Language 16 characters 16 characters See Note 2 V86 Date Format 16 characters 16 characters See Note 2 V87 Time Format 16 characters 16 characters See Note 2 V88 Duration Format 16 characters 16 characters See Note 2 V89 Program Edit 16 characters 16 characters See Note 2 V94 Save 8 characters 16 characters V95 Deleted program 8 characters 16 characters V96 Run From 8 characters 16 characters V97 Skip Request N A 16 characters See Note 1 V98 Segment Edit 16 characters 16 characters See Note 2 V99 Segment Edit 16 characters 16 characters See Note 2 V103 Deleted Log File 8 characters 16 characters V104 Too Big Log File 8 characters 16 characters V108 Schedule 8 characters 16 characters V109 Sch Clr 8 characters 16 characters V110 Load 8 characters 16 characters V111 Download 8 characters 16 characters Notes 1 Applies only to units fitted with the Auditor Option 2 Applies only to units with Enhanced data base option available only with 520 CPU HA261376 Chapter 5 Issue 8 Jly 04 Page 5 31 VISUAL SUPERVISOR HAN DBO 5 4 THE EVENT TEXT DICTIONARY Cont No EVENT NAME MAX LENGTH MAX LENGTH 1 4 VGA SVGA V112 Complete 8 characters 16 characters V113 Failed 8 characters 16 characters V114 Abort 8 charact
96. contain UYB 1 only Line 2 Line 2 contains comma separated information about the current revision of the file e g 2 22 11 00 09 51 16 Fred Bloggs Where 2 is the revision level of the file 22 11 00 is the day month year that revision was carried out 09 51 16 15 the hours minutes seconds that revision was carried out Fred Bloggs is the name of the person who last modified the file Line 3 Line 3 defines the batch engine interface as BAT CTRL End Action gt lt Timeout gt lt Confirm level gt lt BatchID gt e g BATCH1 0 60 2 ABC R Where BATCHI isthe name of the CTRL block to run the batch 0 defines the action on RESET 0 Requires a reload 1 Can be re started without a reload 60 defines the timeout in seconds for state transitions 2 defines the level of confirmation required when starting from the front panel 0 No confirmation required 1 OK CANCEL dialogue box 2 Required re entry of password isan optional batch id prefix of the form lt Prefix gt R where Prefix overwrites the batch ID from the left with the characters of the prefix For example a prefix of RKN would result in batch IDs such as RKN00014 R if added makes the batch ID read only i e it cannot be changed from the front panel Chapter 5 HA261376 5 62 Issue 8 Jly 04 VISUAL SUPERVISOR HAN DBO 5 14 1 FILE HEADER Cont Line 4 Line 4 defines the display interface as lt Use
97. declaration beginning with A 2 Panel Driver declaration beginning with D 3 Home and Root page definitions beginning with H and R respectively 4 Initial page definition beginning with 5 Comment lines beginning with a space character Notes 1 The system will ignore anything it cannot interpret rather than crash or hang up 2 The default pnl file is a CSV file with lines terminated by either LF or CR LF 3 character V placed at the end of a line combines two lines into one logical line Repeated use will combine several displayed or printed lines into one logical line If logical lines are more than 255 charac ters long the 255th character is overwritten by subsequent characters 4 Linetypes may appear in any order 5 Lines beginning with any other character other than A D H or R are ignored effectively making them comments 6 The Comment line type is self explanatory explanations of the other line types follow 5 7 3 1 PANEL AGENT DECLARATION Syntax A lt Id gt lt Type gt lt Access gt lt WrAccess gt lt Pane gt lt Specifics gt where all parameters beyond lt Type gt are optional PARAMETER MEANING lt Id gt is the Agent Id specified as a decimal number from 1000 to 22 1 or hex if preceded by X Ids 1 999 are reserved for user pages defined in the user screen OFL file lt Type gt is a mnemonic for the panel agent type For example MEN
98. early From ramp to set Not Bumpless The ramp is terminated early The resulting bump is larger or smaller than that programmed depend ing on the direction of the ramp compared with the SET From ramp to dwell Almost bumpless with the SP being servoed to the current working SP at time of Skip Usually results in a slight bump in the opposite sense to that of the preceding ramp From ramp to ramp 1 Same direction Same Rate The ramp continues to the new target SP at the same rate Combined duration is the same as if unskipped 2 Same direction Second Rate higher than the first At Skip the SP starts ramping at the new rate Overall duration is less 3 Same direction Second Rate lower than the first At Skip the SP starts ramping at the new rate Overall duration might be greater 4 Opposite directions At Skip the SP immediately changes ramp direction and it is likely that the previously programmed peak or trough will not be reached It is also likely that the SP will reach the new target sooner than expected and in such a case unless a further Skip is performed the SP will dwell until the next segment starts From ramp to end Starting values Not bumpless Same effect as if the Program is aborted From ramp to complete infinite dwell Not bumpless Terminates the ramp and steps to the final target setpoint To ramp from any other type 1 Ramp at rate Rate is maintained 2 Time to target Duration is maintained H
99. ging files There are two types 1 Syntax Block Name gt lt Block Field lt Alias gt lt Alias gt For example digital Out OPEN CLOSED This replaces the existing enumerations in block field digital out with the new enumerations OPEN CLOSED 2 Syntax Block Name gt lt Block Field gt lt Block SubField gt lt Alias gt lt Alias gt For example digital Out Bit OPEN CLOSED This replaces the existing enumerations in block field subfield digital out bitl with the new enumerations OPEN CLOSED TAGS Individual function block fields may be tagged so that whenever a modification to the block is made from the touch screen the modification is recorded in Event History Syntax Field Tag gt lt Block Name gt lt Field Name gt lt Bit number where field tag is the name that is used to identify the value when changed For example LowTemp PID SL BitO Note the maximum number of characters that may be used for a for a field tag is eight for small frame 1 4VGA units and sixteen for large frame SGVA units Chapter 5 HA261376 Page 5 50 Issue 8 Jly 04 VISUAL SUPERVISOR HAN DBO OK 5 9 FORM FILES The instrument uses two types of form file to configure output to printers one for the generation of reports the other for custom formatting of alarms e g text colour change 5 9 1 Report forms An application containing DR_REPRT blocks will reference report UYF
100. go blank for a few seconds while the application unloads When the unloading is complete the Appl n Manager page should look like this with three keys offering LOAD LD RUN and DELETE This is referred to as the bare panel A new LIN database can be cloned only T when in this state File MN At this point the choice must be made to load or load and run another ap plication or to delete an application LOAD LD4RUN DELETE HA261376 Chapter 4 Issue 8 Jly 04 Page 4 21 VISUAL SUPERVISOR HAN DBO 4 3 6 Loading or loading and running an application Before an application can be loaded any previously loaded application must have been stopped and unloaded 4 3 6 1 APPLICATION SELECTION Press the File field Select the required application from the pick list and press the Return key The name is displayed in the File field 4 3 6 2 APPLICATION LOADING If you select LOAD there is a short delay before the page shows the name of the application and its state IDLE If LD RUN is selected there is a short delay before the page shows the name of the application and its state RUNNING The same state can be achieved using LOAD then START 4 3 7 Deleting an application The application must be stopped and unloaded before it is deleted Press DELETE The Confirm Delete window appears Press OK Appl n Manager 1 File RISE State IDLE
101. gt is the reference number of the record you want to change lt text gt is the replacement text For example E7 File not found 5 3 2 Creating new language error text Any additional language dictionaries that are created must be named systemO uyl systeml uyl _system2 uyl and so on up to _system9 uyl one dictionary for each language to be implemented PROCEDURE In Excel or any similar spreadsheet program 1 Write a first column of reference numbers from E1 to at least E45 2 Inthe second column assign code numbers 3 Inthe third column write the error message in the required language HA261376 Chapter 5 Issue 8 Jly 04 Page 29 VISUAL SUPERVISOR HAN DBO 5 4 THE EVENT TEXT DICTIONARY On delivery the Event text dictionary is as listed below As with the System and Error dictionaries it is possible to 1 Replace any text item Event message in the Event dictionary with messages customised for a particular industry or application and or 2 Internationalise the messages by creating a new dictionary for each of up to ten languages to V13 take the User ID V110 to 116 take the recipe file name or the recipe name No EVENT NAME MAX LENGTH MAX LENGTH 1 4 VGA SVGA Clock set 16 characters 16 characters V2 Scramble key set 16 characters 16 characters V3 Started N A 16 characters Note 1 V4 Ack all 16 characters 16 characters V5 Access Save N A 16 characters V6 Access Updated
102. higher fitted with LS14250 Health Relay specification Contact format Contact rating resistive Isolation C ontact to ground Changeover Common normally closed and normally open contacts 30V ac 60V dc at0 5Amps 30V ac RMS or 60V dc Rear panel indicators Red LED Yellow LED Green LED M odbus Comms activity Hardware startup failure SLIN comms activity Software running Yellow LEDs integral with Comms connectors Data Logging Storage Disk Data format Data compression Log frequency DO S formatted 3 5 inch floppy 1 44 M B or 16MB internal Flash memory ASCII asc or compressed data Proprietary O nce every 10 seconds floppy disk once per second for internal Flash Programmer M ax no of programs M ax no of segments M ax no of analogue setpoints M ax no of digital setpoints Basic 25 Standard 25 Basic 250 Standard 500 approx Basic 8 Standard 16 Basic 16 Standard 32 Alarms and events N umber of records in history History line format Acknowledgment 250 lines maximum 500 max for models fitted with 520 CPU Name Type Date Time Colour coded No of records in eventlog Standard 250 Enhanced 1000 Recipes M ax no of concurrent recipe sets files 4 M ax no of production lines per set 8 M ax no of recipes per set file 16 M ax no variables per set 250 Batch M ax no of concurrent batches fil
103. in order to customise the architecture of the Standard Interface to your own requirements The architecture of the User Screen Interface is assembled using the User Screen Editor and is held in other files To customise the architecture of the User Screen Interface see the User Screen Editor Handbook part no HA260749U005 5 7 1 The Panel Navigation file 5 7 1 1 THE VERSIONS For any instrument there can be three versions of the Panel Navigation file held in software with copies of two of them in ROM The file names are lt appname gt pnl _default pnl and _system pnl with ROM copies of default pnl and _system pnl Each of these versions is mostly a list of agents with various parameters determining behaviour Some of these pa rameters are agent specific others are generic Codings for system pnl the Bare Panel version and _default pnl called the Application Panel version here follow Note For units fitted with the Audit option please see section 5 7 1 2 for codings With an application say lt appname gt loaded the system looks for lt appname gt pnl This is a version that has been customised for that application and which will generate an interface architecture specifically for it For an instrument that periodically runs different applications there could be an lt appname gt pnil for each application If appname pnl cannot be found the instrument searches for default pnl This is a generic version
104. name DOS rules apply For hourly and daily file types the operator specifies the first two letters and the remaining six are assigned automatically by the instrument to identify the start of the hour or the 24 hour day logged in the file The first two characters must be unique to that logging group For example an hourly ASCII file that started at 11 o clock on 26 July 2004 and that was given the identifier RN by the operator would be assigned the name RN072611 asc that is RNmmddhh asc A daily packed file that started at the previous midnight would be RN040726 pkd that is RNyymmdd pkd For sequential files the operator specifies the first two letters and the remaining six are assigned automatically by the instrument starting at 000001 and incrementing each time a new file is started This field appears only if ASCIT is selected as File Type Pressing the currently displayed option causes a picklist to appear allowing the user to select Present column titles included in log or Absent column titles are not logged Chapter 4 4 16 261376 Issue 8 Jly 04 VISUAL SUPERVISOR HAN DBO 4 2 1 1 LOG CONFIGURATION Cont Date Format Compr Ratio This field appears only if ASCII is selected as the file type and is used to select the format for the date time or duration stamp recorded in the file by means of a picklist containing the formats described in table 4 2 1 1 No
105. number 3 44 Custom title number 4 45 Custom title number 5 46 Custom title number 6 51 Custom variable number 1 52 Custom variable number 2 53 Custom variable number 3 54 Custom variable number 4 55 Custom variable number 5 56 Custom variable number 6 91 State of the batch 92 Name of recipe selected for batch 93 Name of current phase 101 to 120 Names of phase numbers to 20 301 to 316 Names of recipes 1 to 16 401 to 480 Names of recipe variable numbers 1 to 80 HA261376 Chapter 5 Issue 8 Jly 04 5 61 VISUAL SUPERVISOR HAN DBO 5 14 BATCH FILES For instruments supporting Batch it is possible to create Batch files UY B on a PC using a text editor or spreadsheet that supports Comma separated variable CSV format files Each UYB file consists of 2 parts The first part is a 6 line header which describes in a fixed format the general information contained in the file The second part consists of a number of phases of the batch Notes No line may exceed 512 characters including line feed carriage return instructions Spaces are counted as characters Trailing commas will be treated as illegal unless otherwise stated Commas double quotes single quotes and equals signs are all illegal in fields Non printing characters excluding CR and lt LF gt are not permitted anywhere in the file C desea par 5 14 1 File Header The format of the 6 line header is Line 1 Line 1 must
106. of nodes Node N LIN Protocol setup Protocol Name All subnet Enable Local IP Setup MAC Address Address Assignment IP Address Subnet Mask Default Gateway Remote Subnet Node List Number of Nodes Node 1 EH ERI M SAVE CANCEL COMMS Figure 4 5 1 5 Ethernet setup items Allows the user to enter a protocol name of up to 12 characters Select Yes or no This factory set address is unique to the instrument and is non editable Select one of Fixed DHCP BootP DHCP LL BootP LL Link Local May be edited only if Fixed selected as Address assignment May be edited only if Fixed selected as Address assignment May be edited only if Fixed selected as Address assignment Enter 0 to 50 This is the number of nodes in the remote subnet Allows the IP address of each remote node to be entered Chapter 4 Page 4 38 Issue 8 Jly 04 VISUAL SUPERVISOR HAN DBO OK 4 5 2 Setting the start up strategy Hot and Cold starts are ways of starting the instrument automatically after a power failure or after a power variation large enough to trigger an alarm a brown out The strategy is set by choosing Hot Start Cold Start or both and by choosing time out intervals for Hot Start and Brown Out HOT COLD START CRITERIA The type of start selected depends upon the process and upon the operational polic
107. or disconnection of the protective earth terminal is likely to make the apparatus dangerous under some fault conditions Intentional interruption is prohibited CAUTION For direct current dc supply units local lightening protection must be fitted if the dc power supply unit is located more than 30 metres from the visual supervisor s it is supplying Note in order to comply with the requirements of safety standard BS EN61010 the equipment shall have one of the following as a disconnecting device fitted within easy reach of the operator and labelled as the discon necting device a A switch or circuit breaker which complies with the requirements of IEC947 1 and IEC947 3 b A separable coupler which can be disconnected without the use of a tool A separable plug without locking device to mate with a socket outlet in the building 1 Before any other connection is made the protective earth terminal shall be connected to a protective conductor The supply voltage cable must be terminated in such a way that should it slip or be pulled out the Earth wire would be the last wire to become disconnected 2 Forhigh voltage units the supply fuse within the power supply is not replaceable If it is suspected that the fuse is faulty the manufacturer s local service centre should be contacted for advice Instructions for replacing the fuse for low voltage dc supply units are given in section 1 3 6 3 below 3 Whenever it i
108. referred to as events in the following description As can be seen from figure 3 5 1 above the alarm history displays a list of events that have occurred since the data base was loaded giving the date and time of occurrence and where appropriate the time of clearing and for SVGA units only time of acknowledgement Where more events have occurred than can be displayed on one page a page turn symbol appears at the top left of the page Table 3 5 1 below shows the various symbols which can appear Note For a standard instrument 250 events can be listed before new events cause the oldest events to be discarded For the enhanced version of the instrument this limit is 500 events 3 Use right arrow key to view earlier events Use right arrow key to view earlier events or left arrow key to view later events Use left arrow key to view later events Table 3 5 1 Page turn symbol interpretation It is possible to limit filter the display of events in a number of ways so that only those items of current interest are included in the list To achieve this the Option key at the bottom of the display is pressed to cause the option bar to be displayed figure 3 5 16 This contains not only filter keys but also ARCHIVE and ACK nowledge keys LOCKED NE Alarm History S ACTIVE TREND 10 07 01 12 00 03 Program Aborted 10 07 01 12
109. register reverse word order INT Signed 16 bit integer SINT Signed 8 bit integer REAL 32 bit IEEE floating point value in two registers REAL_X 32 bit IEEE floating point value in two registers reverse word order SREAL_p1 16 bit signed number in units of 0 1 SREAL_p2 16 bit signed number in units of 0 01 SREAL_p3 16 bit signed number in units of 0 001 SREAL_p4 16 bit signed number in units of 0 0001 STIME_ds 16 bit duration in decisecond 0 1second units STIME_dm 16 bit duration in deciminute 0 1 min units STIME_dh 16 bit duration in deci hour 0 1 hour units SUREAL_p1 16 bit unsigned number in units of 0 1 SUREAL_p2 16 bit unsigned number in units of 0 01 SUREAL_p3 16 bit unsigned number in units of 0 001 SUREAL_p4 16 bit unsigned number in units of 0 0001 UDINT Unsigned 32 bit integer UDINT X Unsigned 32 bit integer reverse word order UINT Unsigned 16 bit integer USINT Unsigned 8 bit integer Xversions must be used when communicating with LIN instruments Table 6 2 3 Number types supported by the Visual Supervisor HA261376 Chapter 6 Issue 8 Jly 04 Page 6 13 VISUAL SUPERVISOR HAN DBO 6 2 3 THE UYM FILE Cont 6 2 3 1 EXAMPLE To read an analogue input value from channel 17 of a chart recorder For a particular chart recorder the Communications parameters have been set up in the Configuration Comms menus as follows to match the Visual Supervisor settings Protocol MODBUS Baud Rate 9
110. repeated continuously synchronised at given times or repeated at a pre defined inter val which is asynchronous with the controller Each node is normally assigned a group of PLC I O registers or a single function block so that the controlling program can deal with each node s data as though the node is an internal device without having to be concerned about timing problems This mapping of node to register or function block is carried out during network configuration which is usually carried out using a PC based program 7 7 1 I O Data transfer limits The PROFIBUS DP standard allows up to 244 bytes of data or 116 discrete data items to be transferred in each direc tion during each I O data exchange Many PLC masters however are unable to support more than 32 bytes and this has become a typical value Input and output data lengths for a given node are variable and it is possible to define nodes as read only write only or read write The I O data mixture used by a given slave device is defined by what is called a GSD file which can be edited to change the mapping of node parameters to PROFIBUS inputs and outputs This file is imported into the network configuration before the network is created HA261376 Chapter 7 Issue 8 Jly 04 7 9 VISUAL SUPERVISOR HAN DBO 7 7 2 Data format Data is transmitted in both directions as a single 16 bit integer value also called a register The value is returned a
111. same page as for exporting shown above appears with the same fields Notes 1 Imported user pages take immediate effect 2 pnlfiles need the application to be unloaded and reloaded to take effect 3 Imported Comms profiles need the application to be restarted to take effect HA261376 Issue 8 Jly 04 Chapter 4 Page4 47 VISUAL SUPERVISOR HAN DBO OK 4 6 3 Cloning system instrument data 4 6 3 1 SELECTING SYSTEM DATA From the Cloning page showing the pick list of System Application and All select System Press Return The Cloning page confirms the selection 4 6 3 2 EXPORTING SYSTEM DATA Select EXPORT The System Data Cloning page appears with three fields as described below 1 Config Options RESET Cloning Application System 11 IMPORT IMPORT RESET System Data Config Options NO Dictionaries NO User Pages NO 2 Dictionaries EXPORT CLEAR 3 User Pages Config Options These are startup strategy panel settings comms settings and current language Basically they are instrument operation preferences If the Auditor pack option is enabled Security Access if the unit is an Access System Master Network Audit Trail Setup and Signature Setup are also presented Dictionaries Dictionaries are items wi
112. screen a pick list of file names appears Files currently open for logging do not appear 5 Select the file to be deleted 6 Press the Return key 7 The pick list disappears and the Archive Manage page shows the selected file name Press DELETE The file is deleted To return to the Logging Monitor page press the MONITOR key Chapter 3 HA261376 3 14 Issue 8 Jul 04 VISUAL SUPERVISOR HAN DBO 3 4 5 THE MANAGE FACILITY Cont ARCHIVE EXPORT Export The ability to export files to a removable device such as a floppy disk or Memory stick is provided from the Ar chive Manage page Export device A is the floppy disk Export device is the USB Bulk Storage Device Memory stick Exported copied files are not deleted from the internal archive This pushbutton causes the currently displayed file to be copied to the floppy disk or USB device as selected Export all This pushbutton causes all files in the internal archive to be copied to the floppy disk or USB device If the device becomes full during archive a message appears asking the user to fit a new disk If a file to be exported has the same name as one already on the storage device the following occurs a If the file is identical the file will not be exported but be marked as skipped b Ifthe new file is longer than the one on the storage device but has the same initial data it will be exported to replace the existin
113. section 4 1 5 Inserting a segment 4 1 5 1 Deleting a segment 4 1 5 2 Changing the Hold Back properties for any analogue setpoint section 4 1 6 Choosing the setpoint 4 1 6 1 Changing the Holdback mode 4 1 6 2 Changing the Holdback value 4 1 6 3 Changing program properties section 4 1 7 Changing the name of a program 4 1 7 1 Changing the rate units for a program 4 1 7 2 Choosing an action to be taken at the end of each run 4 1 7 3 Chapter 4 HA261376 Page 4 2 Issue 8 Jly 04 VISUAL SUPERVISOR HAN DBO 4 1 2 Program Editor Page access ACCESS SYSTEM ALARMS 1 Press the Menu key then PROGRAMMER PROGRAMMER LOGGING USER SCREENS at PROGRAMMER key Press menu key PROGRAMS SCHEDULE The Programmer menu appears Load Save program 1 2 Press PROGRAMS File Name 22222222 The Load Save Program page appears prompting you for the name of a file to Load or Save To edit a program it must first be loaded LOAD SAVE SAVEAS DELETE 3 Press the File Name field the question marks On the left of the screen a pick list appears containing the programs og held by the instrument 22922292 sample 1
114. text file created on a text editor and loaded into the database The format is as follows Field Register Function codes Where Underlined items do not need to be included if the defaults are acceptable Field is the name of the LIN database block being mapped Register is the required Modbus register of the point being accessed This can be a simple decimal number or it can be of the form Constant1 Constant2 Field name tConstant3 Where Constants 1 2 and 3 are a simple decimal numbers Field name is any field name in the block which has a 16 bit integer value A sample expression might be 200 10 Slot_No Chan_No 1 In which Constants 1 2 and 3 are 200 10 and 1 respectively and the field name 1 Slot_No Chan_No Type is number type This field needs to be entered only if the default Unsigned Integer UINT is not the correct type See table 6 6 below for number type entries Function codes Modbus function codes This field needs to be entered only if the default 3 4 read registers is not ac ceptable See table 6 1 above for a list of Function codes supported by the Visual Supervisor Setting the value to zero disables the field i e it will not communicate This feature is provided to allow the disa bling of communication for individual fields in standard DCM blocks Number type Number type definition entry BOOL Value of 0 or 1 in the LSB DINT Signed 32 bit register DINT_X Signed 32 bit
115. than six points in the group a slider control appears at the right side of the display to allow access to hidden points To return to the area display the up arrow key is pressed If a point faceplate is touched a close up of the faceplate appears giving further information about the point the nature of this extra information depending on the type of faceplate To return to the group display the up arrow key can be used To return to the area display the up arrow key can be used twice or the menu key can be pressed followed by Overview Note If only one group is configured the area page does not appear To access the area page the menu key is pressed followed by operation of the Overview key as shown in figure ACCESS SYSTEM ALARMS 3 6 1a o gt Press Overview key G D Press menu key Figure 3 6 1 Access to area page Figure 3 6 1b shows typical area group and point displays A selection of typical point displays is given in section 3 6 2 below TREND DISPLAYS Operation of the down arrow key or cycle screens key for SVGA units whilst in group display mode calls one of up to four trend displays Horizontal Vertical Full width horizontal Full width vertical In each case it is possible to enter review mode allowing historical data to be viewed Section 3 6 3 below gives more details ALARM INDICATION Alarm annunciators take a varie
116. the dialogue box in section 4 1 4 press the INS SEG key The New Segment window appears requesting an identifier for the new segment Press the Segment field yellowed A qwerty keyboard appears The procedure for entering the identifier for a new segment is the same as that described in section 4 1 4 1 When the required segment name for example 1 has been entered the Return key is operated Chapter 4 HA261376 Page 4 8 Issue 8 Jly 04 VISUAL SUPERVISOR HAN DBO OK 4 1 5 1 INSERTING A NULL SEGMENT Cont The New Segment window reappears displaying the name of the new segment g New Segment Segment c This inserted segment will be null operation until it has been modified null operation consists of a dwell of zero duration Dig in 3 eus The Program Editor page returns with new but empty segment inserted after the one which was being modified 20 3e oo 20 68 00 2 0 00 In order to view the whole setpoint sequence it might be necessary to scroll right or left using the scroll bar arrows at the bottom of the display The SAVE button is used to save the changes when completed If neces sary the SAVE button is called to the display by pressing the option key located at the bottom of the screen ption key 4 1 5 2 DELETING A SEGMENT The procedure for deleting a segment is the same as that f
117. the sum of the following times 1 Scanning period between MODBUS table and database in the master 2 Cycle time of serial link communications 3 Scanning period between MODBUS table and database in the slave 6 1 7 2 SERIAL LINK CYCLE TIME The cycle time of the serial link communications is itself the sum of the following 1 Response time at master 2 Transit time request response over serial link 3 Response time at slave 6 1 7 3 SCANNING PERIOD AND RESPONSE TIME For the Unit controller supervisor the scanning period and response time depend on the number of 16 bit words to be scanned and may be expressed approximately for both master and slave versions as Scanning period msec 200 3 5 r d Response time msec 10 0 08n where r number of register table entries d number of digital table entries 1 bit 8 bit or 16 bit n number of 16 bit words registers and bits expressed in multiples of 16 6 1 7 4 TRANSIT TIME ON SERIAL LINK The Transit time over the serial link depends on the baud rate and the volume of information At 9600 baud no par ity 2 stop bits this may be calculated as follows Transit time msec 14 2 3n Chapter 6 HA261376 Page 6 10 Issue 8 Jly 04 VISUAL SUPERVISOR HAN DBO 6 2 MODBUS DCM 6 2 1 Introduction A Devolved Control Module DCM is configured for each item to be accessed via the Modbus link In addition an Instrument Block is available for each model of I O unit pro
118. to 8 double precision integ 32 bit parameters in 2500 IOS DCM_I8 Access up to 8 integer 16 bit parameters in 2500 IOS DCM_R8 Access up to 8 real number 32 bit parameters in 2500 IOS DCM_S8 Access up to 8 short integer 8 bit parameters in 2500 IOS DCM_T8 Access up to 8 time duration 32 bit parameters in 2500 IOS DCM_UI8 Access up to 8 unsigned integer 16 bit parameters in 2500 IOS DCM_US8 Access up to 8 unsigned short integer 8 bit parameters in 2500 IOS DCM_W8 Access up to 8 ABCD hex word 16 bit parameters in 2500 IOS DCM_Y8 Access up to 8 hex byte 8 bit parameters in 2500 IOS D2500 Provide overall view of remote 2500 IOS instrument D2000 Provide overall view of remote 2200 or 2400 instrument D25_R_UV Access the 8 real user values in 2500 IOS D25_UALM Access the user analogue or digital alarms in 2500 IOS DIAG AGA8DIAG AGAS block diagnostics ALH_DIAG T800 alarm history statistics ALINDIAG ALIN MAC LLC diagnostics AMC_DIAG Comms statistics on application master DB_DIAG Database diagnostics block DDR_DIAG T800 data recording statistics EDB_DIAG External database diagnostics block EDB_TBL External database table block ELINDIAG ELIN Diagnostics EMAPDIAG Ethernet mapping diagnostic block PBUSDIAG Profibus diagnostics enhanced instruments only PRPDIAG Port Resolution Protocol diagnostic block enhanced instruments only ISE_DIAG T800 options and features NATPDIAG Audit Trail Provider diagnostics NATCDIAG Audit Trail C
119. to the decimal point you specify converted to an integer with rounding limited to the range 65536 to 65535 and then truncated to 16 bits This allows applications to work either with signed numbers 32768 to 32767 or with unsigned numbers 0 to 65535 When the register is being transferred from the Modbus to the database it is treated as a signed number in the range 32768 to 32767 scaled according to the decimal point specified and then written to the database Values requiring up to 32 bits of storage 32 bit fields representing values where precision must be preserved may be connected to a pair of Modbus regis ters The two parts are stored in standard PC format in two consecutive registers of which the first must be at an even address This method of linking is enabled by entering D double precision in the DP field of the first reg ister The scanner task ensures data coherency a 32 bit totals Two register mapping of long integers is used for the Total and Target fields of the TOTAL and TOT CONN blocks Chapter 6 Page 6 6 HA261376 Issue 8 Jly 04 VISUAL SUPERVISOR HAN DBO OK 6 1 3 Using the diagnostic table The diagnostic table is a special set of 32 registers containing status and control bits to allow the database to interact with the Modbus drivers A diagnostic table allows the user to control the Modbus operation or present diagnostic information to the database Generally only one diagnosti
120. touch the yellowed Line field and Recipe Name Run Prog select a new line from the resulting pick list Alternatively the down arrow key at the bottom of the screen can be used to scroll through the available items The file can DOWNLOAD ABORT now be downloaded by pressing the DOWNLOAD key Figure 3 7 1d Status page for multi line recipes SELECTING A RECIPE d Recipe Status 7 If more than one recipe is present in a file then it is possi ble to select which recipe is to be the current one With the Id GasMixes Recipe Status page selected figure 3 7 1 a touch on the File name GASCONC recipe field will call a pick list from which the required item can be selected The recipe can now be downloaded using the DOWNLOAD key Recipe Name Amarillo DOWNLOAD ABORT Figure 3 7 1 Status page for recipe selection 3 7 2 Monitoring the recipe A recipe can be monitored from the Recipe Status screen and from the Recipe Monitor screen RECIPE STATUS PAGE The recipe status screen contains the File name and the Recipe name and any one or more of the following fields Set ID Line Status if downloaded Time date of last download Status can be any one of the following DOWNLOADING if a download is in progress COMPLETE if the latest download was completed successfully FAILED if the previous download was unsuccessful or aborted HA261376 Chapter 3 Issue 8 Jul
121. unit to have a unique address Lee Terminator Figure 1 3 2 Visual Supervisors to 2500 wiring CONNECTORS AND CABLES All connectors are RJ45 For a fixed permanent installation cables should be a low loss type Eurotherm part no 89508 5 2RJA45 xxx where is the length in metres with an implicit decimal point as in and maximum of 99 9 metres For a temporary set up cables can be general purpose types See 1 3 5 Cable schedule for details Pin out details for the cable and connector going into the slave Comms port on the 2500 are given in the 2500 User Manual 1 3 3 Signal wiring Configuration port 1 3 3 1 VISUAL SUPERVISOR TO CONFIGURATION PC The configuration port is located behind the cover flap on the front panel below the screen figures 1 2a 1 2b 1 2c To open the flap and reveal the port pull the bottom of the centre tab towards you It will click open allowing you to open the flap down 2 ward from the top To close the flap push it up hook the top of the tab behind the lip of the casing and push the bottom of the tab shut The cable schedule for these runs constitutes section 133 Fig 1 3 3 1a Configuration Transfer port location Small frame unit shown large frame units are similar Chapter 1 HA261376 Pagel 14 Issue 8 Jul 04 VISUAL SUPE
122. which is accessed from the main menu using the BATCH key then the STATUS key The batch status screen contains all the information present on the Batch Start screen but also includes the State of the batch its Started at and if appropriate Ended at time and date and phase information If a batch message is active an annunciator bar appears near the top of the page flashing orange black and a question mark with orange black flashing background appears at the left side of the alarm pane Touching the alarm pane allows review and ac knowledgement of the message 2 Batch Status Batch Message lt q Batch message annunciator File Name BATCH Recipe Name Batch Id Order No Customer Contact State Started At Ended At al 50562985 010709 FishesRus BASS COMPLETE 09 07 01 12 30 46 09 07 01 12 34 43 RESET Figure 3 8 5 Batch status page 3 8 6 Batch Hold With a batch running operating the HOLD key from either the BATCH menu or the Batch Status screen places the batch into hold mode The batch may be restarted as required by pressing RESTART 3 8 7 Batch Abort With a batch running or held operating the ABORT key from either the BATCH menu or the Batch Status screen immediately terminates the batch Chapter 3 Page 3 38 HA261376 Issue 8 Jul 04 VISUAL SUPERVISOR HAN DBO OK 3 8 8 Batch Create A new batch can be created by operatin
123. which may be customised if necessary by modifying the system dictionary Parameter specifics are PANEL AGENT PARAMETERS MENU Ids for the agents accessed in this menu SPP Id for the associated SPP MENU SPP MENU Id for the associated SPP MENU Id for the associated ALM HIST APP MGR Bit encoding for displayed keys buttons A Application system 1 UNLOAD 2 SAVE 4 SAVEAS 8 STOP START B Bare system 1 LOAD 2 LOAD AND RUN 4 DELETE Example of a Menu Agent using parameters to specify the agents to be accessed from the menu A1000 MENU 3 4000 2000 9000 3000 5000 1 The bit encoding in the table above for the Application panel version refers to the last parameter in the line A2210 APP_MGR 4 0 in the corresponding listing 5 7 3 2 PANEL DRIVER DECLARATION Syntax D lt Id gt lt Type gt lt Specifics gt where lt 4 gt 15 the driver identity In a single driver system this has no real significance lt Type gt is the mnemonic for the panel driver type Currently the only type supported is QVGA Example D1 QVGA where the 1 in D1 is just an identifier for the driver even if there is only one installed Currently there are no parameters for driver declarations HA261376 Chapter 5 Issue 8 Jly 04 Page 45 VISUAL SUPERVISOR HAN DBO 5 7 3 3 HOME PAGE DECLARATION Syntax H Id Example H1 This defines the Home agent the one active after power up or after HOME timeout which
124. will be accepted as input regardless of whether x or X was specified Note Binary format is not currently available for writeable variables Chapter 5 HA261376 5 68 Issue 8 Jly 04 VISUAL SUPERVISOR HAN DBO OK 5 15 8 User actions A pattern match may also cause the execution of a number of user actions An action list may be included as lt action gt for a single action lt 1 gt lt 2 gt for 2 or more actions The list of possible actions are shown in table 5 15 8 below EXAMPLE Description Example Acknowledge all alarms Go to a specified display page lt gt 9010 Descend to speci fied display i e Go Back works DESC lt Page gt DESC 9010 General ST Oque Tes pm ST PID1 SL 240 0 Set index into a dic tionary DICT SET dict entry DICT SET W 1 Increment or decre ment a dictionary index DICT ADD dict increment limit Table 5 15 8 Action list DICT ADD W 1 14 The following examples show how the input string RESET will reset the writeable dictionary index to 11 Then each successive item beginning ITEM will write its next 8 characters into the writeable dictionary and increment the index In this way a list of strings are scanned into dictionary entries 11 to 14 Qr RES ET
125. wired pairs of shielded RJ45 connectors MO DBUS JBUS master 16 standard 64 enhanced Selectable between 1200 and 38 400 Baud 8 bits 1 or 2 stop bits selectable parity Isolation 60Vdc 30V ac Profibus Connectors Parallel wired pairs of shielded RJ45 connectors Protocol Profibus DP DPV1 N umber of nodes supported Data rate Isolation 16 standard 124 enhanced Selectable between 9600 and 12M Baud 60Vdc 30V ac 1M to Chassis Universal Serial Bus USB Version Devices supported 1 1 2 0 devices are compatible USB Bulk storage devices emory Stick Isolation N o signal isolation HA261376 Appendix A Issue 8 Jly 04 Page A 3 VISUAL SUPERVISOR HAN DBO OK FUNCTION BLOCKS SUPPORTED CATEGORY BLOCK FUNCTION BATCH BAT_CTRL Batch controller interface DISCREP Transmitted received digital signal match to diagnose plant faults RECORD Storage retrieval of analogue digital values for runtime use SFC_CON Sequence SFC control selection and running SFC_DISP Display monitoring control of remotely running sequence SFC SFC_MON Sequence SFC runtime monitoring RCP_SET Recipe set RCP_LINE Recipe Line CONDITN AGA8DATA AGAS calculation block for compressibility of gas mixtures AN_ALARM Alarm with absolute deviation rate alarms CHAR 16 point analogue characteriser DIGALARM Digital alarm FILTER First order filter FLOWCOMP Computes flow rate corrected for
126. 0 0 MANAGE GROUPS Allows the user to set up the instrument to log groups of data Opera tors can view Groups data but not change it For more information Disk Active turn to Chapter 4 section 4 2 Logging groups of data Logging Media Size 1425 kBytes Free Space 200 kBytes 3 start logging or to view the contents of the disk press MONITOR Free Time 200 16 56 The Logging Monitor page appears displaying disk information en Files 8 200 4 Tostart logging press OFF in the Logging field A pick list appears OFFLINE GROUPS MANAGE allowing OFF ON or On Event to be selected ON followed by return causes archiving to start 5 To stop logging temporarily in order to change a disk press OFFLINE eee The Logging Off line page appears For about five seconds it shows Logging Offline Disk Active indicating that the instrument is still recording Active Disk Off Line ten changes to Flushing indicating that data is being flushed from RAM to the disk Finally Flushing changes to Off line confirming that the disk is now off line not recording MONITOR 6 Remove the disk and insert a new one 7 re start recording press MONITOR Recording resumes immediately and the Logging Monitor page reap pears 8 stop logging permanently in this session press
127. 0 00 04 08 51 Database Loaded 29 10 00 05 08 51 Alarm History TYPE ACTIVE ENGINEER Access 2500 7 Comms Database Started Database Loaded Figure 2 6 2b Alarm history page 1 4 VGA HA261376 Chapter 2 Issue 8 Jly 04 2 11 VISUAL SUPERVISOR HAN DBO OK 2 6 2 ALARM HISTORY PAGE Cont The Alarm History page displays a list of alarm conditions and Events showing when they occurred and if appropri ate when they were cleared or acknowledged large frame SVGA versions only Events and other items which are not clearable or which cannot be acknowledged display in the Clear and ACK columns The Alarm History record starts in the first instance from when the instrument is powered up for the first time There after it is preserved through any automatic restarts called hot starts see section 4 5 2 Setting the Start up strategy but the record is lost and a new one started whenever a new application database is loaded The Standard model of the instrument can retain and display a total of 250 alarms or Events The Enhanced model can hold up to 500 alarms or Events Once these limits are exceeded the oldest item in each case is deleted when a new addition is made to the list TWO LINE DISPLAY Operation of the down arrow key toggles between single line and double line working Single line working is a de scribed above and as shown in figures 2 6 2a b When in two line working each alarm has a secon
128. 0 BATCH_MENU 2 3 8010 8010 2 3 2 8011 Alarms A9000 ALM_MENU 3 9010 9011 9021 A9010 ALM_HIST 2 2 A9020 MESSAGE 2 3 Dialog Agent A100000 DIALOG 4 END OF FILE HA261376 Chapter 5 Issue 8 Jly 04 5 39 VISUAL SUPERVISOR HAN DBO 5 7 1 2 Auditor option versions This sub section contains listing similar to those in 5 7 1 1 above but for instruments with the Auditor option fitted Coding The Bare Panel version system pnl SAMPLE BARE PANEL SYSTEM Auditor Option fitted Quarter VGA Driver D1 QVGA Home Agent set up for user page 1 if this does not exist then it will default to the System Summary which has the lowest Id in the main pane HI Initial page first page after power up is the same Root Agent R1000 A1000 MENU 3 2010 4000 2210 2300 2100 2130 2400 2500 9012 1 A2010 SYS_SUM 2210 4 0 SETUP submenu 2300 3 5398 5399 2030 2040 2050 2060 2070 A2030 S TARTUP 3 A2040 COMMS 4 A2050 CLOCK 3 A2060 INTERNAT 4 A2070 PANEL 2 TEST submenu TEST has 2 entry points 2100 3 3 5610 5611 2110 2111 A2110 TEST 3 MAINTENANCE submenu A2400 MENU 4 3 5930 593 1 2080 2120 2140 A2080 CLONE 4 A2120 UPGRADE 4 A2140 FILE_MGR 4 A2130 AUTODB 4 2210 Admin submenu A2500 MENU 5 3 S 1400 S 1401 25 10 2520 A2510 NET AUDIT 5 A2520 SIGN CFG 5 A4000 ACCESS Alarm History for even
129. 0 TO PC RUNNING iTOOLS VIA TALKTHROUGH Refer to Chapter 4 section 4 5 1 1 3 4 Permanent link to a PC running SCADA To be issued later Chapter 1 HA261376 1 16 Issue 8 Jul 04 VISUAL SUPERVISO HAN DBOOK 1 3 5 Cable schedule For an operational system Figure No Cable Run Part Numbers 1 3 2 Modbus I O Network Visual Supervisor to 2500 and Low loss fixed installation 9508 5 2RJ45 xxx where xxx length 2500 to 2500 General purpose AMP557827 2 4 feet AMP557827 4 8 feet AMP557827 5 12 feet VIDEK 8961 1 1 metre VIDEK 8961 2 2 metre VIDEK 8961 10 10 metre For a system under configuration Visual supervisor PC 3 5mm Jack 9 way Configuration port D type socket Part Numbers 3 5mm Jack 25 way Configuration port D type socket DN247979 To be issued later Figure No 2500 I O PC Part Numbers 1 3 3 2a RJ11 config port 9 way D type socket 1 3 3 2b DN026484 RJ11 config port 25 way D type socket To be issued later HA261376 Issue 8 Jul 04 Chapter 1 1 17 VISUAL SUPERVISOR HAN DBO 1 3 6 Supply voltage wiring 1 3 6 1 AC SUPPLY As detailed in the Important information leaflet HA261376U007 supplied with the instrument the suitable supply voltage range for the unit is 85 to 246 V ac It is recommended that an external fuse 3 Amp type T be fitted in the line The power cord is terminated u
130. 00 1500 Security Access A4000 ACCESS Logging Submenu LOGGING has 4 entry points 5000 2 3 5700 5701 5010 5011 5012 5013 A5010 LOG 2 3 2 Area Group Point displays 1500 1 2 2 7000 MENU 2 3 3 7010 7010 2 3 2 7000 Batch A8000 BATCH_MENU 2 3 8010 A8010 BATCH 2 3 2 8011 Alarms A9000 ALM MENU 2 3 9010 9011 9021 9012 A9010 ALM_HIST 2 2 A9020 MESSAGE 2 3 Dialog Agent A100000 DIALOG 4 Signature Agent A200000 SIGN 5 END OF FILE Chapter 5 HA261376 Page 5 42 Issue 8 Jly 04 VISUAL SUPERVISOR HAN DBO 5 7 2 Editing the default pnl file In order to change the architecture layout of the menu system the default pnl file is edited For instance for any one menu it is possible to change 1 its title and any other legends 2 which screen area it occupies E G status area Main pane or pop up menu 3 which sub menus it generates Note It is possible to create a system that is un navigable and unworkable For instance it is possible inadvertently to create a system which generates no panel display and which therefore offers no means of recovery HA261376 Chapter 5 Issue 8 Jly 04 5 43 VISUAL SUPERVISOR HAN DBO OK 5 7 3 Line types Please read the following in conjunction with the foregoing listings There are several distinct line types each identified by its first character 1 Panel Agent
131. 0321 0 0321 0 0321 n Pentane 0 0443 0 0443 0 0443 0 0443 n Hexane 0 0393 0 0393 0 0393 0 0393 n Heptane 0 0 0 0000 0 0000 0 0000 n Octane 0 0 0 0000 0 0000 0 0000 n Nonane 0 0 0 0000 0 0000 0 0000 n Decane 0 0 0 0000 0 0000 0 0000 Helium 0 0 0 0000 0 0000 0 0000 SAVE CAPTURE CAPTURE AS pownoAo KFT DJ pm Figure 3 7 2 Recipe monitor page SVGA version Note For 1 4VGA units the capture column is initially hidden the scroll bar below the table allowing it to be viewed This scroll bar and the SAVE CAPTURE keys shown above are toggled between by means of the options key Chapter 3 Page 3 36 HA261376 Issue 8 Jul 04 VISUAL SUPERVISOR HAN DBO OK 3 8 BATCHES ACCESS SYSTEM ALARMS 3 8 1 Batch loading OVERVIEW PROGRAMMER RECIPE 1 From the main menu select BATCH then select BATCHES BATCH LOGGING HOME BEEN Load Batch 2 Touch the ID or filename area File Name 22222222 3 Select the required item from the picklist which appears 4 Operate the LOAD button LOAD CREATE Note For the Create function see section 3 8 8 below Batch Start File Name BATCH Batch Id 50462971 Order No gomenin Customer K onpany Contact gt SAVE AS START RESET
132. 1 Ports in parentheses are not recommended for the associated protocol 2 CFG port is always EIA232 3 MST SLV ports are always EIA422 485 4 All protocols use 8 data bits except TERMCEG and Printer which use 7 or 8 5 The Node Number where presented must be non zero to enable the port PROTOCOL NOTES ALIN Used to connect a Local Instrument network LIN together The two connectors are wired in parallel for easy daisy chaining Profibus master communications supporting Profibus PD and PD1 extension It is advisable to set the noded number as low as possible as performance can be affect ed by high node numbers It must be ensured however that the node number does not clash with any slave s node number DPv1 M Appears only if the Ethernet option is fitted and is used to connect a Local Instrument network LIN across Ethernet FTP 2 Used to provide an FTP server if the Ethernet option is fitted ELIN ENET1 Keypad KBD Enables keypad operation MODBUS M MST SLV The full name of the protocol is Modbus master The full name of the protocol is Modbus RTU slave It is used for the Talk thru facili MODBUS S SLV CFE ty and for direct connection with a Modbus master ENET3 port is for Modbus TCP enhanced units with the ethernet option fitted CFG Serial printer communications if fitted LPT Parallel printer communications if fitted Reader KBD Bar code reader communications
133. 1 1 Switch on The Instrument is not fitted with a power switch so the switch on arrangements depend upon the particular installa tion After switch on the screen will remain blank for a few seconds before brightening then after approximately 15 seconds an opening display appears that fills most or all of the screen area If this opening display fails to appear 1 check that there is a power supply 2 check with the Commissioning Engineer that the instrument powered up faultlessly when he or she last left it After this if the problem is still unresolved recall the Commissioning Engineer 2 1 2 The user interface The user interface is open to customisation either before operation or with the instrument taken out of service For example the opening page called the Home page can differ other pages can be changed and User pages User screens can be added The size of the panes can differ the legends on the buttons can differ and indeed the buttons need not exist at all In the extreme the entire architecture of the interface can differ Chapters 2 to 4 of this manual describe the system of menus and pages supplied by the manufacturer before any customisation by the user This menu system is called the Standard Interface Chapter 5 describes how to customise this Standard Interface if required 2 1 3 The standard interface The Standard Interface consists of a number of display panes and a group of Navigation
134. 1 3 Vertical display mode User Full width ehe 3 31 Attributes 8 4 With faceplate 2 2 21 1 3 29 DOS 2 16 4 32 ID Control 8 3 ID password system 4 30 W 8 4 Writable dictionary 5 59 PageS ente ede 4 47 Properties 8 5 7 Text 5 35 8 5 Zoom control 3 30 3 32 User actlOns ete o dere e 5 69 filas aui item evt 5 52 UYP files irr te re ceder dte ns 7 3 5 56 VYT 5 55 261376 Index Issue 8 Jly 04 Pagei 5 VISUAL SUPERVISOR HAN DBO OK This page is deliberately left blank Index HA261376 Pagei 6 Issue 8 Jly 04 Inter Company sales and service locations Australia Eurotherm Pty Limited Unit 10 40 Brookhollow Avenue Baulkham Hills NSW 2153 Telephone 61 2 9634 8444 Fax 61 2 9634 8555 e mail eurotherm eurotherm com au http www eurotherm com au Austria Eurotherm GmbH GeiereckstraBe 18 1 A1110 Wien Telephone 43 1 798 76 01 Fax 43 1 798 76 05 e mail eurotherm eurotherm at http www eurotherm at Belgium and Luxemburg Eurotherm S A N V Rue du Val Notre Dame 384 4520 Moha Huy Belgium Telephone 32 0 85 274080 Fax 32 0 85 274081 e mail sales eurotherm belgium be http www eurotherm nl Denmark Eurotherm Danmark A S
135. 111 to 114 but for line 5 161 to 164 As 111 to 114 but for line 6 171 to 174 As 111 to 114 but for line 7 181 to 184 As 111 to 114 but for line 8 301 to 316 Names of recipes 1 to 16 respectively 401 to 480 Names of variable numbers 1 to 80 respectively Chapter 5 HA261376 5 60 Issue 8 04 VISUAL SUPERVISOR HAN DBO OK 5 13 THE BATCH DICTIONARY The batch dictionary holds text that originates from the batch files and any corresponding recipe files uyr It may not be initialised from a file The text held by this dictionary changes whenever the uyb and or uyr files are loaded or modified from the front panel The dictionary is divided up into sections one for each batch controller each spanning a range of up to 1000 records The sections are allocated as follows 1001 1999 Batch number 1 2001 2999 Batch number 2 3001 3999 Batch number 3 4001 4999 Batch number 4 Also the section 1 999 represents the batch currently on view and is thus a duplicate of one of the other sections The following table indicates how the records are allocated for each batch To get the record from batch add 1000 n For example to get the record of the user who last edited the batch 3 uyb file use record number 3014 Record Value 1 File name excluding ubr 11 Revisions number of uyb file 14 Name of user who last edited the uyb file 41 Custom title number 1 42 Custom title number 2 43 Custom title
136. 134U005 4 1 1 2 EDITING A PROGRAM Notes 1 Only two tasks changing setpoint value and changing segment duration can be performed while a program is running but on Hold for the duration of the task Whilst the current segment is in Hold mode its values are displayed in green instead of blue It is possible to edit this segment s duration only to times longer than the period of time already elapsed in that segment other parameters can be edited as normal 2 The PREVIEW facility on the PROGRAMMER menu displays a profile of the loaded program over its full duration and target values can be displayed at any point in time It is recommended that frequent use be made of PREVIEW when editing a program in order to check that the edits have produced the intended profile 3 For systems with the Auditor option fitted an edited program must be saved before it is run 2 61376 Chapter 4 Issue 8 Jly 04 4 1 VISUAL SUPERVISOR HAN DBO OK 4 1 1 2 EDITING A PROGRAM Cont Before editing can start the Program Editor page must be accessed as described in section 4 1 2 Once the editor page has been accessed the program can be edited in the following ways Changing a setpoint section 4 1 3 By changing the type of ramp to it 4 1 3 1 By changing its value 4 1 3 2 Changing a segment section 4 1 4 By changing its identifier 4 1 4 1 By changing its duration 4 1 4 2 Inserting or deleting a segment
137. 3 Line 4 Green Green Green Green Recipe Recipe Recipe Recipe F Brown Brown Brown H Brown Recipe Recipe Recipe Recipe Purple Purple Purple Purple Recipe Recipe Recipe Recipe Orange Orange Orange Orange Recipe 5 Recipe Recipe Recipe 38 54 52 FE 55 S55 5 55 Oo Oo Oo Oo Red Pigment Yellow Pigment Blue Pigment Mixer 1 Mixer 2 Mixer 3 Mixer 4 Orange Purple Brown Green paint paint paint paint Figure 3 7a Four paintmixer set Recipe set file name Recipe names red pigment Hi blue pigment 0 0 50 0 35 0 yellow pigment 50 0 0 0 30 0 Variable Variable names values Figure 3 76 Sample recipe edit page HA261376 Issue 8 Jul 04 Chapter 3 Page 3 33 VISUAL SUPERVISOR HAN DBO 3 7 1 Download procedure Select a recipe set ID only if multiple recipe sets are supported Load a recipe file Select a recipe line only if multiple lines are supported Select a recipe only if the file contains multiple recipes Download the recipe RECIPE SET SELECTION ACCESS SYSTEM ALARMS 1 From the main menu select RECIPE OVERVIEW PROGRAMMER RECIPE LOGGING HOME Figure 3 7 1 Main menu 2 From the resulting pop up menu select RECIPES Recipe RECIPES STATUS MONITOR EDIT DOWNLOAD Figure 3 7 1b Recipe menu Load Save Recipe 3 The Recipe Load Save p
138. 4 Figure 1 4 1 Location of Comms jumpers on the interconnect board Chapter 1 HA261376 Pagel 22 Issue 8 Jul 04 VISUAL SUPERVISOR HAN DBO 1 4 2 a ec N Large frame units Note For units manufactured prior to mid June 2002 please follow the instructions given or the small frame unit in section 1 4 1 above Figure 1 4 1 always applies for these units Isolate the instrument from supply power Release the combined top rear cover by removing the four countersunk screws marked A in figure 1 3 6 4a and the pan head screws B and C these fixings should be retained for use in re assembly For current in struments screws A are T8 Torx headed screws Previous versions used cross head screws For previous ver sions items were two part plastic rivets Once all the fixings have been removed the cover can be removed by lifting its bottom edge upwards and out wards B m N E A B e Figure 1 4 2b Remove cover Figure 1 4 2a Remove cover fixings The links are located on the main circuit board the interconnect board and are shown in figure 1 4 26 If Profi bus connectors are fitted it may be convenient to remove these two screws each to gain access to the links Remove and insert the links in accordance with the table in figure1 4 2b Re assemble the unit Finally with no application loade
139. 4 ACCESS BUTTON_TEXT 12 CONFIG 1465 ACCESS PAGE_TITLE 20 Deploy Access Config 1466 ACCESS BUTTON_TEXT 12 CLEAR 1467 ACCESS BUTTON_TEXT 12 FILL 1468 ACCESS BUTTON_TEXT 12 SORT HA261376 Chapter 5 Issue 8 Jly 04 Page 23 VISUAL SUPERVISOR HAN DBO 5 2 4 THE DICTIONARY Cont No Context Class Max Text 1469 ACCESS MESSAGE 128 Deploying 1470 ACCESS ITEM_TITLE 18 Node 1471 ACCESS MESSAGE 128 Aborting 1480 ACCESS BUTTON TEXT 12 REVISION 1481 ACCESS PAGE TITLE 20 Revision Information 1482 ACCESS ITEM TITLE 18 Revision 1483 ACCESS ITEM TITLE 18 Revised On 1484 ACCESS ITEM TITLE 18 Revised By 1485 ACCESS ITEM TITLE 18 Authorised By 1486 ACCESS ITEM TITLE 18 Reason 1487 ACCESS ITEM TITLE 18 Bound to 1488 ACCESS ITEM TITLE 18 Operational Changes 1500 SIGN PAGE TITLE 20 Signature Configuration 1501 SIGN LEGEND 11 SIG CONFIG 1502 SIGN ITEM TITLE 18 Function 1503 SIGN BUTTON TEXT 12 SAVE 1504 SIGN BUTTON TEXT 12 DEFAULTS 1505 SIGN ITEM TITLE 18 Revision 1510 SIGN SIG LEVEL 16 No Confirmation 1511 SIGN SIG LEVEL 16 Confirm Only 1512 SIGN SIG LEVEL 16 Password 1513 SIGN SIG LEVEL 16 Signature 1514 SIGN SIG LEVEL 16 Sign amp Authorise 1515 SIGN SIG LEVEL 16 Action Disabled 1520 SIGN ITEM TITLE 18 Field Changes 1521 SIGN ITEM TITLE 18 Alarm priority Changes 1522 SIGN ITEM TITLE 18 Units Changes 1523 SIGN ITEM TITLE 16 Wiring Changes 1524 SIGN IT
140. 4 TEST LEGEND 11 RESET 620 TEST PAGE_TITLE 20 Battery Test 621 TEST ITEM_TITLE 2 Battery Condition 622 TEST ITEM 16 BAD 623 TEST ITEM 16 GOOD 624 TEST ITEM 16 9999 625 TEST BUTTON_TEXT 12 FORCE 630 TEST PAGE_TITLE 20 Relay Test 631 TEST ITEM_TITLE 22 Health Relay 632 TEST ITEM_TITLE 22 Run Relay 633 TEST ITEM_TITLE 22 Comms LED 634 TEST ITEM 16 OPEN 635 TEST ITEM 16 CLOSED 640 TEST PAGE_TITLE 20 Reset Instrument 641 TEST MESSAGE 128 Confirming OK will reset the instrument If you do not wish to then exit from this page 642 TEST MESSAGE 128 Instrument resetting please wait 700 LOGGING MENU_TITLE 16 Logging 701 LOGGING LEGEND 11 LOGGING 702 LOGGING LEGEND 11 MONITOR 703 LOGGING LEGEND 11 OFF LINE 704 LOGGING LEGEND 11 MANAGE 705 LOGGING LEGEND 11 GROUPS 706 LOGGING PAGE_TITLE 20 Logging Monitor 707 LOGGING PAGE_TITLE 20 Logging Groups 708 LOGGING PAGE_TITLE 20 Logging Off line 709 LOGGING PAGE_TITLE 20 Archive Manage 711 LOGGING ITEM_TITLE 17 File Name 712 LOGGING ITEM_TITLE 17 File Type 715 LOGGING BUTTON_TEXT 12 MONITOR 716 LOGGING BUTTON_TEXT 12 OFFLINE 717 LOGGING BUTTON_TEXT 12 MANAGE 718 LOGGING BUTTON_TEXT 12 GROUPS HA261376 Issue 8 Jly 04 Chapter 5 5 13 VISUAL SUPERVISOR HAN DBO 5 2 4 THE DICTIONARY Cont No Context Class Max Text 720 LOGGRP MESSAGE 128 No logging groups configured 721 LOGGRP ITEM_TITLE 17 Group Name
141. 5 T800 BadBat S ecurity access Identity Acces Attributes Reference ADMIN T 00000000 0 COMISSION CANCEL PROPERTIES MAINT Use scroll bar not shown to show hid den parts of screen gt Scroll bar hidden pushbuttons shown when option key pressed Figure 4 4 3 2a User ID Management page As is depicted above the opening display shows one user per access level In order to edit the Identity including password Name Access level etc it is necessary only to touch the relevant field highlights yellow and edit the entry as required IDENTITY CHANGE EXAMPLE Note This procedure is not possible if the unit is fitted with the Auditor option To change the Identity ENGINEER to Roger and assign Roger a password of 13 Identity ENGINEER 1 Touch the word ENGINEER in the Identity column non Confirm 2 Touch the word ENGINEER in the Identity field of the resulting dialogue box OK CANCEL DELETE DISABLE figure 4 4 3 2b Figure 4 4 3 2b ID Edit page Enter Roger using the POP UP keyboard followed by Return Touch the yellow Password field and enter the number 13 using the keyboard 5 Touch the yellow Confirm field and enter the number 13 using the keyboard and press OK If this entry differs from the first OK has no effect and the Confirm field remain
142. 585 COMMS SEPARATOR 2 1586 COMMS ITEM_TITLE 16 MAC Address 1587 COMMS DIALOG_TITLE 28 WARNING 1588 COMMS DIALOG_TEXT 80 The specified IP address mask combination may be invalid 1590 COMMS ITEM 16 None 1591 COMMS ITEM 16 RO 1592 COMMS ITEM 16 RW 1593 COMMS ITEM 16 All HA261376 Chapter 5 Issue 8 Jly 04 Page 5 25 VISUAL SUPERVISOR HAN DBO 5 2 5 Panel customisation using the dictionary It is possible to customise the standard panel interface by defining certain dictionary entries to be empty An empty TEE dictionary entry takes the form S lt N gt in the file Note the is the last character on the line it must not be followed by any other even a space character If any of the dictionary entries listed below is set to be empty then the corresponding function is removed from the standard interface Note do not define dictionary entries other than those listed below to be empty NO CONTEXT TEXT FUNCTION 62 ALMMENU NOTE Entering of notes into alarm history 428 SPP RUN Running the currently loaded program 429 SPP HOLD Hold the currently running program 430 SPP ABORT Aborting programs 436 SPP DELETE Delete program 481 SPP SCHEDULE Scheduling programs 482 SPP PREVIEW Preview of program 483 SPP PRE PLOT Live preview combined display of program 484 SPP EDIT Editing of programs 490 SPP RUN FROM Starting a program part way through 570 SPP SKIP Skipping t
143. 6 8 6 1 4 Diagnostic function Codes eee menie 6 8 6 1 5 Modbus exception responses cirri 6 9 6 1 5 1 SLAVE MODE ERROR 6 9 6 1 6 Notes Modbus JBUS 6 9 6 1 6 1 MO DBUS 6 9 6 1 6 2 BUS ri etta eroe pe Fr d 6 10 6 1 6 3 OTHER PRO DUCTS 0 meme 6 10 Contents HA261376 Page 8 Issue 8 Jly 04 VISUAL SUPERVISOR HAN DBO OK LIST OF CONTENTS Cont Section Page 6 1 7 MODBUS JBUS Interface performance 6 10 6 1 UPDATE 2255 obe Ert e E o Peas 6 10 6 1 7 2 SERIALLIN K CYCLE TIM 54 6 10 6 1 7 3 SCANNING PERIOD AN D RESPONSE 6 10 6 1 7 4 TRANSIT TIME ON 5 5 44 6 10 6 2 MODBUS DE M a ER Rer eae a pec Er cc re bs 6 11 6 21 Introduction recte er Pe a e re rl C REA P ds 6 11 6 2 2 DCM s avallable1 t eet tft Ed e ce Ec Pate td ee 6 11 6 2 2 1 BLOCKS erect bote dette 6 11 6 2 2 2 RAM aote m he e beer eade Rae 6 11 6 2 2 3 MODULE BLOCKS eese 6 11 6 2 2 4 CHANNELBLOCKS 2 6 12 6 2 2 5 USER WIRING 5
144. 60 Reference 4 32 Relay A 2 y A NT E E 9 1 den 3 11 Report OMS 5 51 4 16 Retire D hcec es ee 8 4 The dictionary need 5 3 8 7 Time display in Alarm history 3 16 Root page declaration 5 46 Se 4 43 WE Display brightness 4 44 S Page 0 4 44 Pop up menu aie Potente teg 4 44 Safety riotes uiuis ben RUBER 1 1 Timing information Modbus 6 3 4 18 4 21 5 57 Scanner task Modbus 6 3 ates 3 21 Scheduling a program 3 4 Trend review xr 3 30 3 32 Screen saver configuration 4 44 Trouble shooting 2 7 8 Security access 8 3 Two line display Eventlog 3 20 Index HA261376 Pagei 4 Issue 8 Jly 04 VISUAL SUPERVISOR HAN DBO OK U V UNLOAD is ses eite ehe 4 18 4 21 Variable lines Recipe 5 57 Unpacking ee metes
145. 600 Parity Even Data bits 8 fixed for MODBUS protocol Stop bits 1 H W handshake Off Address 4 From the recorder documentation the analogue input channels are accessed using code 03 and are addressed contiguously starting with channel at decimal address 0 Thus to read its input value code 03 and address 16 are required Thus the UYM file should contain the following 16 UINT 03 6 2 3 2 SCALING The recorder documentation also states that the value PV is returned as a 16 bit hex number in the range 0000 Channel Low range value to FFFF Channel High range value and the calculation PV Scaled value unes range low range x low range F has to be carried out to find the actual scaled value The recorder Channel Configuration must be accessed to deter mine the High and Low range values Example High range 90 for 4V input signal Low range 10 for 1V input signal Current PV 2 5V 7FFF The scaled value is 90 10 x 7FFF FFFF 10 50 6 2 3 3 COMMENTING A comment can be attached to the end of any line in the form Comment The maximum number of characters for the UYM file is 60 characters including delimeters The comment text string can contain a maximum of 60 minus rest of line characters Thus the sample UYM file could become MV 16 UINT 03 Recorder 4 channel 17 Chapter 6 HA261376 Page 6 14 Issue 8 Jly 04 VISUAL SUPERVISOR HAN DBO OK CHA
146. 70 Recover Enable 16 characters 16 characters V171 Recover Disable 16 characters 16 characters V172 Master Access 16 characters 16 characters See Note V173 Slave Access 16 characters 16 characters See Note V174 Bind Access 16 characters 16 characters See Note V175 Unbind Acces 16 characters 16 characters See Note V176 Access Bind Fail 16 characters 16 characters See Note V177 ForcNew on PwdEx 16 characters 16 characters See Note V178 Disable on PwdEx 16 characters 16 characters See Note V179 Deploy Access 16 characters 16 characters See Note V180 Clock sync 16 characters 16 characters V181 Clock master 16 characters 16 characters V182 Clock slave 16 characters 16 characters V183 Clock isolated 16 characters 16 characters V185 Expired 16 characters 16 characters See Note Note Applies only to units fitted with the Auditor Option Chapter 5 Page 5 32 HA261376 Issue 8 Jly 04 VISUAL SUPERVISOR HAN DBO OK 5 4 THE EVENT TEXT DICTIONARY Cont No EVENT NAME MAX LENGTH MAX LENGTH 1 4 VGA SVGA V186 Invalid 16 characters 16 characters See Note V190 Log On Remote 8 characters 16 characters 191 Log Off remote 8 characters 16 characters V192 LogFail Remote 8 characters 16 characters V193 Timeout Remote 8 characters 16 characters V195 Log On FTP 8 characters 16 characters V196 Log Off FTP 8 characters 16 characters V197 LogFail FTP 8 characters 16 characters V198 Timeout FTP 8 characters 16 characters Note
147. 722 LOGGRP ITEM_TITLE 17 Logging 723 LOGGRP ITEM_TITLE 17 Archive Int 725 LOGGRP ITEM_TITLE 17 Name Type 726 LOGGRP PARA 24 Configuration 727 LOGGRP ITEM_TITLE 17 Column Titles 728 LOGGRP ITEM_TITLE 17 Date Format 729 LOGGRP ITEM_TITLE 17 Compr Ratio 731 LOGGRP BUTTON_TEXT 12 SAVE 732 LOGGRP BUTTON_TEXT 12 LOG NOW 741 LOGGING ITEM 13 ASCII 742 LOGGING ITEM 13 Binary 743 LOGGING ITEM 13 UHH 745 LOGGRP ITEM 13 Normal 746 LOGGRP ITEM 13 High 751 LOGGRP ITEM 13 ON 752 LOGGRP ITEM 13 OFF 753 LOGGRP ITEM 13 On Event 755 LOGGRP ITEM 13 Text 758 LOGGRP ITEM 13 Sequence 756 LOGGRP ITEM 13 Hourly 757 LOGGRP ITEM 13 Daily 761 LOGGRP ITEM 13 Date Time 762 LOGGRP ITEM 13 Spreadsheet 763 LOGGRP ITEM 13 Integer 764 LOGGRP ITEM 13 Duration 765 LOGGRP ITEM 13 Days 766 LOGGRP ITEM 13 DHMS 767 LOGGRP ITEM 13 Present 768 LOGGRP ITEM 13 Absent 770 LOGAMAN ITEM 16 Files Exported 771 LOGAMAN ITEM 16 Files Skipped 772 LOGAMAN ITEM 16 Page Locked 773 LOGAMAN DIALOGUE_TITLE 28 Archive Manager Export 774 LOGAMAN DIALOG_TEXT 80 Complete Device may now be removed 7715 LOGAMAN DIALOG_TEXT 90 Do you wish to skip ALL duplicate files i e never overwrite files on the export device 776 LOGAMAN DIALOG_TEXT 80 Export device is full Replace device and press OK to continue 777 LOGAMAN BUTTON_TEXT 12 EXPORT ALL 778 LOGAMAN ITEM 16 Export device 779 LOGGING ITEM_UNITS 9 Bytes 780 LOGGING ITEM_UNITS 9 KBytes 781 LOGMON
148. A total power failure for a short time Process Variable Examples are temperature pressure or valve aperture A ramp is 1 a generic term for all types of programmed change in a setpoint value Can be a dwell no change at all a step an instantaneous change a ramp at a ramp to a servo to setpoint or a servo to PV all linear changes 2 two of the types mentioned above ramp at and ramp to Recording Recording is the process of saving the history of a set of data values in the instrument s non volatile memory The data can survive a power outage and can be replayed on the instrument Appendix C HA261376 PageC 2 Issue 8 Jly 04 VISUAL SUPERVISO HANDBOOK C2 GLOSSARY Cont RFI Radio frequency interference SCADA Supervisory Control and Data Acquisition Sequences Sequences are programs that users may have written to deal with any particular events circumstances or requirements in the process under control Setpoint program SP A setpoint program is a strategy to control a number of process variables such as temperature pressure and valve apertures over a period that can range with the Visual Supervisor from less than a minute to more than seven weeks Standard Interface The Visual Supervisor Standard Interface is the name for the non customised version of the user interface for the instrument It s the default factory set interface with no customised featu
149. A261376 Page 3 2 Issue 8 Jul 04 VISUAL SUPERVISOR HAN DBO 3 1 2 Running from a point Running a program from a point means running a new program from a user specified point after its start point The first seven steps are the same as in 3 1 1 Running a program now above 8 Press the RUN FROM key at bottom left The Run From page appears headed with the name of the program just loaded The Duration field shows how long the program will take to com plete The Run From field is waiting for a time into program value to be entered from which the program run is to be started Initially the Run From field is set at the default of 00 00 00 the start so under the Segment header below it the segment name is 1 the first The Time Through field shows at what time through the segment the program will start 9 Press the yellowed Run From field In the left part of the display a numeric keyboard appears At the top a confirmation bar shows the current Run From time as 00 00 00 hh mm ss with a cursor blinking under the first 0 10 From the keyboard key in the required From time in ths exam ple 01 45 00 11 Press the green Return arrow The keyboard disappears to reveal the full Run From page If the se lected time starts running the program from beyond the first segment the Name and Time Through fields will show different values 12 Torun t
150. A261376 Chapter 3 Issue 8 Jul 04 3 7 VISUAL SUPERVISOR HAN DBO 3 2 HOLDING AND ABORTING A PROGRAM The Hold facility has two uses 1 for Operators to halt a program when a problem arises in the process under control and to hold the program at that point while attempts are made to fix the problem 2 for Engineers to make on line changes to a running program This chapter is for Operators and so the following deals with the first situation 3 2 1 Holding a program rete pere 1 Witha program running and the full Programmer menu displayed as MONITOR PROGRAMS SCHEDULE at step 8 in 3 1 1 Running a program press HOLD PREVIEW PRE PLOT EDIT HOLD ABORT SKIP The Program pane changes to yellow and reports HELD The estimated time of completion starts incrementing in seconds Vn Programmer MONITOR PROGRAMS SCHEDULE Left of the page title is the current time To view the time into pro gram you should use the MONITOR facility section 3 3 below PREVIEW PRE PLOT For most processes there will now be time available for solving the problem before the pause itself starts causing new problems The time available will depend upon the process If the attempts to fix the problem are successful the pro gram is usually continued from that point using RUN see section 3 1 1 Running a program now If the attempts are unsuccessful the program is us
151. ACTIVE 7 14 08 00 10 23 07 Loopl HighAbs Cleared Figure 5 9 2 16 Typical UYT file printout HA261376 Chapter 5 Issue 8 Jly 04 5 55 VISUAL SUPERVISOR HAN DBO 5 10 RECIPE FILES For instruments supporting Recipes it is possible to create Recipe files UYR on a PC using a text editor or spreadsheet that supports Comma separated variable CSV format files Each UYR file consists of three parts The first part is a 3 line header which describes in a fixed format the general information contained in the file The second part consists of a single Title Line The final part consists of a number of lines each describing a single variable Notes 1 Noline may exceed 512 characters including line feed carriage return instructions 2 Spaces are counted as characters 3 String titles do not have to be unique 4 Trailing commas will be treats as illegal unless otherwise stated 5 Ifa string length is exceeded any extra characters are lost when saving the file 6 Commas double quotes single quotes and equals signs are all illegal in fields 7 Non printing characters excluding CR and lt LF gt are not permitted anywhere within the file 5 10 1 Basic Recipe File 5 10 1 1 FILE HEADER Line 1 Line 1 must contain only Line 2 Line two contains comma separated information about the current revision of the file e g 2 22 11 00 09 51 16 Fred Ungineer Where 2 is the re
152. AD D25_AI3 D25 AO2 D25 4 D25 DI4 D25_DI8 D25 DO4 Access single I O Module Access two channel analogue input module Access three channel analogue input module Access two channel analogue output module Access four channel analogue output module Access four channel digital input module Access eight channel digital input module Access four channel digital output module 7 2 2 4 CHANNEL BLOCKS D25 AI D25 AICH D25 AO D25 AOCH D25 DI D25 DICH D25 DO D25 DOCH Access single analogue input channel Access single analogue input channel Access single analogue output channel Access single analogue output channel Access single digital input channel Access single digital input channel Access single digital output channel Access single digital output channel 7 2 2 5 USER WIRING BLOCKS D25 R CV D25 CV D25 R UV Access up to 8 user wiring calculated values real in the I O unit Access up to 8 user wiring calculated values boolean in the I O unit Access the 8 user values real in the I O unit 7 2 2 6 USER ALARM BLOCKS D25 UALM Access the alarms in the I O unit Chapter 7 HA261376 Page 7 2 Issue 8 Jly 04 VISUAL SUPERVISOR HAN DBO OK 7 2 2 7 PARAMETER BLOCKS DCM_I8 Access up to 8 signed integer 16 bit parameters in the I O unit DCM_UI8 Access up to 8 unsigned integer 16 bit parameters in the I O unit DCM_R8 Access up to 8 signed real number 32 bit parameters in the I O unit DCM_W8 Access up
153. AGP BUTTON_TEXT 12 MANUAL 845 AGP BUTTON_TEXT 8 VIEW 846 AGP BUTTON_TEXT 8 LIVE 850 AUTODB PAGE TITLE 20 Auto Database Create 851 AUTODB LEGEND 11 CREATE 852 AUTODB ITEM_TITLE 16 Programmer 853 AUTODB ITEM_TITLE 16 Loops 854 AUTODB ITEM_TITLE 16 Modules 855 AUTODB ITEM_TITLE 16 Channels 856 AUTODB ITEM_TITLE 16 T O Requested 857 AUTODB ITEM_TITLE 16 Actual 858 AUTODB ITEM_TITLE 16 Logging 860 AUTODB INTRO 64 Create a database from nodes 1 8 861 AUTODB INTRO 64 The following is a summery of the blocks created 862 AUTODB INTRO 64 Use the APP MGR to load the data base 863 AUTODB DIALOG_TITLE 28 Saving Database 865 AUTODB ITEM_TITLE 16 Creating 866 AUTODB ITEM_TITLE 16 Num Blocks 867 AUTODB ITEM_TITLE 16 Nodes Found 868 AUTODB ITEM_TITLE 16 File 869 AUTODB ITEM_TITLE 16 Node 870 AUTODB BUTTON_TEXT 12 CREATE 900 DIAGMENU PAGE_TITLE 20 Diagnostics 901 DIAGMENU LEGEND 11 DIAGS 910 AMCDIAG LEGEND 11 MODBUS M 911 AMCDIAG PAGE_TITLE 20 Modbus Comms Diags 912 AMCDIAG ITEM_TITLE 27 Requests Lost 913 AMCDIAG ITEM_TITLE 2T Requests Aborted 914 AMCDIAG ITEM TITLE 27 Requests Total 915 AMCDIAG ITEM_TITLE 27 Replies Good 916 AMCDIAG ITEM_TITLE 27 Replies Rejection 917 AMCDIAG ITEM_TITLE 27 Replies Timed Out 918 AMCDIAG ITEM_TITLE 27 Replies Link Error Chapter 5 HA261376 Page 5 16 Issue 8 Jly 04 VISUAL SUPERVISOR HAN DBO 5 2 4 THE DICTIONARY Cont
154. AL PROTECTION INFORMATION Respiratory Not applicable in normal use Ventilation Not applicable in normal use Protective clothing Not applicable in normal use Appendix C Page C 4 HA261376 Issue 8 Jly 04 VISUAL SUPERVISOR HAN DBO OK IN DEX A A Cont Abort Program etd etant 3 8 Audit 8 1 Access Filtering Ete 8 2 By user D E 2 16 Auto creates eee eee initia 2 17 CONTON thee ete ee eh 4 27 Display 2 13 to configuration 2 13 Bar code reader connection 1 12 Access levels eene 8 11 Bar code reader 5 64 Account Properties 22 221 4 33 Bargraph display mode Acknowledge Horizontalbars ecd 3 29 Alarms inde eere eee eed 3 18 NSSF AY ELSES ub e a 3 28 Messages bios IMPROBE ORE IPS 3 18 Batch Action 4 4 8 11 NTa osos 3 38 Adding 4 33 3 39 Admin 4 32 te eel ne 3 37 Agent types 2 2312 n tet 5 47 3 38 TUNE STERNE 3 38 3 18 3 37 Active Cleared Ack ed
155. ANAGEMENT This chapter is for those responsible for setting up the instrument for managing applications for editing setpoint pro grams and for supervising the day to day operation and monitoring of the instrument Engineer level of access to the instrument is required see section 2 8 1 gaining access This chapter consists of the following sections 4 1 4 2 4 3 4 4 4 5 4 6 4 7 4 8 Editing a program Logging groups of data Managing an application Controlling access Setting up and re setting the instrument Cloning an instrument File Manager Recipe management With the exceptions of Logging groups of data Controlling access and File Manager each section consists of several tasks which are listed in the sub contents at the start of each section If at any point the display differs from what is expected the Menu key at the bottom of the screen on the right can be used to return to the Pop up menu from which the task can be repeated 4 1 EDITING A PROGRAM 4 1 1 INTRODUCTION Note If more than one programmer has been configured then the right left arrow keys do not scroll through the program but to the next previous programmer Id Chapter 3 section 3 1 1 4 1 1 1 CREATING A PROGRAM The PC based Setpoint program editor supplied on CD as one of the components of the Eurotherm Project Studio is used to create programs For details see the Setpoint Program Editor Handbook part no HA261
156. AVE or DEFAULT operation DEFAULT Returns tha access levels to those when initially enabled HA261376 Chapter 8 Issue 8 Jul 04 8 11 VISUAL SUPERVISOR HAN DBO OK 8 2 2 SIGNATURE CONFIGURATION Cont Application Setup Self Tests Cloning File Manager Administration Alarms Overview Programmer Recipe Batch Logging xele Figure 8 2 2b Function picklist Chapter 8 Page 8 12 HA261376 Issue 8 Jul 04 VISUAL SUPERVISOR HAN DBO OK CHAPTER 9 REMOTE ACCESS The instrument provides a limited set of facilities which allow remote users to access the instruments 9 1 FIP For instruments fitted with the Ethernet option an FTP server may be enabled from the comms setup page section 4 5 1 3 9 1 1 FIP logon FTP access always requires the user to log on Anonymous FTP logons are not permitted To configure the instru ment for FTP logon the user based access system section 4 3 3 must be used and the relevant user s attributes configured to include FTP Yes The instrument allows up to four users to be logged in at any one time but only one of these may have write permis sion attribute View Only No This user s log on log off activity is recorded in the Event Log Users with View Only Yes do not have their log on log off activity recorded Notes 1 Any attempt to log into a non FTP account or into a nonexistent account will be recorded i
157. Account Properties Min User Id Length 6 PROPERTIES Min Password Length 6 Max Login Attempts 3 Password Expiry 90 days Similar to the Properties page described in section 4 4 3 this page depicted with default values in figure 8 1 3e allows the login param eters to be set as shown below User Timeout 760 minutes OK CANCEL Figure 8 1 3e Properties default values Min User ID Length 3to8 Min Password Length 3 t0 8 Passwords must have at least one non alpha character Max Login attempts 1 to 99 The number of attempts at logging in that may be made before the account is disabled Password Expiry 1to180 The password expires after the specified number of days have elapsed since the last time the value was edited User Timeout 1 720 The user is logged out after the specified number of minutes has elapsed since previ ous screen activity HA261376 Chapter 8 Issue 8 Jul 04 8 5 VISUAL SUPERVISOR HAN DBO 8 1 3 SECURITY ACCESS PAGE Cont MAINTENANCE Operating the MAINT key at the bottom of the Security Access screen calls the Account Maintenance screen to the display as depicted in figure 8 1 3f below Account Maintenance Recovery Account YES Master Access YES Edit Own Expired Password YES OK CANCEL Figure 8 1 3f Maintenance screen If recovery account is set to YES this enables a recovery in the event of
158. B below Field Description Field entry definition Processor type 386 processor 520 processor Archive medium Floppy disk drive fitted Floppy disk and USB fitted See note below Operator interface SGVA with touch screen amp keyboard SGVA with touch screen original mechanics SGVA with touch screen current mechanics 1 4VGA touch screen amp keyboard Keyboard and barcode reader mutually exclusive 1 4VGA touchscreen Configuration port Rear panel 9 way D type connector Front panel jack plug Supply voltage 24V not 520 cpu 90 to 264 Vac or 120 to 340V Battery Battery always fitted Modbus comms standard Always EIA 422 Comms option 1 None Profibus using 9 way D type connector Profibus using front panel jack plug Comms option 2 None ALIN ELIN Printer option None Parallel printer supported Serial printer supported only if D9 selected at field 4 Mounting Through panel Manual language English French German Case Colour Eurotherm Green Label Eurotherm Logo Customer Logo No Logo Internal archive Not fitted 16MB fitted Recipe Support Not supported Recipes supported Report support Not supported Reports supported Setpoint programming Standard sequencing Basic setpoint prog
159. C CONI Clear 10 07 01 11 44 50 TREND Load 10 07 01 11 40 02 1800 BadBat 10 07 01 11 40 02 Database Loaded 10 07 01 11 40 02 Alarm event message Date Time of as configured in Lin Blocks occurrence highlighted red if active SUMMARY LOG NOTE ARCHIVE MESSAGES Run prog SUE LOCKED Alarm History 10 07 01 d 10 07 01 12 10 07 01 10 07 01 12 Date Time of llDate Time of alarm alarm or mes for message acknow sage being ledgement cleared Displays younger Displays older history if any history if any Toggles between Calls filter Alarm history amp acknowledge and Alarm summary archive keys Figure 3 5 1a alarm history display SVGA version to log archive Information is arranged in a number of columns as shown above The figure shows the SGVA version the 1 4VGA version is similar but does not have the Ack column or the Cycle screens key The CLEAR and ACK columns contain one of the folowing 1 Dashed lines for events defined as one off occurrencies which by their nature are not Clearable 2 Blank paces for alarms or messages that are still active 3 Time and date showing when the item ceased to be active or was acknowledged Chapter 3 Page 3 16 HA261376 Issue 8 Jul 04 VISUAL SUPERVISOR HAN DBO OK 3 5 1 ALARM HISTORY DISPLAY Cont For brevity Alarms Events and Messages all
160. DITING Select the required parameter Select or enter the new value from a pop up list or keyboard Press the green Return key at the bottom of the pop up The new value is displayed Either press the SAVE button to save the change or press the CANCEL key to abort the change 4 5 1 2 HARDWARE CHANGES 1 Change the position of the Comms jumpers on the Interconnect board within the instrument as described in detail in Section 1 4 1 Switching Communications protocols 2 With no application loaded press the Option key under the screen This calls the Hardware key to the display 3 Press the Hardware key A warning Hardware Check message appears To comply disconnect the instrument from any equipment see the Caution below 5 Press OK to cancel the screen warning 6 The screen redraws and shows the new settings If these do not correspond to the required values check that the jumpers have been set to the correct positions CAUTION Pressing the Hardware key does two things 1 For the other parameters it sets default values 2 It causes spurious characters to be transmitted from both the SLV and MST ports To ensure that this stream of characters cannot produce faulty readings or damage any other equipment connected it is recommended that such equipment be disconnected Chapter 4 HA261376 Page 4 36 Issue 8 Jly 04 VISUAL SUPERVISOR HAN DBO 4 5 1 3 PROTOCOLS AVAILABLE Notes
161. E SS 4 27 AAD RIPSTHIME ACCESS OR RES 4 28 4 42 Editing the passWOords iip m rite btt Ets 4 28 4 4 3 User ID sy Ste mo ies co our tee e Reo des 4 30 4 4 3 1 CHANGING TO THE USER ID SYSTEM 4 30 4 4 3 2 USER ID mem 4 31 4 5 SETTING UP RE SETTIN G 4 35 4 5 1 Editing communications 4 35 4 5 1 1 SOFTWARE PARAMETER EDITING 4 36 4 5 1 2 HARDWARE CHAN GES iiit athain een 4 36 4 5 1 3 PROTOCOLS AVAILABLE 4 37 2 5 T4 IATKSTH RW TT 4 37 A Dili 3 ETHERNET seio dero tite shh 4 38 4 5 2 Setting the startup strategy eee 4 39 HOT CO ED S CRITERIA d nr ep 4 39 4 5 2 1 START UP STRATEG Y 0 04 4 4 39 4 5 2 2 CHANGING START UP 5 4 40 4 5 3 Resetting the 0 24 lt mme 4 41 4 5 3 1 CLOCK SETUP 5 4 41 4 5 3 2 CHANGING 4 41 TIMES CHAN P rr 4 42 4 5 4 Changing language and date time
162. EM TITLE 16 Field Changes 1525 SIGN ITEM TITLE 16 Segment Change 1526 SIGN ITEM TITLE 16 Segment Change held 1527 SIGN ITEM TITLE 16 Current Segment Change 1528 SIGN ITEM TITLE 16 RUN edited 1529 SIGN ITEM TITLE 16 ACK 6 10 1530 SIGN ITEM TITLE 16 ACH 11 15 1531 SIGN ITEM TITLE 16 User Password Change 1540 COMMS COMMS PORT 5 ENETI 1541 COMMS COMMS PORT 5 ENET2 1542 COMMS COMMS PORT 5 ENET3 1543 COMMS COMMS PORT 5 ENET4 1544 COMMS COMMS_PORT 5 5 1550 5 COMMS_ITEM 8 ELIN 1551 COMMS COMMS_ITEM 8 FTP 1560 COMMS BUTTON TEXT 12 ETHERNET 1561 COMMS PAGE_TITLE 20 Comms Ethernet 1562 COMMS PARA 24 LIN Protocol Setup 1563 COMMS PARA 24 Local IP Setup 1564 COMMS PARA 24 Remote Subnet Node List 1565 COMMS SEPARATOR 1 s 1566 COMMS ITEM TITLE 16 Protocol Name 1567 COMMS ITEM TITLE 16 Subnet Enable 1569 COMMS ITEM TITLE 16 Address Assignment Chapter 5 HA261376 5 24 Issue 8 Jly 04 VISUAL SUPERVISOR HAN DBO 5 2 4 THE DICTIONARY Cont No Context Class Max Text 1570 COMMS ITEM 16 Undefined 1571 COMMS ITEM 16 Fixed 1572 COMMS ITEM 16 DHCP 1573 COMMS ITEM 16 BootP 1574 COMMS ITEM 16 DHCP LL 1575 COMMS ITEM 16 BootP LL 1576 COMMS ITEM 16 Link Local 1580 COMMS ITEM_TITLE 16 IP Address 1581 COMMS ITEM_TITLE 16 Subnet Mask 1582 COMMS ITEM_TITLE 16 Default Gateway 1583 COMMS ITEM_TITLE 16 Number of Nodes 1584 COMMS ITEM_TITLE 16 Node 1
163. ETE HA261376 Issue 8 Jly 04 Chapter 5 Page 5 19 VISUAL SUPERVISOR HAN DBO OK 5 2 4 THE DICTIONARY Cont No Context Class Max Text 1134 RECIPE ITEM 12 FAILURE 1140 RECIPE DIALOG_TITLE 28 RECIPE ERROR 1141 RECIPE MESSAGE 128 Recipe File not found 1142 RECIPE MESSAGE 128 Recipe File limits exceeded 1143 RECIPE MESSAGE 128 Invalid block reference s 1144 RECIPE MESSAGE 128 Recipe download in progress 1145 RECIPE MESSAGE 128 Unrecognised file format 1146 RECIPE MESSAGE 128 File write error 1150 RECIPE LEGEND 11 MONITOR 1151 RECIPE PAGE_TITLE 20 Recipe Monitor 1152 RECIPE PAGE_TITLE 20 SP 1153 RECIPE PAGE_TITLE 20 SP Live 1154 RECIPE PAGE_TITLE 20 PV 1155 RECIPE PAGE_TITLE 20 Capture 1160 RECIPE PAGE_TITLE 20 RCP 1161 RECIPE ITEM_TITLE 16 Id 1162 RECIPE ITEM_TITLE 16 File Name 1163 RECIPE ITEM_TITLE 16 Line 1164 RECIPE ITEM_TITLE 16 Recipe Name 1165 RECIPE ITEM_TITLE 16 Variable Name 1168 RECIPE ITEM 8 FALSE 1169 RECIPE ITEM 8 TRUE 1170 RECIPE LEGEND 11 EDIT 1171 RECIPE PAGE_TITLE 20 Recipe Editor 1172 RECIPE ITEM_TITLE 16 Verify 1173 RECIPE PARA 24 Tag References 1174 RECIPE ITEM_TITLE 16 SP 1175 RECIPE ITEM_TITLE 16 Monitor 1176 RECIPE ITEM_TITLE 16 Capture 1180 RECIPE DIALOG_TITLE 28 New Recipe 1181 RECIPE DIALOG_TITLE 28 Capture New Recipe 1182 RECIPE DIALOG_TITLE 28 Delete Recipe 1183 RECIPE DIALOG_TEXT 80 Deleting 1184 RECIPE DIALOG_TITLE 28 SAVE
164. Figure 5 9 1 the items _TIME and _DATE are included to cause the system time and date to be included in the report As with other vari ables a suitable size must be allocated to the items for formatting purposes See the User Screen Editor handbook HA260749U005 for a complete list _ALM_ACT Number of currently active alarms integer _DATE Current date in appropriately internationalised format string _ _ Name of current recipe string _SPP_NAME Name of current program string _TIME Current time string USER NAME Name of user curently logged on string Table 5 9 1 1b System variables HA261376 Issue 8 Jly 04 Chapter 5 Page 5 53 VISUAL SUPERVISOR HAN DBO OK 5 9 1 1 UYF FILE ENTRIES Cont FORMATTING ATTRIBUTES Any one letter from each of the following groups of formatting codes that are applicable to a particular variable can be appended 1 Enter Lor R to format the associated value as centred left justified or right justified respectively Text defaults to Left justified L Numeric values default to right justified R 2 Enter Z to include leading or trailing zeros For REAL variables enter S to display the value in scientific notation e g 1 23E 3 For INTEGER variables one of the following may be chosen X Display values in hexadecimal format using capital A to F x Display values in hexadecimal format using lower case a to f Y Display values in binary format
165. Finsensvej 86 DK 2000 Fredriksberg Telephone 45 38 871622 Fax 45 38 872124 e mail salesdk eurotherm se Finland Eurotherm Finland Aurakatu 12A FIN 20100 Turku Telephone 358 2 25 06 030 Fax 358 2 25 03 201 France Eurotherm Automation Division Chessell Parc d Affaires 6 Chemin des Joncs BP55 F 69574 Dardilly CEDEX Telephone 33 0 4 78 66 55 20 Fax 33 0 4 78 66 55 35 e mail chessell automation eurotherm co uk http www eurotherm chessell fr Germany Eurotherm Deutschland GmbH OttostraBe 1 65549 Limburg Tel 49 0 64 31 2 98 0 Fax 49 0 64 31 2 98 119 e mail info regler eurotherm co uk http www eurotherm deutschland de Great Britain Eurotherm Limited Faraday Close Worthing West Sussex BN13 3PL Telephone 44 0 1903 695888 Fax 44 0 1903 695666 e mail Sales recorders eurotherm co uk or Support recorders eurotherm co uk http www eurotherm co uk Hong Kong Eurotherm Limited Unit D 18 F Gee Chang Hong Centre 65 Wong Chuk Hang Road Aberdeen Telephone 852 2873 3826 Fax 852 2870 0148 e mail eurotherm eurotherm com hk India Eurotherm DEL India Limited 152 Developed Plots Estate Perungudi Chennai 600 096 Telephone 91 44 4961129 Fax 91 44 4961831 e mail info eurothermdel com http www eurothermdel com Italy Eurotherm SpA Via XXIV Maggio 22070 Guanzate Como Telephone 39 031 975111 Fax 39 031 977512 e mail info eurotherm it http www eurotherm it Ja
166. G 7 4 7 4 INSSTALLATIQ 7 5 E 7 5 7 4 1 1 EARTHIN G THE SHIELD eee 7 5 7 4 1 2 NETWORK WIRING i rexit rere b rn e E t ia 7 5 qd br3 arate A AE 7 5 7 4 1 4 MAXIMUM BAUD 7 5 7 4 2 Adding the unit to the 4 meme 7 8 7 5 TROUBLESHOOTING tr o e d 7 8 7 5 1 No eem nen nnne 7 8 7 5 2 Intermittent failure to 7 8 7 5 3 Data format or parameter seems 7 8 7 5 4 Communication seems slow 22 2 1 0 00 0 7 9 7 6 5 4 nennen 7 9 7 2 5 eR re o 7 9 lf Ov Data E Ce Pd E DP Dat 7 9 74122 Data formats tu 7 10 7 10 738 T Specific KeVWOEQs sooo ect eset e Eee EU Et cd 7 10 261376 Contents Issue 8 Jly 04 Page 9 VISUAL SUPERVISOR HAN DBO LIST OF CONTENTS Co
167. IBUS DP V0 se EJ a drive mitter Figure 7 8 Typical PRO FIBUS link using a PLC as master from section 3 3 of http www profibus com Field device Field device 7 8 1 Specific keywords The following Eurotherm specific keywords may be added to a slave GSD file Keyword Value Description Eurotherm_Demand_Data 1 2 3 If any Eurotherm product has been configured to support demand data this line must be added to the GSD file that applies to that instrument 1 Eurotherm Drives products such as model 584SV 590 605 690 etc 2 Eurotherm Controls products such as model 240x T630 2500 etc 3 Eurotherm Recorders products such as model 4103 4100G Chapter 7 HA261376 7 10 Issue 8 04 VISUAL SUPERVISOR HAN DBO CHAPTER 8 ADMINISTRATIVE FUNCTIONS Notes 1 Access to all functions described in his chapter require ADMIN privileges 2 The functions described in this chapter apply only to instruments fitted with the Auditor option The Administration menu is accessed by operating the menu key at the bottom right of the screen followed by opera tions of SYSTEM and ADMIN keys Administration NET AUDIT SIGN CONFIG 8 1 NETWORK AUDIT TRAIL This function allows the Audit trail i e alarm and event logs to be transmitted from the instrument the Provider to u
168. ISUAL SUPERVISOR HAN DBO 5 2 4 THE DICTIONARY Cont No Context Class Max Text 1272 BATCH DIALOG_TEXT 80 Please confirm your password to start batch 1273 BATCH ITEM_TITLE 16 Password 1280 BATCH DIALOG_TITLE 28 BATCH NOTE 1281 BATCH DIALOG_TEXT 80 Add a batch note 1282 BATCH ITEM_TITLE 16 Note 1285 BATCH DIALOG_TITLE 28 SAVE AS 1286 BATCH DIALOG_TEXT 80 Save batch file 1287 BATCH ITEM_TITLE 16 Filename 1288 BATCH DIALOG_TITLE 28 SAVE 1289 BATCH DIALOG_TEXT 80 Overwriting 1290 BATCH DIALOG_TITLE 28 CREATE AS 1292 BATCH ITEM_TITLE 16 Recipe Line 1293 BATCH ITEM_TITLE 16 Display Group 1294 BATCH ITEM_TITLE 16 Message 1295 BATCH ITEM_TITLE 16 Log Group 1296 BATCH ITEM_TITLE 16 Log Report 1300 ACCESS BUTTON TEXT 12 PROPERTIES 1301 ACCESS PAGE TITLE 20 Account properties 1302 ACCESS ITEM_TITLE 18 Min User Id Length 1303 ACCESS ITEM_TITLE 18 Min Password Length 1304 ACCESS ITEM_TITLE 18 Max Login Attempts 1305 ACCESS ITEM_TITLE 18 Password Expiry 1306 ACCESS ITEM_TITLE 18 User Timeout 1307 ACCESS MESSAGE 128 Reducing password expiry period may result in imme diate account expiry 1308 ACCESS BUTTON_TEXT 12 REINSTATE 1309 ACCESS ITEM_TITLE 18 Password Expires In 1310 ACCESS MESSAGE 128 Your password is due to expire Please change it 1311 ACCESS ITEM_TITLE 18 Expires 1312 ACCESS ITEM_TITLE 18 Attributes 1313 ACCESS BUTTON_TEXT 12 ENABLE 1314 ACCESS PAGE TITLE 20 Sec
169. ITEM 8 Recipe 168 SYSSUM ITEM TITLE 18 Reader 169 SYSSUM ITEM TITLE 18 Batch 170 APPSUM PAGE TITLE 20 Summary 171 APPSUM LEGEND 11 APP SUM 172 APPSUM ITEM TITLE 16 Application 173 APPSUM ITEM TITLE 16 Machine State 174 APPSUM PARA 24 Memory Usage 180 APPSUM APPSUM STATE 10 OFF 181 APPSUM 5 STATE 10 RESET 182 APPSUM APPSUM STATE 10 IDLE 183 APPSUM APPSUM STATE 10 RUNNING 184 APPSUM 5 STATE 10 STOPPED 185 APPSUM APPSUM STATE 10 ERROR 190 APPSUM ITEM UNITS 9 kB 191 APPSUM ITEM TITLE 16 Control DB 192 APPSUM ITEM TITLE 16 Programmer 193 APPSUM ITEM TITLE 16 SFC DB Note For software versions prior to 3 0 the text for item 157 was LS120 Chapter 5 HA261376 5 6 Issue 8 Jly 04 VISUAL SUPERVISOR HAN DBO 5 2 4 THE DICTIONARY Cont No Context Class Max Text 194 APPSUM ITEM_TITLE 16 SFC ST 195 APPSUM ITEM_TITLE 16 Modbus slave 196 APPSUM ITEM_TITLE 16 Modbus master 197 APPSUM ITEM_TITLE 16 transient 200 STARTUP PAGE_TITLE 20 Startup Strategy 201 STARTUP LEGEND 11 STARTUP 202 STARTUP ITEM_TITLE 18 Hot Start 203 STARTUP ITEM_TITLE 18 Warm Start 204 STARTUP ITEM_TITLE 18 Cold Start 205 STARTUP ITEM_TITLE 18 Startup State 206 STARTUP ITEM_TITLE 18 Hot start time 207 STARTUP ITEM_TITLE 18 Brown out time 220 COMMS PAGE_TITLE 20 Comms Setup 221 COMMS LEGEND 18 COMMS 222 COMMS DIALOG_TEXT 80 The settings specified are invalid
170. ITEM_TITLE 16 Media Size 782 LOGMON ITEM_TITLE 16 Free Space Chapter 5 HA261376 Page 5 14 Issue 8 Jly 04 VISUAL SUPERVISOR HAN DBO 5 2 4 THE DICTIONARY Cont No Context Class Max Text 783 LOGMON ITEM_TITLE 16 Logging 784 LOGMON ITEM_TITLE 16 Free Time 785 LOGMON ITEM 8 ON 786 LOGMON ITEM 8 OFF 787 LOGMON ITEM 8 On Event 789 LOGAMAN ITEM 16 Files 790 LOGOFFL INTRO 64 This is a fixed disk It has no OFFLINE mode 791 LOGOFFL ITEM_TITLE 16 Disk 792 LOGOFFL ITEM 12 Inactive 793 LOGOFFL ITEM 12 Active 794 LOGOFFL ITEM 12 Flushing 795 LOGOFFL ITEM 12 Off Line 796 LOGAMAN BUTTON_TEXT 12 EXPORT 797 LOGAMAN MESSAGE 128 Please wait 798 LOGAMAN ITEM_TITLE 16 File Size 799 LOGAMAN BUTTON_TEXT 12 DELETE 800 CLONE PAGE_TITLE 20 Cloning 801 CLONE LEGEND 11 CLONING 802 CLONE ITEM 16 System 803 CLONE ITEM 16 Application 804 CLONE ITEM 16 ALL 805 CLONE BUTTON_TEXT 12 EXPORT 806 CLONE BUTTON_TEXT 12 IMPORT 807 CLONE INTRO 64 System Data 808 CLONE ITEM_TITLE 22 Config Options 809 CLONE ITEM_TITLE 22 Config Resources 810 CLONE ITEM_TITLE 22 Dictionaries 811 CLONE ITEM_TITLE 18 User Pages 812 CLONE INTRO 64 Application Data 813 CLONE ITEM_TITLE 22 Control Database 814 CLONE ITEM_TITLE 22 SFCs 815 CLONE ITEM_TITLE 22 Programs Recipes 816 CLONE ITEM_TITLE 22 User Pages 817 CLONE ITEM_TITLE 22 Comms Profiles 818 CLONE BUTTON_TEXT 12 CLEAR 819 CLONE BUTTON
171. L BUTTON_TEXT 12 SAVE 126 GLOBAL BUTTON_TEXT 12 ERROR 127 GLOBAL SYSSUM_ITEM 8 lt NONE gt HA261376 Chapter 5 Issue 8 Jly 04 Page 5 5 VISUAL SUPERVISOR HAN DBO OK 5 2 4 THE DICTIONARY Cont No Context Class Max Text 128 GLOBAL BUTTON_TEXT 12 NO 129 GLOBAL BUTTON_TEXT 12 YES 130 SYSMENU MENU_TITLE 16 System 131 SYSMENU LEGEND 11 SYSTEM 132 SYSSUM PAGE_TITLE 20 System Summary 133 SYSSUM LEGEND 11 SUMMARY 134 SYSSUM ITEM_TITLE 18 Instrument type 135 SYSSUM ITEM_TITLE 18 Variant 136 SYSSUM ITEM_TITLE 18 Touch keypad 137 SYSSUM ITEM_TITLE 18 Firmware 138 SYSSUM ITEM_TITLE 18 Media 139 SYSSUM ITEM_TITLE 18 Option cards 140 SYSSUM SYSSUM_ITEM 8 T800 141 SYSSUM SYSSUM ITEM 8 Standard 145 SYSSUM SYSSUM ITEM 8 kBytes 146 SYSSUM ITEM TITLE 18 DRAM 147 SYSSUM ITEM TITLE 18 SRAM 148 SYSSUM ITEM TITLE 18 FLASH 149 SYSSUM ITEM TITLE 18 EEPROM 150 SYSSUM SYSSUM ITEM 8 TOUCH 151 SYSSUM SYSSUM ITEM 8 KEYPAD 154 SYSSUM SYSSUM ITEM 8 MBytes 155 SYSSUM SYSSUM ITEM 8 FLOPPY 156 SYSSUM SYSSUM ITEM 8 PCMCIA 157 SYSSUM ITEM TITLE 8 Internal Archive 158 SYSSUM SYSSUM ITEM 8 IDE 159 SYSSUM ITEM TITLE 18 USB Bulk 160 SYSSUM PARA 20 Software options 161 SYSSUM SYSSUM ITEM 8 ALIN 162 SYSSUM SYSSUM ITEM 8 PROFIBUS 163 SYSSUM SYSSUM ITEM 8 ETHERNET 164 SYSSUM SYSSUM ITEM 8 GPIB 165 SYSSUM SYSSUM ITEM 8 ASYNC 166 SYSSUM SYSSUM ITEM 8 Report 167 SYSSUM SYSSUM
172. L OIFL_ERROR 20 BAD FILE 14 OIFL OIFL_ERROR 20 BAD LINE 15 OIFL OIFL ERROR 20 BAD EOF 16 OIFL OIFL ERROR 20 MEMORY 17 OIFL OIFL ERROR 20 SYNTAX 18 OIFL OIFL ERROR 20 RANGE 19 OIFL OIFL ERROR 20 NAME 20 OIFL OIFL ERROR 20 DICTIONARY 21 OIFL OIFL ERROR 20 TYPE 22 OIFL OIFL ERROR 20 ACTION 31 ALMMENU MENU_TITLE 16 Alarms 32 ALMMENU LEGEND 11 ALARMS 33 ALMMENU LEGEND 11 ACK 34 ALMMENU LEGEND 11 ACK ALL 35 ALMMENU LEGEND 11 HISTORY 36 ALMMENU LEGEND 11 SUMMARY 37 ALMMENU DIALOG_TEXT 80 This will acknowledge every alarm 38 ALMMENU BUTTON_TEXT 12 OK 39 ALMMENU BUTTON_TEXT 12 CANCEL 40 ALMMENU LEGEND 11 ABORT 41 ALH PAGE_TITLE 20 Alarm History 42 ALH LEGEND 11 ALM HIST 43 ALH ALH TITLE 8 TYPE 44 ALH ALH TITLE 8 ACTIVE 45 ALH ALH TITLE 8 CLEAR 46 ALH LEGEND 11 FILTER 47 ALH FILTER 8 ALL 48 ALH ALH FILTER 8 ALARMS 49 ALH ALH FILTER 8 AREA 50 ALH ALH FILTER 8 GROUP 51 ALH ALH FILTER 8 BLOCK 52 ALH ALH FILTER 8 EVENTS 53 ALH FILTER 8 SYSTEM 54 ALH DIALOG TEXT 80 This will acknowledge every alarm under the selected filter 56 ALH ALH TITLE 8 ACK 57 ALH PAGE TITLE 20 Alarm summary 59 ALH ALH FILTER 8 MSGS 61 ALMMENU PAGE_TITLE 20 Add Note 62 ALMMENU LEGEND 11 NOTE 63 ALMMENU INTRO 64 Adds a Note to the Alarm History list 64 ALMMENU ITEM_TITLE 16 Your note Chapter 5 HA261376 Page 4 Issue 8 Jly 04 VISUAL SUPERVISOR HAN DBO OK 5 2 4 THE DICTIONARY Cont
173. MARY APPLN cum Setup meme cy 4 Select PANEL The Panel setup page appears BACK LIGHT Brightness 70 Saver brightness 120 Timeout ere minutes PAGE TIMEOUTS ___ Access appears Home minulonty if the relevant Pop up 0 seco entry has been Data mer 0 made in the text Access 0 minu Cictionary SAVE CANCEL Chapter 4 HA261376 Page 4 44 Issue 8 Jly 04 VISUAL SUPERVISOR HAN DBO 4 5 5 2 DISPLAY BRIGHTNESS SETTINGS Note The brightness adjustment screen saver described below applies only to 1 4VGA units SVGA instru ments are of fixed brightness To prolong backlight life it is recommended that the normal brightness be set to 70 or lower and that the screen saver be used if the instrument is on but not continuously manned Pressing either the Brightness or Saver Brightness fields brings up a pick list of alternative percentage values staged at 10 intervals Panel Setup Choose the required value s then Press Return pos The pick list disappears 90 minutes 80 705 minutes To save the selection press SAVE 605 seconds 4 minutes el CANCEL 4 5 5 3 TIME OUTS Pressing any of the other fields brings up a numeric keyboard from which new values for the various time outs can be
174. MEOUTS 317 PANEL ITEM_TITLE 32 Home 318 PANEL ITEM_TITLE 32 Pop up 319 PANEL ITEM_TITLE 32 Data Entry 320 PANEL ITEM_UNITS 9 minutes 321 PANEL ITEM_UNITS 9 seconds 322 PANEL ITEM 16 100 323 PANEL ITEM 16 90 Chapter 5 HA261376 8 Issue 8 Jly 04 VISUAL SUPERVISOR HAN DBO 5 2 4 THE DICTIONARY Cont No Context Class Max Text 324 PANEL ITEM 16 80 325 PANEL ITEM 16 70 326 PANEL ITEM 16 60 327 PANEL ITEM 16 50 328 PANEL ITEM 16 40 329 PANEL ITEM 16 30 330 PANEL ITEM 16 20 331 PANEL ITEM_TITLE 20 This item allows an access level timeout to be entered Section 4 5 5 3 If a non zero value is entered then the Access level will return to Locked whenever the time between screen presses is greater than the timeout period 339 PANEL ITEM_UNITS 9 days 340 FILEMGR BUTTON_TEXT 12 COPY ALL 341 FILEMGR PAGE_TITLE 20 Copy Files 342 FILEMGR BUTTON_TEXT 16 DEL ALL 343 FILEMGR PAGE_TITLE 20 Confirm Delete All 344 FILEMGR ITEM_FILE 16 Files 360 ACCESS PAGE_TITLE 20 Security Access 361 ACCESS LEGEND 11 ACCESS 362 ACCESS INTRO 64 Enter required level and password then CHANGE 363 ACCESS ITEM_TITLE 18 Current Level 364 ACCESS ITEM_TITLE 18 New Level 365 ACCESS ITEM_TITLE 18 Password 366 ACCESS BUTTON_TEXT 12 CHANGE 367 ACCESS BUTTON_TEXT 12 PASSWDS 368 ACCESS PAGE_TITLE 20 Passwords 369 ACCESS PAGE_TITLE 28 Confirm Password 370 ACCESS INTRO 64 Please re enter top level p
175. OAD PROGRAM 496 SPP PARA 24 Current Schedule 497 SPP DIALOG_TITLE 28 UNSAVED EDITS 498 SPP DIALOG_TEXT 80 This operation will result in the loss of edits which have not yet been saved HA261376 Chapter 5 Issue 8 Jly 04 Page 5 11 VISUAL SUPERVISOR HAN DBO OK 5 2 4 THE DICTIONARY Cont No Context Class Max Text 499 SPP DIALOG_TITLE 28 RAMP TYPE CHANGE 500 SPP DIALOG_TEXT 80 This will require other ramp types in this segment to be changed 501 SPP BUTTON_TEXT 12 NEW 502 SPP PAGE_TITLE 20 New Program 503 SPP PAGE_TITLE 20 Load Program 504 SPP PAGE_TITLE 20 Properties 505 SPP SPP_HOLDBACK 8 Holdback 506 SPP ITEM_TITLE 16 Mode 507 SPP ITEM_TITLE 16 Value 508 SPP SPP_HOLDBACK 8 NONE 509 SPP SPP_HOLDBACK 8 LOW 510 SPP SPP_HOLDBACK 8 HIGH 511 SPP SPP_HOLDBACK 8 HIGH amp LOW 512 SPP ITEM_TITLE 16 Duration 513 SPP BUTTON_TEXT 12 INS SEG 514 SPP BUTTON_TEXT 12 DEL SEG 515 SPP PAGE_TITLE 20 New Segment 516 SPP PAGE_TITLE 20 Confirm Delete 517 SPP ITEM 16 Continuous 518 SPP MESSAGE 128 Building Display please wait 519 SPP ITEM_TITLE 16 Type 520 SPP SPP_CELL 8 Dwell 521 SPP SPP_CELL 18 Step 522 SPP SPP_CELL 18 Ramp 523 SPP SPP_CELL 18 Ramp 524 SPP SPP_CELL 18 Expressn 525 SPP SPP_CELL 18 Servo SP 526 SPP SPP_CELL 18 Servo PV 528 SPP SPP_CELL 18 Dwell 529 SPP SPP_CELL 18 Step 532 SPP SPP_CELL 18 Expressn 536 SPP ITEM_TITLE 20 At End 537 SPP SPP_AT_END 24 Indefinite Dwell
176. OF DATA 4 15 4 2 Ve LOG NAT ON rt Ra rates 4 15 4 2 1 1 LOG CONFIGURATION 4 16 4 3 MANAGING AN 4 18 4 3 1 Application summary page 4 19 4 3 2 Application manager page 4 19 4 3 3 Stopping an application 2 101 4 een 4 20 4 3 4 Saving application data 1 4 21 Contents Page 5 VISUAL SUPERVISOR HAN DBO LIST OF CONTENTS Cont Section Page 4 3 5 Unloading an application mecs 4 21 4 3 6 Loading or loading and running an 4 22 4 3 6 1 APPLICATION SELECTION 0 0904 0 7 7 7 4 22 4 3 6 2 APPLICATION 1020 40 60 4 22 4 3 7 Deleting an application 1 11 eem 4 22 4 3 8 Displaying application diagnostics eee 4 23 4 3 9 Function block manager ie eerta ere erre 4 23 4 3 9 1 ALPHA NUMERIC BLOCK DISPLAY 4 26 4 3 9 2 FUNCTION BLOCK 1 5 4 27 4 4 CONTRO LUN G ACC ESSE OR FERRO EU PER E
177. OGRAMMER LOGGING Press menu key RESET Security Access Enter required level and password then CHANGE Current Level ENGINEER New Level ENGINEERS Password KW CHANGE PASSWDS RESET Passwords OPERATOR 909988 COMMISSION ENGINEER 999098 OK USER CANCEL RESET ilo p al sidai figi hij i binim S qu uX A C 4 4 28 261376 Issue 8 Jly 04 VISUAL SUPERVISOR HAN DBO OK 4 4 2 EDITING PASSWORDS Cont RESET 5 Key in the new password 6 Press the Return key 2 411 RESET Passwords OPERATOR COMMISSION 99999898 ENGINEER Weg The Passwords page reappears 7 Press OK OK USER CANCEL For Commissioning Engineer and Operator passwords the Security Access page reappears with either COMMIS SION or OPERATOR displayed against both Current Level and New Level depending upon the ac
178. ORTED 1217 BATCH BATCH_STATE 12 FAILED 1220 BATCH LEGEND 11 BATCHES 1221 BATCH PAGE_TITLE 20 Load Batch 1222 BATCH ITEM_TITLE 16 File Name 1223 BATCH ITEM_TITLE 16 Recipe Name 1224 BATCH ITEM_TITLE 16 Id 1225 BATCH ITEM_TITLE 16 State 1226 BATCH ITEM_TITLE 16 Started At 1227 BATCH ITEM_TITLE 16 Phase 1228 BATCH ITEM_TITLE 16 Batch Id 1229 BATCH ITEM_TITLE 16 Ended At 1230 BATCH BUTTON_TEXT 12 LOAD 1231 BATCH BUTTON_TEXT 12 START 1232 BATCH BUTTON_TEXT 12 HOLD 1233 BATCH BUTTON_TEXT 12 RESTART 1234 BATCH BUTTON_TEXT 12 ABORT 1235 BATCH BUTTON_TEXT 12 RESET 1236 BATCH BUTTON_TEXT 12 NOTE 1237 BATCH BUTTON_TEXT 12 SAVE AS 1238 BATCH BUTTON_TEXT 12 CREATE 1240 BATCH LEGEND 11 STATUS 1241 BATCH PAGE_TITLE 20 Batch Status 1245 BATCH PAGE_TITLE 20 Batch Start 1250 BATCH DIALOG_TITLE 28 BATCH ERROR 1251 BATCH MESSAGE 128 Batch File not found 1252 BATCH MESSAGE 128 Batch File limits exceeded 1253 BATCH MESSAGE 128 Invalid block reference s 1254 BATCH MESSAGE 128 Incorrect batch state 1255 BATCH MESSAGE 128 Unrecognised file format 1256 BATCH MESSAGE 128 File write error 1257 BATCH MESSAGE 128 Bad block 1258 BATCH MESSAGE 128 Invalid dictionary reference 1259 BATCH MESSAGE 128 Incorrect password 1260 BATCH MESSAGE 128 Shared block reference s 1270 BATCH DIALOG_TITLE 28 Batch Start Confirm 1271 BATCH DIALOG_TEXT 80 Please confirm starting of batch HA261376 Chapter 5 Issue 8 Jly 04 5 21 V
179. OTE In the following description of the Pop up menu and indeed of all the screen displays throughout this manual it is important to note that almost everything is open to customisation On any particular instrument the legends on the buttons can be different from those shown here indeed the buttons need not exist at all and in fact the whole architecture of the interface can differ Throughout this manual what is called the Standard Interface is described This is generated by the manufac turer before any customisation by the user This is not the same as the Minimum Interface which is generated by the minimum configuration necessary for the instrument to function The Minimum Interface Pop up menu consists of three panes ACCESS SYSTEM and ALARMS With the display Locked that is before a password is entered and access gained only ACCESS and SYSTEM are active However most users will operate the Standard Interface This features five more panes PROGRAMMER LOG GING OVERVIEW RECIPE and HOME USER SCREENS In this case with the display locked ACCESS SYS TEM OVERVIEW and HOME USER SCREENS will be active Other i e non active keys are distinguishable by having their text in white ACCESS SYSTEM mz Figure 2 3 The Standard Pop up menu display locked From this menu without a password menu systems can be explored and information displayed The SYSTEM OVERVIEW a
180. PANEL The Comms Setup page appears For each port CFG SLV MST there is a column of parameters Hardware Protocol Mode No If necessary the vertical slidebar can be used to display more parameters hidden further down the page The full list is Hardware Standard for example RS422 EIA422 Protocol for example Modbus Slave Node Number decimal Baud rate Parity Data bits number of Stop bits number of Timeout Modbus Master only in milliseconds SAVE CANCEL TalkThru Modbus Slave only see 4 5 1 4 Hardware Protocol Parity Data Bits ETHERNET HA261376 Chapter 4 Issue 8 Jly 04 Page 4 35 VISUAL SUPERVISOR HAN DBO 4 5 1 EDITING COMMUNICATIONS PARAMETERS Cont Cells with a yellow background are edited by pressing them Others with a white background are fixed not editable A blank cell shows that the parameter does not apply for the protocol selected for that port 1 4VGA instruments with up to three ports always display the SAVE and CANCEL keys at the bottom 1 4VGA instruments with more than three ports feature a horizontal slide bar at the bottom which can be used to reveal col umns hidden to the right for other ports In such a case the Option key is used to display the SAVE and CANCEL keys temporarily in place of the slidebar SVGA instruments always display the SAVE and CANCEL keys 4 5 1 1 SOFTWARE PARAMETER E
181. PTER 7 PROFIBUS 7 1 INTRODUCTION PROFIBUS DP is an industry standard open network used to interconnect instrumentation and control devices in for example a manufacturing or processing plant It is often used to allow a central Programmable Logic Controller PLC or PC based control system to use external slave devices for input output I O or specialised functions thus reducing the processing load on the controlling unit so that its other functions can be carried out more efficiently us ing less memory This implementation of the PROFIBUS network uses a high speed version of the EIA485 standard to permit transmis sion rates of up to 12 MBaud between the host and up to 16 PROFIBUS Stations otherwise called nodes either within a single section of network or with EIA485 repeaters each counted as a node in several separate sections of network Acceptable node addresses are 1 to 125 It is not within the scope of this document to describe the PROFIBUS standard in detail more detailed information can be found by reference to the profibus web site http www profibus com 7 2 DEVOLVED CONTROL MODULES 7 2 1 Introduction A Devolved Control Module DCM is configured for each item to be accessed via the link In addition an Instru ment Block is available for each model of I O unit produced by the Visual supervisor manufacturer This contains various instrument and Profibus parameters along with instrument and I O failure
182. Pagel 12 Issue 8 Jul 04 VISUAL SUPERVISOR HAN DBO OK 1 3 1 7 ETHERNET 100 10 Base T CONNECTOR If the Ethernet option has been specified a single RJ45 connector replaces the ALIN connector pair The pinout is as shown in figure 1 3 1 7 below TxD TxD RxD Not used Not used RxD Not used RJ 45 plug View on underside co Oo O1 Not used Plug shroud to cable screen Figure 1 3 1 7 Ethernet ELIN connector pinout 1 3 1 8 USB CONNECTOR A single USB connector may be fitted at the rear panel This may be used only for the connection of USB Bulk stor age devices memory sticks The connector pinout is given below in figure 1 3 1 8 Note Compliance with EMC directives cannot be guaranteed if the Bulk Storage Device is connected using an extension cable IPin Definition V View on non solder end of fixed socket Figure 1 3 1 8 USB connector pinout 2 61376 Chapter 1 Issue 8 Jul 04 Pagel 13 VISUAL SUPERVISOR HAN DBO 1 3 2 Signal wiring visual supervisor to 2500 I O units Visual supervisor rear pane EE 25001 0 EEE Base unit RJ45 connector to master port 2500 0 WF aula Set up each base
183. RVISOR HAN DBO 1 3 3 1 VISUAL SUPERVISOR TO CONFIGURATION PC Cont 9 way D type Visual supervisor Receive WT Centre Decem Inner Terminal transmit Outer 0 Volts Outer 0 Volts Qo lt 3 5 mm Jack to 9 D type Visual supervisor Centre Terminal receive nner me e 2 Tx Jack plug wiring for transfer with host 3 3 computer dumb terminal 4 NC 5 NET 6 NC 0 Volt 227 7 ne 8 N 9 TC 10 to 25 NC eje o wo 3 5 mm Jack to 25 way D type Fig 1 3 3 1b 3 5mm jack plug to D type socket Visual Supervisor to PC As an alternative to the jack socket connection at the front of the instrument a nine way D type plug can be fitted as shown in figure 1 3 1a b above The pinout for the mating socket is shown in figure 1 3 3 1c below 9 way D type solder side of socket Figure 1 3 3 1c Pin outfor rear panel configuration connector 2 61376 Chapter 1 Issue 8 Jul 04 1 15 VISUAL SUPERVISOR HAN DBO 1 3 3 2 2500 TO PC RUNNING iTOOLS The cable schedule for these runs constitutes section 1 3 5 ROO lt 6 5 4 Tx 4 3 0 3 2 NC 1 NC Fig 1 3 3 2b RJ11 to 25 pin D type socket 2500 to PC 1 3 3 3 250
184. SAVE button HA261376 Chapter 4 Issue 8 Jly 04 Page 4 9 VISUAL SUPERVISOR HAN DBO 4 1 6 1 CHOOSING THE SETPOINT 4 1 4 1 In the Program Editor choose the analog input for which the Hold Back properties are to be edited The cell highlights and a dialogue box appears see section 4 1 6 2 6 2 CHANGING HOLD BACK MODE Press the Mode field yellowed A pick list appears with None Low High High amp Low shown as modes None means no limits which means no Hold Back Low specifies a limit below the current setpoint value If the PV falls below this limit then the program will compensate by holding the setpoint steady until the PV has recovered to exceed the limit High specifies a limit above the current setpoint value If the PV exceeds this limit then the program will compensate by holding the setpoint steady until the PV has fallen below the limit High amp Low sets both limits Choose the required limit e g LOW It highlights Press the Return key The picklist disappears Press DONE The dialogue box disappears 6 3 CHANGING HOLDBACK VALUES Press the Value field yellowed A numeric keyboard appears showing the current value in a black confir mation bar at the top Key in the required value and press the Return key The keyboard disappears Press DONE The dialogue box disappears SAMPLE Holdback LOW HIGH
185. SPP ITEM_TITLE 16 Setpoint 414 SPP ITEM_TITLE 16 Ramp at 415 SPP ITEM_TITLE 16 to 416 SPP BUTTON_TEXT 12 DONE 417 SPP PAGE_TITLE 18 Current Program 418 SPP PARA 20 Program 419 SPP ITEM_TITLE 16 Name 420 SPP ITEM_TITLE 16 Status 421 SPP ITEM_TITLE 16 Duration 422 SPP ITEM_TITLE 16 Completion 423 SPP ITEM_TITLE 16 Iteration 424 SPP Special 1 425 SPP PARA 24 Segment 426 SPP ITEM_TITLE 16 Name 427 SPP ITEM_TITLE 16 Time Remaining 428 SPP BUTTON_TEXT 12 RUN 429 SPP BUTTON_TEXT 12 HOLD 430 SPP BUTTON_TEXT 12 ABORT 431 SPP PAGE_TITLE 20 Load Save Program 432 SPP ITEM_TITLE 16 File Name 433 SPP BUTTON_TEXT 12 LOAD 434 SPP BUTTON_TEXT 12 SAVE 435 SPP BUTTON_TEXT 12 SAVE AS 436 SPP BUTTON_TEXT 12 DELETE 437 SPP PAGE_TITLE 20 Schedule Program 438 SPP ITEM_TITLE 17 File Name 439 SPP ITEM_TITLE 17 Start Date 440 SPP ITEM_TITLE 17 Start Time 441 SPP ITEM_TITLE 16 Iterations 442 SPP BUTTON_TEXT 12 CLEAR 443 SPP BUTTON_TEXT 12 ACCEPT 444 SPP SPP_CELL 18 SP 445 SPP SPP_CELL_ABBR 8 D Chapter 5 HA261376 Page 5 10 Issue 8 Jly 04 VISUAL SUPERVISOR HAN DBO 5 2 4 THE DICTIONARY Cont No Context Class Max Text 446 SPP SPP_CELL_ABBR 8 5 447 SPP Special 2 to 448 SPP SPP_CELL_ABBR 8 R 449 SPP Special 2 R 450 SPP SPP_CELL_ABBR 8 Servo SP 451 SPP SPP_CELL_ABBR 8 Servo PV 452 SPP PAGE_TITLE 20 Save As 453 SPP ITEM_TITLE 16 File Name 455 SPP DIALOG_TEXT 80 Overwri
186. See docu mentation for password information 1023 ACCESS PAGE_TITLE 20 Multi User select 1024 ACCESS DIALOG_TEXT 80 Changing to multi_user mode will be irreversible Select OK to continue 1025 ACCESS DIALOGUE_TITLE 28 Confirm Multi User mode 1026 ACCESS COL_TITLE 10 Identity 1027 ACCESS COL_TITLE 10 Reference 1028 ACCESS COL_TITLE 10 Name 1029 ACCESS COL_TITLE 10 Access 1030 ACCESS ITEM_TITLE 18 Identity 1031 ACCESS ITEM_TITLE 18 Password 1032 ACCESS ITEM_TITLE 18 Confirm 1033 ACCESS BUTTON_TEXT 12 NEW 1034 ACCESS BUTTON_TEXT 12 DELETE 1035 ACCESS DIALOGUE_TITLE 28 Delete User 1036 ACCESS DIALOGUE_TITLE 28 New User 1037 ACCESS MESSAGE 128 Sorting entries please wait 1038 ACCESS BUTTON_TEXT 12 DISABLE 1039 ACCESS MESSAGE 128 Your password has expired You must change it now 1060 CLONE ITEM_TITLE 22 Forms 1061 UPGRADE DIALOG_TITLE 24 lt Assemble autoexec o gt 1062 UPGRADE MESSAGE 128 Error encountered when asembling autoexec o Chapter 5 Page 5 18 HA261376 Issue 8 Jly 04 VISUAL SUPERVISOR HAN DBO 5 2 4 THE DICTIONARY Cont No Context Class Max Text 1063 CLONE ITEM_TITLE 16 Security Access 1064 CLONE ITEM_TITLE 16 Net Audit setup 1065 CLONE ITEM_TITLE 16 Signature setup 1066 CLONE ITEM_TITLE 16 Include Source Files 1067 CLONE ITEM_TITLE 22 Category 1068 CLONE DIALOG_TITLE 28 WARNING 1069 CLONE DIALOG_TEXT 80 No files have been transferred 1071 FB_MGR BUTTON
187. U ALM_HIST and so on These are listed later lt Access gt gives the security level required for entry to this agent and is a digit from 1 to 4 The default is 1 WrAccess gives the security level for Write access within this agent The precise interpretation of this is agent specific The default is Access Pane is the pane in which the agent is to operate specified as a digit from 1 to 4 as follows 1 Status Pane 2 Pane 3 Popup Pane 4 Dialogue Pane If this parameter is omitted then the Main Pane is selected by default Only the Dialog agent operates in the Dialogue pane Continued Chapter 5 HA261376 Page 44 Issue 8 Jly 04 VISUAL SUPERVISOR HAN DBO OK 5 7 3 1 PANEL AGENT DECLARATION Cont Example A9010 ALM_HIST 2 2 Any further parameters are agent specific in meaning They must be comma separated and each must be one of the following types 1 Positive decimal number from 0 to 2 1 2 number preceded by X with up to 8 digits 3 String within double quotes 4 Dictionary string using the format 5 123 where S for example is the dictionary identifier and 123 for exam ple is the index number See the User Screen Editor Handbook for more information For example for a Menu agent the first two specific arguments are the title and legend respectively which may be specified as either strings or dictionary strings Most other panel agents supply their own title and legend
188. UAL SUPERVISOR HAN DBO OK This page is deliberately left blank Chapter 9 HA261376 9 2 Issue 8 Jul 04 VISUAL SUPERVISOR HAN DBO OK CHAPTER 10 PREVENTIVE MAIN TENANCE In order to maintain the instrument at specified performance it is recommended that the internal fan be replaced every two years replacement procedures are included below for both the large frame and small frame products The procedure also shows how to replace the battery though as this is a non rechargeable battery its replacement period depends on the cumulative length of time over which the instrument is left without supply power The battery maintains the real time clock and SRAM data e g hot start database A flag BadBatt can be set in the T800 block This flag will result in an instrument alarm should the battery volt age falls below three Volts It is recommended that the battery be replaced as soon as possible after the appearance of this warning as otherwise retention of SRAM data for more than 24 hours under power off conditions cannot be guaranteed A supercap ensures that data is retained for at least 24 hours no matter what the state of the battery A procedure is also given for calibrating the touch screen This procedure ensures that the instrument respomds to the exact point that has been touched by the user 10 1 LARGE FRAME FAN BATTERY REPLACEMENT Warning As hazardous voltages are generated by the po
189. Y OTHER TYPE 3 7 3 2 HOLDING AND ABO RTIN A PROGRAM 3 8 3 2 1 Holding a pfogram u tte ect 3 8 3 2 2 Aborting a progra M Jd me eet eee 3 8 3 3 1 A PROGRA M iiio eti nr Er ER Oe reed 3 9 3 3 1 The monitor ei o er ERR eR REG Pb RR ep a Menus 3 9 3 3 2 The preplot facility cit pup co t et et t peter 3 10 STANDARD DISPLAY MO DE hor hee 3 10 REVIEW MO DE EM 3 10 261376 Contents Issue 8 Jly 04 Page 3 VISUAL SUPERVISOR HAN DBO LIST OF CONTENTS Cont Section 3 4 LOGGING 3 4 1 Types of files SEQUENCE 3 4 3 Floppy 3 4 4 Training sequence MONITOR etr 3 4 5 The Manage facility ARCHIVE 3 4 6 Data integrity 3 5 ALARMS MESSAGE RESPONSE TIME REPRESEN TATION 3 5 1 Alarm history page TW LIN E DISPLAY FILTER KEY oreet ARCH M Eireren ans 3 5 2 Alarm Message ALARMS eet MESSAGES eene 3 5 3 Adding notes to alarm 0 3 5 4 Ala
190. YSTEM from the pop up menu Select APPLN then APP SUM The Application Summary page appears showing 1 the name of the loaded application 2 its state RUNNING IDLE or STOPPED 3 data about memory usage 4 3 2 Application manager page ACCESS SYSTEM UU Press SYSTEM ALARMS OVERVIEW PROGRAMMER LOGGING CLONING Press APP SUM APPLN Press APPLN Application t menu key Appl n Summary 1 Application ise Machine State RUNNING Memory Usage Control DB 63 kB 34 SFC DB 38 kB SFC ST 56 0 0 Programmer 64 0 4 Modbus master 40 kB 1 8 transient 40 kB 0 7 0 7 Note If the Terminal Configurator is being used connected to a PC plugged into the CFG port on the front panel the Application Manager page will not be accessible Conversely if the Application Manager page is being used the Terminal Configurator will not be usable Press the Menu key and select SYSTEM from the pop up menu Select APPLN from the SYSTEM window to display the Application window Select APP MGR The Appl n Manager page appears displaying the name of the cur rent application and its state i e RUNNING IDLE or STOPPED SYSTEM ACCESS OVERVIEW PROGRAMMER Press SYSTEM ALARMS LOGGING SETUP CLONING
191. _SP Track Alarms NewTgtSP NewRate Sync Complete Active NotActiv Holdback Hold HB_Mode degC degC degC degC degC degC degC degC degC o o Ot n 2 onn Ob o Use Up arrow to return to FB Manager page If the list is too long to fit the page a vertical slider and pair of arrow keys appear at the right hand edge of the screen Figure 4 3 9b Function Block Manager Pages Chapter 4 Page 4 24 HA261376 Issue 8 Jly 04 VISUAL SUPERVISOR HAN DBO FUNCTION BLOCK MANAGER Cont With the data base stopped the options bar at the bottom of the display contains the keys CREATE SAVE and NETWORK Note For small frame units the option key toggles the option bar and the scroll bar at the bottom of the screen T800 lin dext 2500 5 mod5 01 ise diag edb diag ramp5 1 mod5 02 ddr diag edbtable ramp5 2 mod5 03 pnl diag alindiag loop5 1 mod5 04 alh diag SppCtr1 1 5 2 mod5 05 amc_diag SppDig areal mod5 06 db_diag 2404 4 moduls 5 2500 6 CREATE SAVE NETWORK Block Create Network Set Up Category HON T800_07 Block type ANIN T800 08 T800_06 CANCEL T800 05 Block name Figure 4 3 9c Create Save and N etwork keys CREATE This key allows a new block to be created Once the block category
192. _TEXT 12 DELETE 820 CLONE ITEM_TITLE 22 Exporting 821 CLONE ITEM_TITLE 22 Importing 822 CLONE MESSAGE 128 Aborting 823 CLONE DIALOG_TEXT 80 Storage device not present Insert then select OK to continue 824 CLONE DIALOG_TEXT 80 This file already exists Do you wish to overwrite it 825 CLONE DIALOG_TEXT 80 Destination device is full 826 CLONE DIALOG_TEXT 80 Error encountered when copying file 827 CLONE DIALOG_TEXT 80 Destination file exists but source file does not Re move it 828 CLONE DIALOG_TEXT 80 No RUN file found 829 CLONE DIALOG_TEXT 80 Multiple RUN files found HA261376 Chapter 5 Issue 8 Jly 04 Page 5 15 VISUAL SUPERVISOR HAN DBO 5 2 4 THE DICTIONARY Cont No Context Class Max Text 830 UPGRADE PAGE_TITLE 20 Firmware Upgrade 831 UPGRADE LEGEND 11 UPGRADE 832 UPGRADE INTRO 64 Upgrade executable and or copyright data 833 UPGRADE ITEM_TITLE 16 Copying 834 UPGRADE MESSAGE 128 WARNING DO NOT POWER DOWN WHILE FILE COPY IS IN PROGRESS 835 UPGRADE MESSAGE 128 Now remove storage device then power cycle to acti vate new firmware 836 UPGRADE DIALOG_ITEM_TITLE 24 Insufficient memory 837 UPGRADE DIALOG_ITEM_TITLE 24 bytes required 838 UPGRADE DIALOG_ITEM_TITLE 24 bytes available 839 CLONE DIALOG_TEXT 80 Storage device corrupted Replace then select OK to continue 840 AGP PAGE_TITLE 20 Overview 841 AGP LEGEND 11 OVERVIEW 842 AGP BUTTON_TEXT 12 AUTO 843
193. able and the one required is specified by the structure of the name The name is of the form lt FB instance gt lt field gt lt subfield gt with the whole string enclosed in square brackets this is mandatory e g pid1 sp or pid2 SelMode SelAuto Chapter 5 HA261376 5 66 Issue 8 Jly 04 VISUAL SUPERVISOR HAN DBO 5 15 4 LIN DATABASE VARIABLES Cont SYSTEM VARIABLES The following system variables identified by a leading underscore are available _ACC_I _ACC_S _ALM_ACT _ALM_NAK _ALM_LVL _ALM_URG _APP_NAME _DATE _TIME _TITLE _USER_ID _USER_NAME _USER_REF Current access level integer Current access level string Number of active alarms integer Number of unacknowledged alarms integer Overall alarm level bit encoded Active 2 Unacknowledged Most urgent unacknowledged alarm string Name of currently loaded application if any string Current date in appropriately internationalised format string Current time string Title of currently active page in GUI main pane string ID of currently logged on user string Name of currently logged on user string Reference number of the user currently logged on integer ENUMERATIONS These apply to boolean integer and enumerated variables They may be used for matching but cannot currently be used in connection with data input Enumerations take the form of a comma separated list of literal
194. age appears with the recipe set ID and name of any currently loaded recipe file or if 22222292 none lines of question marks File name To select a new set or recipe file touch the ID or Filename area and select the required item from the picklist which then appears Alternatively the various available selections can be scrolled through using the left right arrow keys at the bottom of the display LOAD SAVE AS DELETE CREATE LOADING THE RECIPE Once the required file has been selected operation of the load button will call the recipe menu figure 3 7 1b The recipe can now be loaded by operation of the DOWNLOAD key If however it is necessary to select a particular recipe line or if it is necessary to select one recipe from a number in the file the STATUS button should be operated to display the Recipe Status page Note The contents of the status page is context dependent so it is unlikely that it will contain exactly the same fields as shown in the figures below Chapter 3 HA261376 Page 3 34 Issue 8 Jul 04 VISUAL SUPERVISOR HAN DBO OK 3 7 DOWNLOADING RECIPES Cont Recipe Status SELECTING A RECIPE LINE If more than one line is present in a recipe set it is possible Id SET 1 to select which is to be the current line to which the recipe File name RECIPES is to be down loaded With the Recipe Status page dis Line ME played figure 3 7 1d
195. ages recognise different types of block and handle them appropriately By con trast the Modbus registers and bits are simply lists of data points In general there is no predefined structuring of these points into blocks or loops etc and most implementations define the allocation of registers differently Any gateway involves the mapping of data from the instrument s database to Modbus registers and digitals The gate way has two main purposes 1 allow a Modbus master to read from and to write to fields within standard blocks in the LIN system The slave is passive and can transfer data with the master only 2 To allow the master to translate data into a LIN format The mapping between registers and blocks is bidirectional it is up to the master to manage how it interacts with a particular register or point Gaps can be left in the Modbus data areas for future expansion and these gaps can be written to and read from if required allowing a system of letterboxes to be set up that can be exploited by some systems Data in the gaps does not interact with the standard Visual Supervisor database Note If more than one table is used it is not permissible for a Modbus master to request data in a single message that crosses table boundaries The table size must be extended to cover all data or the master must be configured not to request data from more than one table in a single request Figure 6 1 2 shows a possible mappi
196. all ADMIN accounts becoming unusable This requires a maintenance contract with the manufacturer Master Access Setting Master Access to NO means that the editing of Account systems is not possible Edit Own Expired Password If set to Yes the user will be forced to change password when attempting to log in If set to only a user with ADMIN permissions may enable a new pasword for a user whose pasword has expired Recovery Account STATISTICS Operating the STATS key at the bottom of the Security Access screen calls the Statistics screen as depicted in figure 8 1 3g below Statistics Users 5 100 Retired Users 1 200 OK Figure 8 1 3g STATS window This window shows 1 How many users have been configured out of the total available For example Users 6 100 means that six of the 100 possible users have been configured 2 How many users have been retired For example 1 200 means that 1 user has been retired and that 199 further users may be retired Note Retiring the 201st user causes the 1st Retired user by time date to be removed from the list This results in Event 20 Purged user being set This user s data can now be re used HA261376 Chapter 8 Page 8 6 Issue 8 Jul 04 VISUAL SUPERVISOR HAN DBO OK 8 1 3 SECURITY ACCESS PAGE Cont REVISION Touching this key calls the configuration revision page as depicted in figure 8 1 3h below Revision Inform
197. alue Shows the last known process value associated with the loop Working setpoint Shows the last known working setpoint value associated with the loop Working setpoint high low values Indicates the limits of working setpoint range Auto manual select If the permission access allows it the mode can be changed from AUTO to MANUAL using this key and associated pop up menu AUTO text appears on a green fill MANUAL appears on a yellow fill Output percentage Shows the current percentage of full scale of the output Output can be bi polar giving for example a positive value for a heating cycle and a negative value for a cooling cycle Chapter 3 HA261376 Page 3 26 Issue 8 Jul 04 VISUAL SUPERVISOR HAN DBO 3 6 2 FUNCTION BLOCK FACEPLATES Cont PID FACEPLATES Displays a process style faceplate for PID PID_LINK and PID_CONN function blocks Alarms Process value Process value Local Setpoint Working Setpoint Working Setpoint J Setpoint Output Loop name R A Mode select buttons Figure 3 6 2 PID faceplate Process value Shows the last known process value associated with the loop Working setpoint Shows the last known working setpoint value associated with the loop Local setpoint Shows the last known value for the local setpoint value associated with the loop Output percentage Shows the current percentage 0 to 100 of full scale
198. alues are entered using the numeric keyboard that appears on the left of the screen when the field is touched ASCII This human readable file type is for importing into standard commercial spreadsheets Files of this type have extensions of the following type ASC AS1 to AS9 or A01 to A99 Any file name type may be used Binary This is a tamper proof non human readable compressed format which can be interpreted only by the Review software package Files of this type have extensions of the following type to PK9 or 01 to P99 Any file name type may be used Uhh This format available only with Enhanced instruments is another non human readable file Like the Binary format UHH files can be interpreted only by Review software but UHH files are more efficient and allow Review to extract more data than Binary files UHH files can have only Sequence file names If Hourly or Daily is selected then new UHH sequence files are created at hour or day boundaries respectively The file extension is UHH Text This results in a continuous file that starts when logging is initiated and stops when logging is stopped Hourly Logs data in hourly blocks starting on the hour Each log is written to a different file name Daily Logs data in 24 hour blocks starting at midnight Sequence Logs data in sequentially numbered continuous files For text files the operator specifies the whole of the 8 character
199. ame 8 888888 A V 8 888 Ramp hold L Yellow ramp held Process value Out of range holdback Yellow heldback Working setpoint Alarm status Process value Up arrow high alarm Down arrow low alarm Figure 3 6 1b Typical area and group displays Note The vertical sliders push buttons appear only for 1 4VGA unit displays Chapter 3 Page 3 22 HA261376 Issue 8 Jul 04 VISUAL SUPERVISOR HAN DBO OK 3 6 2 Function block faceplates The following section shows typical function block faceplates called to the display by touching the relevant faceplate in the group display figure 3 6 1b above TWO CHANNEL ANALOGUE INPUT AI2 MODULE block name Module pe gt AT2 US B 8888 A w Eee Channel values Low alarm indicators Missing Wrong Unknown Comm Err High alarm indicators Figure 3 6 2a AI2 module faceplate Module type Displays the type of module fitted in this case a two channel analogue input board AI2 Three AI3 and four 14 input modules are also available Node Module Channel Shows the system address node number of the I O unit and the slot number of the module For example if the I O unit has a system address node number of 2 and this is the module in slot 3 then this display will be 2 03 Should this be a single channel display then 1 or 2 would be appended at the end to show which channel this is within the mo
200. amps 6 Tighten the screws of the clamps sufficiently to hold the unit firmly in position IMPORTANT Do not use exces sive force to tighten the screws It could distort the case and render the instrument inoperative 1 2 2 Large frame units pre mid J une 2002 Caution The nuts mentioned in step 3 are essential If they are not fitted the display screen will be damaged 1 Check that the mounting panel is no thicker than 25mm typically for wood or plastic and no thinner than 2mm for steel and that it meets the maximum panel mounting angle figure given in figure 1 2a 2 In the panel cut an aperture 281mm x 281mm If more than one instrument is to be mounted in the panel the recommended minimum spacings are as shown in figure 1 2c 3 Loosely fix the four clamps to their mounting spigots ensuring a nut is located between each screw head and its clamp figure 1 2c Ensure that none of the clamps protrudes outside the instrument bezel Insert the studs with locking nuts provided into the clamps if this has not already been done 4 Insert the unit into the aperture from the front of the panel using the four mounting guides to centre it 5 Rotate the clamps to approximately the positions shown in figure 1 2c and fully tighten the clamp securing screws 6 Secure the instrument to the panel by tightening the studs Once the unit is secure tighten the locking nuts to retain the studs Chapter 1 HA261376 Pagel 4
201. and enter a new password Once this is done the new password will be allocated the expiry period set up in the Properties menu default 90 days 5 Password must include one non alpha character i e it must have at least one character which is not one of A to Z or ato 2 6 The password may not be the same as the User identity 7 Delete key in the non audit pack instrument is replaced by a Retire key When the Retire key is operated with a user selected that user s name is removed after confirmation from the security access page The details are however stored within the instrument to ensure that the same ID password etc cannot be used more than once SECURITY ACCESS DISPLAY PAGE This page is called by touching the ACCESS key from the root menu and entering the ADMIN Identity and Password both ADMIN when despatched from the manufacturer Once logged in as ADMIN operation of the USERS key calls the Security Access Display page shown in figure 81 2a below Note For a more detailed description of how to access the ADMIN login see section 4 4 3 3 5 meis T800 BadBat Security access Attributes Expires Reference ADMIN ADMIN ADMIN 00000003 ADMIN ADMIN2 ADMIN 00000003 COMMISSI COMISSION COMMISSION 00000000 ENGINEER ENGINEER ENGINEER 00000003 OPERATOR OPERATOR OPERATOR 00000000 richard LinManl ENGINEER 00000003
202. and status indications When all blocks have been configured correctly and are resident in the data base along with any relevant Universal Map for Profibus uyp files then the Visual Supervisor will start communicating with the I O unit as soon as it is initialised For third party instruments a file must be created for each DCM The DCMs themselves are fully described in Chapter 15 of the LIN Blocks Reference Manual HA082375U003 but brief details of what is available is given in the list below Notes For this issue of software nodes must be either all Model 2500 modules produced by the Visual Supervi sor manufacturer or all third party items See section 7 3 for file description HA261376 Chapter 7 Issue 8 Jly 04 7 1 VISUAL SUPERVISOR HAN DBO OK 7 2 2 DCMs available The modules available at time of print are 7 2 2 1 LOOP BLOCKS D2X LOOP D2X TUNE D25 LOOP D25 TUNE D25e LOOP D25e TUNE Access PID Control loop in a Series 2000 I O unit Tune PID Loop in a Series 2000 I O unit Access PID Control loop in a 2500 I O unit Tune PID Loop in a 2500 I O unit Access PID Control loop in a 2500 I O unit with 8 PID loops Tune PID Loop in a 2500 I O unit with 8 PID loops 7 2 2 2 RAMP BLOCKS D25 RAMP Ramp remote setpoint in a 2500 I O unit D25e RAMP Ramp remote setpoint in a 2500 I O unit with 8 PID loops 7 2 2 3 MODULE BLOCKS D25 MOD D25
203. ar at the left side of the alarm pane as shown in figure 2 6 above If this indi cator appears there are one or more messages to be acknowledged or reviewed Further details of these messages are to be found in section 3 8 of this manual 2 6 2 Responding to alarms There are four possible responses to an alarm 1 Do nothing 2 Get more information by bringing up the Alarm History page which is a list of past and current alarms and events 3 Acknowledge the alarm by bringing up the Alarm window and pressing a pane 4 Report and then remedy the abnormal condition DO NOTHING Doing nothing is acceptable when the light just shows steady white This indicates that a non serious abnormal condi tion did exist but it has now returned to normal and that it has been acknowledged Doing nothing is also acceptable with a steady red indication that is not the result of its having been manually ac knowledged In this case the alarm will have been triggered by an Auto Ack alarm which does not require active intervention but will give information about a slightly abnormal condition ALARM HISTORY PAGE Figures 2 6 2a and b show the alarm history page for SVGA and 1 4VGA versions of the instrument respectively not drawn to the same scale The major difference is the ACK column which appears only in the SVGA version Alarm History ACTIVE ENGINEER Log On 29 10 00 05 55 03 2500 7 Comms 29 10 00 05 08 51 Database Started 29 10 00 04 08 51 29 1
204. as the time from the end of the command to the first character of the response Minimum 3 5 character periods Normal 12msec 9600 baud Maximum Probably 50msec 9600 baud The cycle time depends on a the slave response time b the transit time on the serial link about 14msec plus 1 15msec per byte at 9600 baud and c the execution time of the master HA261376 Chapter 6 Issue 8 Jly 04 Page 6 3 VISUAL SUPERVISOR HAN DBO 6 1 2 1 REFRESH RATES AND TIMING INFORMATION Cont Slave mode Scan Period The scan period is the time for all the data in the copy areas of all the tables to be updated Scan period depends on the number of parameters mapped onto the Modbus address space and on the number of writes made from the master to blocks that are cached within the slave Writing to local blocks does not affect this figure but the data is updated in only one direction each scan so that if data is written from the copy to the database it is not updated from the database to the copy until the following scan Data is transferred from the Modbus image to the database only if the value has been changed by the master The scan period is calculated from the following formula with a minimum value of 100msec scan period m X nt r x 3 5 d x 3 5 w x 100 msec where m minimum period 100msec nt number of tables number of registers d number of digitals or sets of digitals w number of writes to remote ca
205. assword 371 ACCESS ACCESS_LEVEL 10 LOCKED 372 ACCESS ACCESS_LEVEL 10 OPERATOR 373 ACCESS ACCESS_LEVEL 10 COMMISSION 374 ACCESS ACCESS_LEVEL 10 ENGINEER 375 ACCESS ACCESS_LEVEL 10 ADMIN 380 APPMGR PAGE_TITLE 20 Manager 381 APPMGR LEGEND 11 APP MGR 382 APPMGR ITEM_TITLE 16 File 383 APPMGR ITEM_TITLE 16 State 384 APPMGR BUTTON_TEXT 12 LOAD 385 APPMGR BUTTON_TEXT 12 LD RUN 386 APPMGR BUTTON_TEXT 12 UNLOAD 387 APPMGR BUTTON_TEXT 12 SAVE 388 APPMGR BUTTON_TEXT 12 SAVE AS 389 APPMGR BUTTON_TEXT 12 DELETE 390 APPMGR BUTTON_TEXT 12 STOP 391 APPMGR BUTTON_TEXT 12 START 392 APPMGR DIALOG_TITLE 28 Confirm Delete 393 APPMGR MESSAGE 128 Application management is already in progress else where 394 APPMGR DIALOG_TITLE 28 Saving HA261376 Issue 8 Jly 04 Chapter 5 Page 5 9 VISUAL SUPERVISOR HAN DBO 5 2 4 THE DICTIONARY Cont No Context Class Max Text 396 APPMENU MENU_TITLE 16 Application 397 APPMENU LEGEND 11 APPLN 398 SETMENU MENU_TITLE 16 Setup 399 SETMENU LEGEND 11 SETUP 400 SPP SPP_STATUS 8 RESET 401 SPP SPP_STATUS 8 LOADING 402 SPP SPP_STATUS 8 PRE_RUN 403 SPP SPP_STATUS 8 RUNNING 404 SPP SPP_STATUS 8 HELD 405 SPP SPP_STATUS 8 HELDBACK 406 SPP SPP_STATUS 8 COMPLETE 407 SPP SPP_STATUS 8 IDLE 408 SPP SPP_STATUS 8 POST_RUN 409 SPP SPP_STATUS 8 ERROR 410 SPP SPP_FP_VALUE 8 CLOSED 411 SPP SPP_FP_VALUE 8 OPEN 412 SPP ITEM_TITLE 16 Segment 413
206. ategy page press the time out value to be changed in the new value using the pop up keyboard then press Return The field shows the new value RESET Startup Strategy 00 10 00 Chapter 4 Page 4 40 HA261376 Issue 8 Jly 04 VISUAL SUPERVISOR HAN DBO 4 5 3 Resetting the clock Press SYSTEM key 4 5 3 1 CLOCK SETUP PAGE ACCESS ACCESS SYSTEM ALARMS PROGRAMMER LOGGING HOME 1 Press the Menu key 2 Select SYSTEM from the pop up menu 8 gt SETUP 3 Select SETUP Press SETUP Press CLOCK STARTUP COMMS CLOCK 4 Select CLOCK INTERNAT PANEL The date time setting page appears Date 2002700 Time SET CANCEL Hr 1 Hr 1 4 5 3 2 CHANGING DATE AND TIME To increment or decrement the hours value press the Hr 1 or the Hr 1 key respectively The change takes place im mediately and changes the date if appropriate Notes 1 Operating the SET key enters the time and date displayed on the page These values are not updated in real time but show the values obtaining when the page was called to the screen As it is not possible to SET the date separately from the time it is recommended that the date be
207. ation Revision 0 Operational Changes 0 Revised On 28 11 03 12 41 15 Revised By Fred Reason FACTORY DEFAULTS Figure 8 1 3h Revision page DEPLOY A master access system can deploy its own access system to other Visual Supervisors across its ALIN network This Deployment is in three stages 1 Select the number of nodes initially 0 2 Enter the node numbers to be deployed to 3 Initate the deployment The initial display page appears when the DEPLOY key is first pressed Figure 8 1 3j and shows that the number of nodes is zero Deploy Access Number of slave nodes 0 CONFIG USERS Figure 8 1 3 Initial Deploy configuration page Touching the CONFIG key allows the number of nodes to be deployed to to be entered The display shows one con figuration box each for the number of nodes selected to allow the required node numbers to be entered Initially all these contain 0 although this value cannot be used Figure 8 1 3 k HA261376 Chapter 8 Issue 8 Jul 04 8 7 VISUAL SUPERVISOR HAN DBO 8 1 3 SECURITY ACCESS PAGE Cont Deploy Access Config Number of slave nodes Slave nodes OK CLEAR FILL SORT Figure 8 1 3k Node number configuration Operation of the FILL key at this point will fill the node number configuration boxes with nodes 1 to n where n is the number of nodes selec
208. batch is not unloaded it may be run without re writing this value Value must be modified from its initial value for W dictionary items only after load If the batch is not unloaded it may be run without re writing this value Line 5 Line 5 defines the batch log interface as lt LOGROUP gt lt Filename gt lt Report gt e g LOG BATCHI Id BAT Where BAT LOG is the optional name of a LGROUP block for the batch log BATCH1 Id is an optional LIN database field whose text value will be used as the name of the file The example uses the batch Id as the name of the file is the optional of DR_REPRT block to be used to generate batch reports If batch report is to be generated then 3 reports are required in the UYF file 1 start 2 stop 3 abort The UYF must be the same name as the UYB e g if using SAMPLE UYB then the corre sponding UYF is SAMPLE UYF Line 6 Line 6 defines the recipe interface e g LINE1 Where LINE is the name of BAT LINE block used to parameterise the batch If SAMPLE UYB is used then the corresponding recipe file will be SAMPLE UYR 5 14 2 Batch Phases For each phase of the batch a line is required of the form lt Name gt where Name is the name of the phase HA261376 Chapter 5 Issue 8 Jly 04 5 63 VISUAL SUPERVISOR HAN DBO 5 15 BAR CODE READER FILES An application containing a READER bl
209. ble bits when stopped Touching the field displays the details of all relevant bits 4 4 CONTROLLING ACCESS 5 1 SPP_RAMP ResetSP HL SP LL SP Track Alarms Ramp Dis PV TgtsP Sync Complete Active NotActiv Holdback Hold HB_Mode opp o omm o degc degC degC degC degC degC degc degC degC Block information Use either key to display 2 Cycle screens key only SVGA versions 5 1 SPP_RAMP Update rate ramp5 1 SPP RAMP 1000 ms DELETE Update rate appears only for applicable Block types It is shown here only for example purposes Use either key to display Block information Cycle screens key only 0 SVGA versions 5 1 SPP_RAMP Options lt lt 11 Relays Woo hun Figure 4 3 9 2 Function block details Note for instruments fitted with the Auditor option see also chapter 8 Access control consists of setting up and changing if necessary the passwords for each of the three types of users Operators Commissioning Engineers and Engineers Alternatively for software versions 2 7 onwards a User ID access system can be used as described in section 4 4 3 below Section 2 8 1 above contains details of
210. bled Password Expiry Oto 180 0 password never expires For values greater than 0 the password will expire after the specified number of days have elapsed since the last time the value was edited User Timeout 010720 0 no timeout For values greater than 0 the user will be logged out after the speci fied number of minutes has elapsed since the previous screen activity HA261376 Chapter 4 Issue 8 Jly 04 Page 4 33 VISUAL SUPERVISOR HAN DBO 4 4 3 2 USER ID MANAGEMENT Cont Maintenance Operating the MAINT key at the bottom of the Security Access screen calls the Account Maintenance screen to the display as depicted in figure 4 4 3 2d below If recovery account is set to YES this enables a recovery in the event of all ADMIN accounts becoming unusable This requires a maintenance contract with the manufacturer Account Maintenance Recovery Account YES OK CANCEL Figure 4 4 3 2d Maintenance screen Note See also Section 8 4 1 if the Auditor Option is fitted Statistics Operating the STATS key at the bottom of the Security Access screen calls the Statistics screen showing how many users have been configured out of the total available For example Users 6 100 means that six of the 100 possible users have been configured Note For small frame instruments a second operation of the Option key is necessary to reveal the STATS key Chapter 4 HA261376 Page
211. blocks in the local database The product operates as a Modbus slave allowing a PLC or supervisory system configured as a Modbus master to access data in the LIN database 6 1 1 1 MAIN FEATURES 1 The mapping between the database and the Modbus address space is entirely user configurable for both digitals and registers 2 Digitals may be mapped as single bits 8 bit bytes or 16 bit words 3 Analogue Values map to single 16 bit registers with definable decimal point Floating point numbers as well as Integers 4 32 bit values floating point or long integer may be mapped to a pair of registers 5 Configuration is carried out using the LINtools Modbus configurator running on a PC see the LINtools Prod uct Manual Part No HA082377U999 6 Diagnostic and status registers allow the database to control the Modbus interface 7 gateway supports the Modbus RTU 8 bit transmission mode ASCII 7 bit mode is not supported 6 1 1 2 FUNCTIONAL DESCRIPTION The gateway functions by keeping a copy of relevant parameters in Modbus tables which may be individually configured for either digital or register data This copy is updated from the LIN database by a scanner task running in the gateway The gateway supports 16 separate tables whose size is configurable The Modbus data area does not reduce the space available for the continuous database The default Modbus interface is implemented as a pair of RJ45 sockets on the rear panel of the
212. bsequently be disabled As shipped electronic signatures are disabled The Enable signatures Signature Configuration page figure 8 2 1 appears on the first operation of the SIGN CONFIG key in the Administration menu The only choices are to quit the page by selecting another page using the menu key or Enable electronic signatures Administration NET AUDIT SIGN CONFIG 4 ENABLE button may be used to turn on electronic signatures Once signatures have been turned on and saved they cannot be turned off again ENABLE Figure 8 2 1 Enable Signatures page When Enable is operated a dialogue box appears requiring two separate ADMIN passwords before the Signature Configuration page figure 8 2 2 appears Chapter 8 HA261376 Page 8 10 Issue 8 Jul 04 VISUAL SUPERVISOR HAN DBO OK 8 2 2 Signature Configuration Figure 8 2 2a shows the Signature Configuration page The administrator IDs in Revision Level are initially the IDs of the administartors who enabled the Electronic Signature feature Subsequently the IDs are those of the administra tors who signed authorized the previous Configuration Save Signature configuration Revision 1 28 03 03 13 04 07 ADMIN ADMIN2 Function SeG rity AGGess SAVE Account Properties Account Maintenance User Password Change RETIRE DISABLE ENABLE REINSTATE DEPLOY SAVE CANCEL DEFAULTS
213. c table needs to be configured per Modbus configuration The registers of a diagnostic table are in two distinct sets The first sixteen the internal diagnostic registers at default addresses 0 to 15 The last sixteen the Modbus table status and control registers are at addresses 16 to 31 These two sets of registers are described below 6 1 3 1 INTERNAL DIAGNOSTIC REGISTERS The first set of registers with default addresses 0 to 15 are for internal diagnostic use and are read only to the user They present general information on the operation of the Modbus and their functions are independent of whether the instrument is operating as a master ora slave Table 6 1 3 1 lists these registers and their functions Offset Function 0 Unused 1 Unused 2 Diagnostic register bits currently allocated Bit 5 Slave in listen only mode 3 Query data as transmitted by function code 8 sub code 0 4 Input delimiter as transmitted by function code 8 sub code 3 3 Unused 6 Unused 7 Count of error messages sent by slave 8 Unused 9 Unused 10 Unused 11 Master polling task cycle period in 4 msec ticks 12 Scanner task time to check all tables in 4 msec ticks 13 Scanner task time used last time scheduled in 4 msec ticks 14 Scanner task time used for last delay in 4 msec ticks 15 Unused Table 6 1 3 1 Internal diagnostic registers 0 to 15 6 1 3 2 MODBUS TABLE STATUS AND CONTROL REGISTERS The second set
214. cess level for which you were setting the password For Engineer level passwords only a Confirm Password window appears prompting a repeat of the password entry procedure as follows in steps 8 9 and 10 8 Press the password field still asterisked 9 Key in the new password again and press the Return key The Confirm Password window pops up again 10 Press OK After a short delay the Security Access page appears with ENGINEER displayed at both Current Level and New Level HA261376 Chapter 4 Issue 8 04 Page 4 29 VISUAL SUPERVISOR HAN DBO 4 4 3 User ID system For software versions 2 7 onwards the standard system of access described in section 4 4 2 above can be replaced by a system in which each individual user has a password and ident to allow access to the instrument configuration The access levels Engineer Commission and Operator are retained but with an additional level Admin 4 4 3 1 CHANGING TO THE USER ID SYSTEM Note Changing from the standard access level system to the user id system is not a reversible process i e it is not possible to return to the access level system from the user id system Press the Menu key and select ACCESS from the pop up menu If necessary change the access level to Engineer 2 Press PASSWDS then USERS RESET 3 Confirm twice that the change is to be made iat 4 Login at Admin level by OPERATOR 999908 a touching the Identity field and entering ADMIN must
215. ch recipe line there must be an additional field after each column in the title line and for each variable The title line entry should be an item called Capture and the field for the variable is the tag of the field to be captured This field may be left blank if no capture value is to be specified Figure 5 10 2 2 shows the 2 line file of figure 5 10 2 1 with capture variable on the first two variables UYR 1 7 22 11 00 10 53 30 Richard 730 Setpoint Line 1 Capture Setpoint Line 2 Capture Amarillo Gulf Coast Ekofisk Methane GasConcl Methane 100 11 GasConc2 Methane loop21 pv 90 67241 96 52220 85 90631 Nitrogen GasConcl Nitrogen loop12 pv GasConc2 Nitrogen loop22 pv 3 128400 0 2595000 1 006800 Carbon dioxide GasConcl CrbDiOx GasConc2 CrbDiOx 0 4676001 0 5956001 1 495400 Ethane GasConcl Ethane GasConc2 Ethane 4 527901 1 818600 8 491899 Propane GasConcl Propane GasConc2 Propane 0 8280000 0 4596000 2 301500 Water GasConcl Water GasConc2 Water 0 000000 0 000000 0 000000 Hydrogen Sulphid GasConcl Hsulphid GasConc2 Hsulphid 0 000000 0 000000 0 000000 Hydrogen GasConcl Hydrogen GasConc2 Hydrogen 0 000000 0 000000 0 000000 Carbon Monoxide GasConcl CrbMonOx GasConc2 CrbMonOx 0 000000 0 000000 0 000000 Oxygen GasConcl GasConc2 Oxygen 0 000000 0 000000 0 000000 i Butane GasConcl iButane GasConc2 iButane 0 1037000 0 09770000 0 3846000 Butane GasConcl nButane GasConc2 nButane 0 1563000 0 1007000 0
216. changed first then the time 2 clock re starts when the SET key is pressed This happens after the time has been keyed in and after the Return key has been pressed It is therefore recommended that the keyed in time is at least 20 sec onds ahead of real time so that the SET key can subsequently be operated to start the clock when real time equals the keyed in time 3 For systems configured to have their clocks synchronised by another network node it is not possible to edit the time or date if the master clock is running Date changing From the Clock Setup page touch the date field A numeric keyboard is displayed allowing the correct date to be entered The cursor moves to the next digit after each character has been entered To cancel all the digits the ones at the top of the keyboard display but not the ones in the Clock Setup page in the background or in memory press the C key the digits change to question marks To cancel the whole time change operation and return to the Clock Setup page press the red cross key Once the correct date has been entered operate the Return key To save the entry and re set the date press the SET key HA261376 Chapter 4 Issue 8 Jly 04 Page 4 41 VISUAL SUPERVISOR HAN DBO 4 5 3 2 CHANGING DATE AND TIME Cont TIME CHANGING Before starting please see note 3 on the previous page
217. characters Any item from any of the dictionaries described in section 5 can be included in the report The syntax is dictionary ID entry number where the dictionary ID is as follows Error Text dictionary ID E Event Text dictionary ID V Programmer Text dictionary ID P System dictionary ID S User Text dictionary ID U Thus an entry of 013 would cause item 13 of the User dictionary to be included in the report Chapter 5 Page 5 52 HA261376 Issue 8 Jly 04 VISUAL SUPERVISOR HAN DBO OK 5 9 1 1 UYF FILE ENTRIES Cont Lin database variables Total number of characters Number of decimal places New Line Limit values Limit text System variables These variables consist of the block name the field name and if appropriate the sub field name When included in the UYF file these variables must be enclosed within square brack ets e g pid2 PV and must be followed by a colon then size information giving the number of characters to be displayed This gives the total number of characters including any decimal point to be displayed with leading zeros suppressed Values are right justified unless otherwise specified as described below in Formatting attributes If the total number of characters figure is followed by a full stop and a second number then this second number will be the number of decimal places For example and entry of 6 1 means that the number format is or a
218. ched blocks per scan period Example For a system with a table of 16 registers and a table with 16 digital descriptors but no values connected to cached blocks the scan period is 100 x 2 16 x 3 5 16 x 3 5 0 x 100 312msec Chapter 6 HA261376 Page 6 4 Issue 8 Jly 04 VISUAL SUPERVISOR HAN DBO OK 6 1 2 2 MEMORY USE AND REQUIREMENTS An area of memory is allocated to map the database parameters to the Modbus address space This memory is allo cated to tables each table representing a series of consecutive registers or bits in the Modbus address space The table contains an image of the data in the Modbus address space and a descriptor for each register bit or set of bits mapped onto that address space Current configuration sizes and limits Memory for tables 6000 bytes Maximum number of tables 16 Minimum entries per table 1 Maximum entries per table Digital bits 999 Registers 2000 limited by memory usage Memory requirements for the tables Overhead 18 bytes per table Image data registers 2 bytes per register Image data digitals 1 bit per digital rounded up see below Descriptors registers 6 bytes entry whether connected or not Descriptors digitals 8 bytes entry whether connected or not Digital image data The storage requirement of digital image data is calculated by converting the total number of bits in the table to 8 bit bytes then rounding this number of bytes up to the nea
219. ciated with the ramp Status indicators RUNNING Shows that the associated I O channel is being ramped Filled green when active otherwise unfilled with no text HELD When filled yellow this shows that the ramp demand is held to allow the process to catch up otherwise unfilled with no text HOLDBACK When filled yellow this shows that the holdback value has been exceeded otherwise unfilled with no text Ramp to value Shows the value to which the process variable is to ramp Ramp rate per unit time Shows how quickly the ramping is to take place in the time units defined seconds in this case Time units Shows the time units set for the ramp rate Holdback value The safe band associated with this ramp within which the process value may fall without triggering a holdback HA261376 Chapter 3 Issue 8 Jul 04 Page 3 25 VISUAL SUPERVISOR HAN DBO OK 3 6 2 FUNCTION BLOCK FACEPLATES Cont LOOP FACEPLATES Loop name rocess mum value 1234s lt Working setpoint high value E EB BBB Working 4 Node Loop Setpoint n HBBH BB BBB Working setpoint low value Auto Manual select Proportion of output Green fill Auto currently being applied Yellow fill Manual Bar graph is centre zero Figure 3 6 2d Loop faceplate Node Loop Shows the system address node number of the I O unit and the ramp number Process v
220. d 2 Press ACCESS 1 Press menu key jion The Security Access page appears Security Access Enter required level and password then CHANGE 3 Press the field showing LOCKED on yellow opposite New Level New Level LOCKED 7 Password CHANGE Security Access el and password In the left half of the screen a pick list of the access levels appears LOCKED OPERATOR COMMISSION ENGINEER 4 Select a level Operator for example 2 2 Ah BapBat 4 Security Access The background highlights yellow confirming the choice 5 Press the Return key the green bent arrow Chapter 2 HA261376 2 14 Issue 8 04 VISUAL SUPERVISO HANDBOOK 2 8 1 1 STANDARD ACCESS Cont The pick list disappears revealing the full Security Access page again showing the selected level OPERATOR COMMISSION or ENGI NEER in the New Level field on yellow 6 Press the Password field shown as asterisks pale yellow A qwerty keyboard display appears with a cursor flashing under the first character space in the black confirmation bar at top left 7 Ifthe password contains characters not visible on this display press the up arrow at bottom left to view others available A numeric symbol keyboard appears
221. d bring up the Comms Setup page and press the Option menu HARDWARE button In the Comms Setup display Row 2 will update to show the new configuration J5 J3 uu lt J2 and J3 are shown with links between pins 1 3 and between pins 2 4 44 and 5 are shown open ANM gt J4 J2 Links 2 1 2 1 4 4 3 Links Modbus connectors Keyboard Connector Relay Connector COMMUNICATIONS LINK SETTINGS Master unterminated Master terminated Slave unterminated Slave terminated EIA422 5 wire J2 Open J4 Open J2 Link 1 amp 3 2 amp 4 J4 Open J3 Open 45 Open J3 Link 1 amp 3 2 amp 4 J5 Open EIA485 3 wire J2 Open J4 Link 1 amp 3 2 amp 4 J2 Link 1 amp 3 J4 Link 1 amp 3 2 amp 4 J3 Open J5 Link 1 amp 3 2 amp 4 Figure 1 4 2c Link locations J3 Link 1 amp 3 J5 Link 1 amp 3 2 amp 4 HA261376 Issue 8 Jul 04 Chapter 1 Page 1 23 VISUAL SUPERVISOR HAN DBO 1 5 GETTING FIRST ACCESS Engineers Follow the instructions in Section 2 8 Gaining access Commissioning Engineers and Operators For first time access there is no password for Commissioning Engineer level or Operator level In its place just press the green Return key below the keypad 1 6 SETTING THE CLOCK Setting the clock for the first time is the same a
222. d format Internationalise DD MM YY DD MM YY MM DD YYYY MM DD DD mmm YY mum DD YY B IGE e DD MM YY DD MM YY DD 55 DD HH MM SS TTT DDdHHhMMmSSsTTTms HHH MM SS TTT IGE HA261376 Issue 8 Jly 04 Chapter 4 Page 4 43 VISUAL SUPERVISOR HAN DBO OK 4 5 5 Setting up the panel display The following items can be edited from the Panel Setup page 1 Backlight properties 1 4 VGA units only Display Normal and Saver brightness Saver Time out a value of 0 means no time out Saver brightness is the screen brightness when the screen saver timeout expires 2 Page time out values a value of 0 means no time out Home for any Home pages Pop up for the Pop up menu Data Entry for the pick lists and keypads 3 Time out to return to Access Level Locked a value of 0 means no time out If this is enabled by adding an entry into the text dictionary Section 5 2 4 No 331 then a time out period can be set If the screen is not touched during this period the instrument access level returns to Locked 4 5 5 1 ACCESS TO THE PANEL SETUP PAGE ACCESS SYSTEM ALARMS Press the menu key OVERVIEW PROGRAMMER LOGGING 2 select SYSTEM SSS 3 Select SETUP System SUM
223. d from those shown above which refer to Masters and Slaves as labelled Chapter 1 1 10 HA261376 Issue 8 Jul 04 VISUAL SUPERVISOR HAN DBO OK 1 3 1 2 ALIN ARCNET SOCKETS To facilitate the daisy chaining of instruments these sockets located as shown in figure 1 3 1a b above are wired in parallel with each another Figure 1 3 1 2 below shows the pinouts for these connectors Not used Not used Not used ALIN A ALIN B Not used RJ 45 plug View on underside Not used Not used Plug shroud to cable screen Figure 1 3 1 2 ALIN Pinout BR wo 1 3 1 3 PROFIBUS CONNECTORS RJ45 CONNECTORS To facilitate the daisy chaining of instruments these sockets located as shown in figure 1 3 1a b above are wired in parallel with each other Figure 1 3 1 3a below shows the pinouts for these connectors 485 B EIA485 A Signal common Not used Not used RJ 45 plug View on underside 5V for pull up Not used Not used Plug shroud to cable screen Figure 1 3 1 3a Profibus pinout RJ45 D TYPE CONNECTOR A single 9 way D type socket can be fitted instead of the pair of RJ45 connectors Figure 1 3 1 3b shows the pinout for the mating plug NC NC EIA485B NC oV 5V for pull up NC EIA485A NC 9 way D type solder side of plug 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
224. d line showing one or two User IDs For units without the Auditor option one ID is displayed in parenthesis and this ID is that of the user who was logged on at Event time figure 2 6 2c Alarm History TYPE ACTIVE Restart 30 10 12 Resumed BrownOu Started Loaded Fred Figure 2 6 2 Two line history display 1 4 VGA screen For units with the Auditor option a If the event did not need signing then one ID is displayed in parenthesis and this ID is that of the user who was logged on at Event time figure 2 6 2c b Ifthe event was signed one ID is displayed and this ID is that of the user who signed for the action c Ifthe event was authorised two IDs are displayed the first left most ID is that of the user who signed for the action the second is that of the authoriser d Ifa text reason for the event is given when signing then this max 16 character text string also appears E G Database Loaded 30 10 12 35 New database Fred ADMIN ALARM ACKNOWLEDGEMENT Unacknowledged alarms are made evident by the flashing of the alarm pane and a flashing background in the alarm history page It is recommended that an alarm is acknowledged before any attempt is made to rectify the cause of the alarm Alarms are acknowledged by calling the Alarms menu box either by touching the alarm pane or by touching the menu key then the ALARMS key and operating the ACK key Chapter 2 HA261376
225. date for each Password For each new user the expiry date is 24 hours after the new user details are Saved The user must log on and change the password within 24 hours or the Password will lapse The new password will have the Expiry period set in the Properties menu described below of the Security Access Page SCREEN KEYS SAVE CANCEL NEW PROPERTIES MAINT STATS REVISION These keys are located near the bottom of the screen The SAVE and CANCEL keys operate in the same way de scribed in section 4 4 3 above NEW Operating the NEW key calls the New User pop up menu to the display Identity Once the details have been entered and OK pressed the new user Name 27 appears in Green on the screen Access OPERATOR Note Do not press SAVE until all other parameters e g Password attributes have been configured for this user Once SAVED Confirm Woo only the password can be changed OK CANCEL Configure the users Attributes as described above the press SAVE The user Identity and Name change to Blue and the Password expiry Figure 8 1 3d New User screen date appears as next day If the user Password is to expire at any period other than that set in the PROPERTIES menu described below this should now be set ADMIN should now be logged out of and the new user logged in and a new password entered
226. display will read 5 11 Should this be a single channel display then 1 to 4 or 8 would be appended at the end to show which channel this is within the module e g 5 11 3 for channel 3 Shows whether each input is active filled yellow or not active unfilled Eight character strings describing active and non active states of the inputs One indicator per channel acting as described in section 3 6 1 1 above Error text Missing I O module not detected Wrong The I O module is not of the correct type Unknown The module type is not recognised Comm Err There is a communications problem within the I O unit DIGITAL OUTPUT MODULES As for DI4 above except the module type is DO4 and there are no alarm indicators Digital output modules are available only as four channel units Chapter 3 Page 3 24 HA261376 Issue 8 Jul 04 VISUAL SUPERVISOR HAN DBO 3 6 2 FUNCTION BLOCK FACEPLATES Cont RAMP FACEPLATES Ramp name NNN L alie HH HB value Node Loop Working setpoint H Ramp rate unit time _ RUNNING PA 12 45 23 45 Seconds HELD DI Holdback 1 500 Timeunits Holdback value Node Loop Shows the system address node number of the I O unit and the ramp number Status indicators f Figure 3 6 2c Ramp faceplate Process value Shows the last known process value associated with the ramp Working setpoint Shows the last known working setpoint value asso
227. duced by the Visual Supervisor manufacturer This con tains various instrument and Modbus parameters along with instrument and I O failure and status indications When all blocks have been configured correctly and are resident in the data base along with the system opt file and any relevant Universal Map for Modbus uym files then the Visual Supervisor will start communicating with the I O unit as soon as it is initialised without the need to set up mapping tables as is required by the Gateway version For third party instruments a uym file must be created for each DCM See section 6 2 3 for uym file description The DCMs themselves are fully described in Chapter 15 of the LIN Blocks Reference Manual HA082375U003 but brief details of what is available 15 given in the list below 6 2 2 DCMs available The modules available at time of print are 6 2 2 1 LOOP BLOCKS D2X LOOP Access PID Control loop in a Series 2000 I O unit D2X TUNE Tune PID Loop in a Series 2000 I O unit D25 LOOP Access PID Control loop in a 2500 I O unit D25 TUNE Tune PID Loop in a 2500 I O unit D25e LOOP Access PID Control loop in a 2500 I O unit with 8 PID loops D25e TUNE Tune PID Loop in a 2500 I O unit with 8 PID loops 6 2 2 2 RAMP BLOCKS D25 RAMP Ramp remote setpoint in 2500 unit D25e RAMP Ramp remote setpoint in a 2500 I O unit with 8 PID loops 6 2 2 3 I O MODULE BLOCKS D25 MOD Access single I O Module D25 AD Access two channel
228. dule e g 2 03 2 Channel values Shows the last known process values associated with the input channels being displayed Alarm indicators One high and one low indicator per channel acting as described in Section 3 6 1 above Error text Missing I O module not detected Wrong The I O module is not of the correct type Unknown The module type is not recognised Comm Err There is a communications problem within the I O unit ANALOGUE OUTPUT MODULES As 2 above except the module type is AO2 and there are no alarm indicators Analogue output modules are avail able only as two channel units HA261376 Chapter 3 Issue 8 Jul 04 Page 3 23 VISUAL SUPERVISOR HAN DBO OK 3 6 2 FUNCTION BLOCK FACEPLATES Cont DIGITAL INPUT MODULES DI block name NNN MM 014 Node Module Channe No m OPEN Input status CLOSED yellow activated OPEN indicators CLOSED Missing Wrong Descriptor 5 SS strings SEMINE Error text Figure 3 6 26 014 module faceplate Module type Displays the type of module fitted in this case a four channel digital input unit DI4 Six Node Module Channel Input status Descriptor text Alarm indicators DI6 and eight DI8 input modules are also available Shows the system address node number of the I O unit and the slot number of the module For example if the I O unit has a system address node number of 5 and this is the module in slot 11 then this
229. e tier ecce a 5 1 5 1 5 1 2 Panel navigation and database 5 2 5x2 THE SYSTEM TEXT DICTIONARY iiir 5 2 5 2 1 File 5 5 2 8 222 Editing System texts 5 3 5 2 3 New language 5 5 5 3 5 254 The dictiQnaby aee a o teu Da beue REA crue Smale orem oda 5 3 5 2 5 Panel customisation using the 1 5 26 5 2 6 Alarm event customisation using the dictionary 5 27 5 3 THEsERRO R TEXT DICTION ARY 5 28 5 3 1 Editing error messaqes tec repa 5 29 5 3 2 Creating new language error text 5 29 PROCEDURE Pe 5 29 5 4 THE EVEN T TEXT DICTIONARY i ioi rrr r 5 30 5 4 1 Editing Event mmm 5 34 5 4 2 Creating new language error text me 5 34 PROCEDURE er HD P Ek 5 34 5 43 SEVEN T PRIO RITIES oc o t eerte eere eerte epe eda 5 34 5 5 THE USER TEXT DIGTIO cause 5 35 5 6 THE PRO GRAM M ER TEXT DICTIO 5 35 Sa TOPAN EE NAVIGATION cere rt tere ertet 5 36 5 7 1 The Panel
230. e or pattern comprises a number of items These items must be separated by commas Rules 1 No line is to include more than 255 characters 2 No spaces or tabs may be included between items PATTERN DELIMITER Each line must commence Chapter 5 HA261376 5 64 Issue 8 Jly 04 VISUAL SUPERVISOR HAN DBO OK 5 15 2 Literal text A text item simply causes that piece of text to be matched with the input The match fails unless every character in the string appears in the input at the correct position Certain characters may have been deemed to be wildcards in which case they will match any character in the input but this is specified elsewhere e g in the READER function block Constant literal text is represented by a string in double quotes optionally followed by size and format specifications the details of these are defined later but the general syntax is lt double quoted string size info format Examples ABC123 8C Uses 8 character positions and centre justifies Where a width wider than the specified text is given as in the second example padding uses the space character which may or may not be a wildcard see above Non printable ASCII characters are defined using IEEE1131 ST format in particular the following are supported Representation Character generated L or N Linefeed or newline hex 0A P Form feed hex 0C R Carriage return
231. e IPRP feature is provided to allow OEMs for example to prevent unauthorized copying of application files The feature is available only on enhanced instruments To determine if a feature is enabled view the software options page section 2 1 4 If IPRP is enabled 1 See d Files on the E drive may not be copied from the instrument either to floppy disk USB memory stick or via network ELIN ALIN SLIN FTP operations All files on the E drive may be modified using normal user interface operations New files may be added to the E drive but they may not be copied from the instrument Existing files may be overwritten by new files with the same name across a network Files are scrambled when cloned out of the instrument so clone files can be used only in the source instrument or in another instrument with the same IPRP password see below 4 9 9 1 MODIFYING IPRP SETTINGS The procedure for modifying the IPRP settings is to create a text file to copy it to the E drive and then to power cycle the instrument The text file must be called OEM TXT and consists of a single line containing comma separated items as follows 1 current password new password enable disable Where the items have the following definitions OEM Non variable text string 1 Non variable value Current password The current password As despatched from the factory this is _ _ If the current password is entered
232. e YES include operator notes Block Value Change YES include events recording changes to block field values Message active YES include active messages Message Cleared YES include cleared messages Message Ack ed YES include acknowledged messages Min alarm priority 1 to 15 Specifies minimum alarm priority for inclusion Min event priority 1 to 15 Specifies minimum event priority for inclusion Note Cached alarms is normally set to No to prevent cached blocks being sent to the consumer It is usual for the Consumer to have cached these blocks itself Chapter 8 HA261376 Page 8 2 Issue 8 Jul 04 VISUAL SUPERVISOR HAN DBO OK 8 1 3 User ID control The use of passwords and user IDs is more strictly controlled in an instrument fitted with the Auditor option than in instrument not so fitted section 4 4 above Access to User IDs and passwords etc requires ADMIN permissions The major points to note are as follows 1 It is not possible to edit a user s Identity Name Access Level or Attributes once the SAVE key has been pressed 2 Once a password has been allocated it can not be used again either by the original user or by a new user 3 A Password expiry period amongst other things can be set in the Properties menu Once this period has ex pired the relevant passwords will no longer be usable 4 Anew user s initial password has a 24 hour expiry period Within this time the user must log in
233. e accessed via Modbus function code 8 Diagnostic Data Description sub code sent 0000 XXXX Echoes the data sent 0001 0000 Restarts 00 Resets the diagnostic counters re enables responses if the slave had been placed in Listen only mode by sub code 4 0002 XXXX Returns the diagnostic register In the current versions the returned data is always zero 0003 ABxx Changes ASCII delimiter This echoes the data sent 0004 0000 Forces Listen only mode There is NO response to this function 000A 0000 Resets all counters 000B Not supported 000C 0000 Returns the number of CRC errors detected in messages addressed to this slave 000D 0000 Returns the number of error messages returned by this slave 000 0000 Returns the number of correct messages addressed to this slave 000 0000 Returns count of the number of times the slave has not responded to a valid message e g due to an unsupported function or a buffering problem in the slave 0010 0000 Always returns 0 0011 0000 Always returns 0 0012 0000 Returns the count of character errors received at the slave i e overrun parity fram ing errors 0013 Not supported 0014 Not supported Table 6 1 4 Modbus diagnostic function codes Chapter 6 HA261376 6 8 Issue 8 04 VISUAL SUPERVISOR HAN DBO OK 6 1 5 Modbus exception responses 6 1 5 1 SLAVE MODE ERROR CODES Table 6 1 5 1 lists the error codes that may be returned i
234. e are no active alarms present and there are no non White active unacknowledged alarms present Table 2 6 1 Alarm annunciation summary In summary If the indication is red an active alarm is present and if it is flashing it has not been acknowledged In more detail Flashing red black means that there is at least one abnormal condition that requires attention at least one active alarm has not been acknowledged Flashing white black means there has been at least one abnormal condition which has now returned to normal with out being acknowledged Steady red means there is at least one abnormal condition that requires attention all of which have been acknowl edged either manually or automatically Steady white means that there are no current active or inactive unacknowledged alarms Chapter 2 HA261376 Page 2 10 Issue 8 Jly 04 VISUAL SUPERVISO 2 6 1 ALARM STATE INDICATION Cont The Alarm pane gives a summary of all alarms not information about a particular alarm For instance if the pane is flashing red it means that there is at least one current unacknowledged alarm which may or not be the one displayed in the alarm pane In order to gain more details the alarm history display can be referred to section 2 6 2 ACTIVE MESSAGE DISPLAY In addition to the normal alarm displays described above a further alarm icon in the form of a question mark on a orange black flashing ground may appe
235. e extension UHH If Hourly or Daily is selected then new UHH sequence files are created at hour or day boundaries respectively 3 4 2 Name types The selection of name type Text Houly Daily Sequence is made in the Logging Groups window described in sec tion 4 2 later in this document TEXT A Text file is a continuous file that starts when logging starts and stops when logging stops The file must have an 8 character file name with the usual MS DOS constraints the instrument adds the file type suffix asc or pkd HOURLY Hourly means that the instrument automatically parcels the archive into files of one hour length For the sequence of files that result the user supplies the first two letters of the file name s and the instrument assigns the last six to indi cate the time month hour day that the recording started for that particular file For example were Monday to be typed in then a file name for an hourly type file might be mo010323 which would mean that archive started at the beginning of hour 23 of day 3 of month 1 DAILY Daily is similar to Hourly The instrument parcels the recording into files that start at the beginning of each day mid night and run for 24 hours The user supplies the first four letters of the file set and the instrument supplies the last four month day SEQUENCE With Sequence filenames only the first two characters are supplied by the user the remainder of the file name being
236. e fan harness to the chassis Use a suitable spanner 7mm 9 32 to release the two 4 nuts securing the fan Remove the nuts and associated shakeproof washers ensuring that any that fall into the body of the instrument Fehr are retrieved 5 Remove the old fan and discard it noting carefully the orientation that is where the harness emerges from the fan body 6 Take the new fan and orient it such that the airflow is into the instrument and the wires emerge from the left hand edge of the fan that is the edge nearest the display screen Figure 10 1 1 shows the airflow and vane di rection indicators moulded into the edge of the fan near the wire aperture Airflow direction indicator To fan lt 5 connector Nuts washers this side Figure 10 1 1 Airflow direction indicator 7 Slide the fan onto the four studs and re fit the two nuts and shake proof washers at top left and bottom right of the fan Do the nuts up finger tight then tighten using a suitable spanner 8 Coil the harness neatly and mate the fan connector located as shown in figure 10 1e Secure the harness coil to the chassis using a cable tie figure 10 1d ensuring that the harness is not strained 10 Refit the top cover and secure it using fixings A B and C previously removed Chapter 10 HA261376 Page 10 2 Issue 8 Jly 04 VISUAL SUPERVISOR HAN DBO 10 1 2 Battery replacement WARNING Care must be taken to ensure
237. e options have been set the CREATE key should be pressed After some seconds of activity while the database is being created the screen displays a summary of how many nodes have been found how many blocks have been created how many loops exist and how many I O modules have been found The number of I O modules should correspond to the number of 2500s connected To rename the file see section 2 10 3 below to save the database press SAVE to retry press CANCEL In addition to the above if the relevant options are fitted the following components will be created Option Feature Printer Serial or parallel Block for standard printer output of all alarms to the print device Reader A block for reading bar codes unconfigured Recipe Blocks for a single production line recipe Batch Blocks for a single batch controller In addition a basic batch file suffix UYB plus recipe file and if the option is fitted a report file UYF for a batch report Note Operation of the CREATE key also creates an empty Modbus Slave Gateway file GWF if one does not already exist to enable TalkThru More details to be found in Chapter 4 2 10 3 Database renaming If the database filename is to be edited the yellowed field should be touched and the filename edited using the alpha numeric keyboard that pops up This editing process is the same as that described in section 2 8 abo
238. e programming functions for the Engineer of editing programs with the operational functions for the Operator of loading scheduling running monitoring pausing and aborting programs With the display locked or with it unlocked but no program loaded only PROGRAMS and SCHEDULE appear Programmer PROGRAMS SCHEDULE Figure 2 5a The Programmer menu display locked With the display unlocked and a program loaded the full menu appears Programmer MONITOR PROGRAMS SCHEDULE PREVIEW PRE PLOT EDIT RUN RUN FROM Figure 2 5b The Programmer menu display unlocked Some of the buttons are greyed out because taking the example shown above where the program either has yet to be run or has just been aborted these keys are not currently required MONITOR PROGRAMS SCHEDULE PREVIEW PRE PLOT EDIT RUN HOLD ABORT RUN FROM Displays text details of the program currently loaded Loads a new program from those available in the instrument s flash memory Runs a program at a future time and date repeating a specific number of times if necessary PREVIEW is a graphical version of EDIT below With a program loaded it displays its profile so that Engineers can check it before running it They can display the target values for the variables at any point in time by moving a vertical cursor along a horiz
239. e range of files displayed can be limited by entering a display filter to limit the scroll list to certain file names or file types Shows the size of the selected file Shows the remaining capacity of the drive selected HA261376 Issue 8 Jly 04 Chapter 4 Page 4 51 VISUAL SUPERVISOR HAN DBO 4 7 4 Reloading the application Operation of the menu key followed by the APP MGR button in the pop up menu returns to the Application Manager page which allows a file to be selected to be the application Once a file name has been selected operation of the LOAD key and then the START key or the LD RUN key returns the unit to normal operation File Manager Device E SUMMARY ACCESS APP MGR q 10 Press APP MGR SETUP TEST CREATE MAINT Press menu key Manager LOAD LD RUN DELETE Figure 4 7 4 Regaining the Application Manager Page 4 8 RECIPE MANAGEMENT 4 8 1 Creating recipe files A blank recipe file i e a recipe file with no values can be created from the recipe file page The recipe editor can then be used to add values 4 8 2 Recipe editing The recipe editor is called by pressing EDIT from the recipe menu Note For units fitted with the Auditor Option an edited recipe must be Saved before it can be downloaded 4 8 2 1 ADD RECIPE LINE If
240. e width may be qualified by the number of decimal places e g Loop1 PV 7 3 This will condition the way the variable is formatted for matching but in the case of a writeable variables the input is not constrained to have the decimal point in the correct place 5 15 7 Formatting attributes These are specified for each individual pattern item modifying the way it is formatted Some are applicable only to variables others to constant text too Some are specific to the data type Those which apply generally are C Centre justify L Left justify R Right justify Centre justification normally tends to the left when the item width and the spaces available are neither both even nor both odd Adding R to changes this to a tendency to the right Attributes which apply to any variable are Z character 0 instead of for left padding The following apply to REAL variables only S Scientific notation e g 1 23E7 Note that this will condition the way the variable is formatted for matching but in the case of a writeable variable the input is not constrained the or format will always be acceptable as input regardless of whether S was specified The following may be applied to integer boolean subfield and ENUM variables only X Hex format using upper case x Hex format using lower case a f Y Binary format If a hex integer is writeable then either upper or lower case a f
241. e writeable and with a non zero width is formatted using the current value of the variable and then matched against the input in exactly the same way as for constant strings including the possible use of wildcards 2 A variable specified to be writeable W attribute defined later will be matched but only in the limited sense that the required number of characters are present in the input as specified by the width If the whole pattern matches then the variable will be assigned a value just as if the characters had been entered via a touch keypad No assignment will be carried out if the characters are invalid e g letters for a decimal integer variable Enu merations defined later are not currently supported in this context 3 A variable specified to have zero width will be deemed to have matched if it is a boolean type and true or if it is a numeric type integer real enum subfield16 etc and is greater than zero or if it is a string type and is a non empty string The syntax of variables is lt name gt lt enumerations gt lt time flags gt lt size info gt lt format gt Enumerations time flags size and format information are defined later For most data types the nature of the printed text is obvious For booleans the digits 0 and are used by default but typically an enumeration would be supplied to override this Variable names refer to objects in a database Different databases may be avail
242. econd field GasConc2 is included For the sake of consistency GasConc has been changed to GasConcl UYR 1 7 22 11 00 10 53 30 Richard 30 Setpoint Line 1 Setpoint Line 2 Amarillo Gulf Coast Ekofisk Methane GasConcl Methane GasConc2 Methane 90 67241 96 52220 85 90631 Nitrogen GasConcl Nitrogen GasConc2 Nitrogen 3 128400 0 2595000 1 006800 Carbon dioxide GasConcl CrbDiOx GasConc2 CrbDiOx 0 4676001 0 5956001 1 495400 Ethane GasConcl Ethane GasConc2 Ethane 4 527901 1 818600 8 491899 Propane GasConcl Propane GasConc2 Propane 0 8280000 0 4596000 2 301500 Water GasConcl Water GasConc2 Water 0 000000 0 000000 0 000000 Hydrogen Sulphid GasConcl Hsulphid GasConc2 Hsulphid 0 000000 0 000000 0 000000 Hydrogen GasConcl Hydrogen GasConc2 Hydrogen 0 000000 0 000000 0 000000 Carbon Monoxide GasConcl CrbMonOx GasConc2 CrbMonOx 0 000000 0 000000 0 000000 Oxygen GasConcl Oxygen GasConc2 Oxygen 0 000000 0 000000 0 000000 Butane GasConcl iButane GasConc2 iButane 0 1037000 0 09770000 0 3846000 Butane GasConcl nButane GasConc2 nButane 0 1563000 0 1007000 0 3506000 Pentane GasConcl iPentane GasConc2 iPentane 0 032100 0 0473000 0 0509000 Pentane GasConcl nPentane GasConc2 nPentane 0 0443000 0 0324000 0 0480000 Hexane GasConcl nHexane GasConc2 nHexane 0 393000 0 0664000 0 0000000 BH Figure 5 10 2 1 Multi line file example 5 10 2 2 FILES WITH OPTIONAL CAPTURE VARIABLES To generate a recipe file with separate capture points then for ea
243. ed Step sometimes called Set Dwell Ramp at Ramp to Servo to setpoint and Servo to process variable Step Value changes instantaneously Can be used in any segment Also called Set Dwell Value remains constant May be used in all segments except the first Ramp at Value increases at a constant specified rate May be used in all segments except the first Ramp to Value increases linearly to a specified value Note Ramp at and Ramp to cannot be mixed within the same segment If an attempt is made to change one of the SPs from one type to the other a message appears warning that all the other similar types in that segment will be changed to conform Servo to setpoint SP The unit reads the current setpoint value and sets the setpoint to that value that is it does not change it Similar to Dwell except that the instrument carries out the instruction automatically without operator intevention As there is no change power output remains constant May be used only in the first segment Servo to process variable PV The instrument reads the current process value and sets the setpoint to that value Because the current process value normally differs from the current setpoint value this option usually results in a change in the power consumption of the process Note If the first segment is a Servo to PV or SP the instrument assumes that it starts from an SP o
244. ed to the equipment e g orange paint 2 The multi recipe This file contains references to a single set of equipment and multiple sets if values to be ap plied to that equipment e g orange purple and brown paint 3 multi line recipe This file contains a single set of values that may be applied simultaneously to up to four sets of equipment e g orange paint to line 1 orange paint to line 2 orange paint to line 3 4 A multi line multi recipe This file contains multiple values that may be applied simultaneously to up to four sets of equipment e g orange paint to line 1 purple paint to line 2 brown paint to line 3 green paint to line 4 Figure 3 7a shows a simplistic view of example 4 and figure 3 7b a sample recipe page Notes 1 Incases 1 and 2 above there is only a single line so references to lines do not appear in the user interface 2 number of recipe files that can be loaded simultaneously depends on the application The number of files that can be loaded is defined by the number of sets each with a separate ID If only one set or ID is configured then references to set IDs do not appear at the user interface Paint maker recipe set any line can make any colour Line 1 Line 2 Line
245. ement ro eee rcp ea atc ded 10 2 10 1 2 Battery replacement prr i ERE PY ER Rr Re ra ol 10 3 10 2 SMALLFRAM E FAN BATTERY REPLACEMENT 10 3 10 21 Fan re placement ERE PERRA 10 4 10 2 2 Battery replacement 244 10 4 10 3 BATTERY REPLACEMENT 5 10 5 10 4 TOUCH SCREEN CALIBRATION N 10 6 Appendix A TECHNICAL SPECIFICATION 4 A 1 GEN ERAL SPECIFIC ATIQ N 5 2 tre tp e ERR A 1 COMMUNICATIONS HMM 3 FUN CTIO N BLO C KS SUPPO RTED te Dec 4 Appendix B ORDERING INFORMATION B 1 Appendix C 1 ASCIG ODES iine tiir rose bn a dn tectus C 1 C2 GIO SSARY ie a IS dise teet oue C 2 C3 COSHH Statement rrt tre ht eee tende 4 C3 1 LITHIUM N YL CHLORIDE BATTERY CELLS C 4 q i 1 Contents Page 10 HA261376 Issue 8 Jly 04 VISUAL SUPERVISOR HAN DBO OK SAFETY NOTES WARNING Any interruption of the protective conductor inside or outside the apparatus
246. entered Panel Setup After each entry press Return The keyboard disappears minut To save the value press SAVE seconds minutes CANCEL 4 5 5 4 DATA ENTRY Note The following adjustment applies only to SVGA large screen units The size of the Data Entry pop up can be reduced by selecting Small for the item Data entry HA261376 Chapter 4 Issue 8 04 Page 4 45 VISUAL SUPERVISOR HAN DBO 4 6 CLONING AN INSTRUMENT Cloning an instrument consists of copying data between instruments via the floppy disk A or USB Bulk storage device B in order to replicate either the characteristics of the instrument or of the application or both It can also be used to backup data for example programs Notes 1 It is recommended that Logging be turned off before cloning is attempted It is not recommended that Cloning data and Logging data share the same disk 2 If Intellectual Property Rights Protection IPRP section 4 9 1 is enabled then data may be cloned only to the original instrument or to another with the same IPRP settings This section consists of the following subsections Accessing the Cloning page Section 4 6 1 Cloning application data Section 4 6 2 Cloning system instrument data Section 4 6 3 Cloning both application and system data cloning ALL Section 4 6 4
247. ents Standard Voltage range M aximum power requirement M aximum current User termination Internal fusing External fusing Low voltage dc Voltage range Maximum power requirement Maximum current User termination Internal fusing External fusing 90 to 250 V 50 60 Hz or 120 to 340V dc 50VA 0 56A Standard IEC fixed plug N o user replaceable fuses It is recommended thata in line fuse be fitted 19 to 32V dc 30 Watts 1 6 Two parallel wired two pin fixed plugs 2 5 Amp Type T IEC 127 time Lag It is recommended thata 2 Amp Type T IEC 127 time Lag fuse be fitted in each positive supply line section 1 3 6 2 HA261376 Issue 8 Jly 04 Appendix A PageA 1 VISUAL SUPERVISOR HAN DBO SPECIFICATION Cont Battery Battery if fitted If a battery is fitted then the its type depends on whether the unit is a large frame or small frame unit and on when it was manufactured see accompanying table CR2032 is a lithium manganese dioxide coin cell 1514250 isa 1 2 AA 3 6V Lithium Thionyl chloride battery W hen exhausted batteries must be disposed of in accordance with local regulations they may notbe disposed of with normal refuse Units prior status level 20 Units with status level 20 or 9 July 2002 fitted with 2032 higher fitted with LS14250 Units prior to status level 10 Units with status level 10 or Small frame units 2003 fitted with CR2032
248. equipment has built in pull up and pull down resistors which in some cases can be switched in and out of circuit Such resistors must be removed or switched out of circuit for all but the instruments at each end of the line 7 Replace any faulty item s and re test 7 5 2 Intermittent failure to communicate This fault is shown by the diagnostic status changing without alarms being generated in the instrument The follow ing section details diagnostics information 1 Check wiring as for Communications above Pay particular attention to the integrity of the screening and termination 2 Check the number of words in the data exchange against the maximum number the master can support 3 Ensure that the maximum line length of transmission line has not been exceeded for the Baud rate in use Table 7 3 above 4 Ensure that the final node on the transmission line no matter what type of instrument it is is terminated cor rectly and that only the first and final nodes are so terminated Note that some equipment has built in pull up and pull down resistors which in some cases can be switched in and out of circuit Such resistors must be re moved or switched out of circuit for all but the instruments at each end of the line 5 Replace any faulty item s and re test 7 5 3 Data format or parameter seems incorrect Verify that the GSD file is correct for the given application by loading it into a GSD file configurator program Chap
249. er The instrument will not format an unformatted disk Folders directories must not be placed on the disk AR WL Chapter 2 HA261376 Page 2 16 Issue 8 Jly 04 VISUAL SUPERVISO HANDBOOK 2 10 CREATING A DATABASE AUTOMATICALLY For a definition of database see LIN database in the Glossary A valid LIN database must be present in order for the instrument to control a process The normal way to create a database is to build one by selecting from a suite of function blocks using LINTools run ning on a PC see LIN Blocks Reference Manual HA082375U003 and then downloading or importing it into the instrument This topic describes a fast track approach by creating a database automatically using the resident Auto Database Cre ate facility This is intended to produce a first pass database to enable novice users to get started quickly It is not intended to generate the final database What the facility does is to look at the instruments connected on the Modbus master communication line primarily 2500 Controllers and then to create a database that will operate with those instruments Broadly the process is as follows 1 Connect up all configured 2500s up to a maximum of 8 on Modbus nodes 1 8 only 2 Setup the Modbus master communications settings to match those of the 2500s as described in Section 4 5 1 Editing Communications parameters 3 If necessary unload any existing application usin
250. er Hazardous live in BS EN61010 Briefly under normal op erating conditions hazardous voltages are defined as being 30V RMS 42 2V peak or 60V dc 2 61376 Chapter 1 Issue 8 Jul 04 1 1 VISUAL SUPERVISOR HAN DBO SYMBOLS USED ON THE EQUIPMENT LABELLING One or more of the symbols below may appear as a part of the unit s labelling Refer to the manual for instructions Protective earth This instrument for ac supply only This instrument for supply only Risk of electric shock PREVENTIVE MAIN TENANCE Details of preventive maintenance procedures are given in chapter 10 of this manual Chapter 1 Pagel 2 HA261376 Issue 8 Jul 04 VISUAL SUPERVISOR HAN DBO OK CHAPTER 1 INSTALLATION This chapter is intended for use by those responsible for the installation and commissioning of the instrument and consists of the following sections 1 1 Unpacking 1 2 Mechanical installation 1 3 Electrical installation 1 4 Setting up Communications 1 5 Getting first access 1 6 Setting the clock 1 7 Manual self tests 1 1 UNPACKING The unit is despatched in a special pack designed to protect it during transit If the outer box of the pack shows signs of damage please open it immediately and examine the instrument If there is evidence of damage contact the manufacturer s local representative for instructions Do not operate the instrument in the meantime If the o
251. er reverse word order INT Signed 16 bit integer SINT Signed 8 bit integer REAL 32 bit IEEE floating point value in two registers REAL X 32 bit IEEE floating point value in two registers reverse word order SREAL p1 16 bit signed number in units of 0 1 SREAL p2 16 bit signed number in units of 0 01 SREAL p3 16 bit signed number in units of 0 001 SREAL p4 16 bit signed number in units of 0 0001 STIME ds 16 bit duration in decisecond 0 1second units STIME dm 16 bit duration in deciminute 0 1 min units STIME dh 16 bit duration in deci hour 0 1 hour units SUREAL p1 16 bit unsigned number in units of 0 1 SUREAL p2 16 bit unsigned number in units of 0 01 SUREAL p3 16 bit unsigned number in units of 0 001 SUREAL p4 16 bit unsigned number in units of 0 0001 UDINT Unsigned 32 bit integer UDINT X Unsigned 32 bit integer reverse word order UINT Unsigned 16 bit integer USINT Unsigned 8 bit integer Xversions must be used when communicating with LIN instruments Table 7 3 N umber types supported by the Visual supervisor 7 3 1 COMMENTING A comment can be attached to the end of one or more lines in the form Comment The maximum number of characters for the UYP line is 60 characters including delimeters The comment text string can contain a maximum of 60 minus rest of line characters Thus a sample UYP file might be MV 16 UINI RC WC Recorder 4 channel 17 Chapter 7 HA261376 7 4 Issue 8 J
252. er GasConc Water GasConc Water GasConc Water 0 000000 0 000000 0 000000 Hydrogen Sulphid GasConc Hsulphid GasConc Hsulphid GasConc Hsulphid 0 000000 0 000000 0 000000 Hydrogen GasConc Hydrogen GasConc Hydrogen GasConc Hydrogen 0 000000 0 000000 0 000000 Carbon Monoxide GasConc CrbMonOx GasConc CrbMonOx GasConc CrbMon0x 0 000000 0 000000 0 000000 Oxygen GasConc Oxygen GasConc Oxygen GasConc Oxygen 0 000000 0 000000 0 000000 i Butane GasConc iButane GasConc iButane GasConc iButane 0 1037000 0 09770000 0 3846000 Butane GasConc nButane GasConc nButane GasConc nButane 0 1563000 0 1007000 0 3506000 i Pentane GasConc iPentane GasConc iPentane GasConc iPentane 0 032100 0 0473000 0 0509000 n Pentane GasConc nPentane GasConc nPentane GasConc nPentane 0 0443000 0 0324000 0 0480000 Hexane GasConc nHexane GasConc nHexane GasConc nHexane 0 393000 0 0664000 0 0000000 Figure 5 10 2 3 Single line file with Monitor and capture 5 11 WRITABLE DICTIONARY The writable dictionary holds text that may be used for the batch system or in reports This dictionary is different from all other dictionaries in that it can be modified from the Batch screen from a bar code reader or from a user screen The values of these texts may optionally be initialised from the user uyl file described in section 5 5 above The dictionary holds up to 40 records each of up to 40 characters in length HA261376 Issue 8 04 Chapter
253. ernal 2 Amp fuses are fitted in each positive supply line as indicated in figure 1 3 6 2b below Note Itis not recommended that a single dc supply source is connected to both connectors Instrument Rear Panel DC1 DC2 Ae SES Disconnect device 19 to 32V de Line power supply unit supply 2 amp Type T ru e O 19 to 32V dc Line power supply supply unit Figure 1 3 6 2b suggested dc supply fusing HA261376 Chapter 1 Issue 8 Jul 04 1 19 VISUAL SUPERVISOR HAN DBO OK 1 3 6 3 FUSE REPLACEMENT small frame units Warning As hazardous voltages are generated by the power supply board the internal fuse may be replaced only with the supply voltage isolated and by trained personnel who are aware of the potential hazard Note This procedure refers to low voltage dc supply units only For high voltage units it is not recom mended that the fuse be replaced by the user The instrument manufacturer or the local agent or service centre should be contacted for advice See Appendix A for supply voltage definitions 1 Isolate the instrument from supply power Remove the top cover of the unit by undoing the retaining screws and lifting the cover off as indicated below The figures below show different versions of the small frame unit Retain all fixings for use in re assembly For current instruments screws A are Torx T8 screws Some
254. ers 16 characters V115 Capture 8 characters 16 characters V117 Deleted Recipe 8 characters 16 characters V116 Save 8 characters 16 characters V120 Load 8 characters 16 characters V121 Start 8 characters 16 characters V122 Hold 8 characters 16 characters V123 Abort 8 characters 16 characters V124 Reset 8 characters 16 characters V125 Restart 8 characters 16 characters V126 Complete 8 characters 16 characters V127 Save 8 characters 16 characters V128 Pause 8 characters 16 characters V129 Resume 8 characters 16 characters V130 Stop 8 characters 16 characters V131 Phase 8 characters 16 characters V132 Create 8 characters 16 characters V140 Net Audit save N A 16 characters See Note 141 Lost Messages N A 16 characters See Note V142 Power Cycle N A 16 characters See Note V143 Net Audit Update 16 characters 16 characters See Note V150 Sig Conf Save 16 characters 16 characters See Note 151 Sig Conf Update 16 characters 16 characters See Note V157 Unused Signature 16 characters 16 characters See Note V158 Sign Fail 16 characters 16 characters See Note V159 Authorise Fail 16 characters 16 characters See Note V160 Min ID 8 characters 16 characters V161 Min Password 8 characters 16 characters V162 Max Login Attemp 8 characters 16 characters V163 Expire Pasword 8 characters 16 characters V164 Logout Timeout 8 characters 16 characters V168 Upd Fail 16 Characters 16 Characters See Note V169 Reinstated 16 characters 16 characters See Note V1
255. es 4 M ax no of phases per batch 20 Appendix A Page 2 HA261376 Issue 8 Jly 04 VISUAL SUPERVISOR HAN DBO OK SPECIFICATION Cont Trends Max no of groups trends Max no of points per group Maximum frequency Maximum samples SGVA 8 VGA 6 SGVA 16 VGA 16 but max 6 faceplates 1 sample per second 15 000 for 1 group of 16 points Communications specification ALIN ports Connectors N etwork medium N etwork type Speed N umber of nodes max Line length max Parallel wired pairs of shielded RJ45 connectors ArcN et screened twisted pair 100 Ohm Token bus 2 5 Mbits sec 8 extendable by repeater 100 metres extendable by repeater Isolation 60Vdc 30V ac 5 6kQ to OV Ethernet port Type 100 10 Base T Cable Type Cat5 Maximum length 100 metres Termination RJ45 telephone connector Transport protocol FTP Isolation 50 Volts peak Modbus J bus EIA422 485 Connectors Protocol Data rate Data format MODBUS data tables Table length max Memory allocated to tables Isolation Parallel wired pairs of shielded RJ45 connectors MO DBUS JBUS slave Selectable between 1200 and 38 400 Baud 8 bits 1 or 2 stop bits selectable parity 16 configurable as registers or bits 200 registers or 999 bits 6000 bytes 60Vdc 30V ac Modbus DCM Connectors Protocol N umber of nodes supported Data rate Data format Parallel
256. ese messages are invoked when certain actions occur within the instrument Each alarm or event has an identifier assigned to it so that the correct type of message can be selected The various identifiers are listed in table 5 9 2a along with their applicability to various system variables which can be included in the report These system variables are listed in table 5 9 2b In the case where a system variable is inapplicable a blank is displayed Applicable to Invok n Alarm active Alarm cleared Alarm acknowledged Block event Block event with name System event System event with name Operator note lt lt lt lt lt lt lt lt Table 5 9 2 Alarm type identifiers System variable The name of the associated function block The date associated with the queue entry A name associated with an event e g SPP program name The priority asigned to the alarm or event The time associated with the queue entry The alarm or event type Table 5 9 26 Alarm system variables 5 9 2 1 EXAMPLE Figures 5 9 2 1a and 5 9 2 1b show an example of a UYT file and a typical resulting appearance in the report respec tively I1001 A DATE 8 A TIME 8 A BLOCK 8R TYPE 8L ACTIVE A PRI 1 R L 11002 DATE 8 A 8 BLOCK 8R A TYPE 8L Cleared R L Figure 5 9 2 1a Sample UYT file 14 08 00 10 22 33 Loopl HighAbs
257. eted or the instrument will not operate correctly and revert to a factory configuration Files T800 GSD and 2500 GSD must not be deleted or Profibus will not operate correctly The file DEFAULT OFL must not be deleted or the faceplates in the overview page will fail to operate correctly XYZ is any three character extension Node Device Filter File Size Free space File Manager Node Device E Filter File BSYSTEMIZUYL Size 11395 bytes Free Space 628084 bytes COPY COPY ALL DELETE DEL ALL Copy File Confirm Delete File E SYSTEMI UYL File E SYSTEMI UYL Copy to Node 1 Device E File NENNEN CAUTION Files must not be deleted from the drive CANCEL unless it is certain that the control system will not be impaired by so doing See the caution ary notes above Figure 4 7 3 Copy and delete For SLIN ALIN ELIN systems only the decimal number of the LIN node to be accessed Selectable as E internal flash memory or if any of the following are fitted A floppy disk B USB Bulk storage device or H internal archive Allows file display to be limited to certain types of files For example shows all files whereas an entry of DBF allows only files with DBF suffix to appear See File immediately below Touching this area causes a scroll list of files to be displayed and to be selected one at a time for copying or deleting Th
258. eters in the I O unit Access up to 8 ABCD hex word 16 bit parameters in the I O unit Access up to 8 Boolean parameters in the I O unit Access up to 8 double precision integer 32 bit parameters in the I O unit Access up to 8 signed short integer 8 bit parameters in the I O unit Access up to 8 time duration parameters in the I O unit Access up to 8 unsigned short integer 8 bit parameters in the I O unit Access up to 8 AB hex byte 8 bit parameters in the I O unit 6 2 2 8 INSTRUMENT DIAGNOSTIC BLOCKS D2000 Provides overall view of the I O unit comms parameters status indication etc D2500 Provides overall view of the I O unit comms parameters status indication etc Chapter 6 6 12 HA261376 Issue 8 Jly 04 VISUAL SUPERVISOR HAN DBO OK 6 2 3 The UYM File A uym file is required for every DCM which is to communicate with a MODBUS slave device in order that the Visual Supervisor may know the address at which a particular point channel value alarm threshold value etc is to be found This information has be obtained from the slave device documentation Notes 1 An unlimited number of blocks may use the same uym file provided only that their register usage i e the range of addresses in the target instrument is identical 2 UYM files can also be used to override information in standard DCMs The uym file fully described in chapter 15 of the LIN Blocks Reference Manual HA083375U003 is a
259. f 0 0 This is unlikely to be the actual SP or PV Therefore the Preview profile displayed for the first segment will differ from the actual programmed profile For the same reason if the second segment is a ramp at rate the segment duration in Preview will differ from the actual duration and if the second segment is ramp to target then the slope in Preview will differ from the actual slope TERMINOLOGY In this document any change in the value of the setpoint is referred to as a ramp even when the result of that change is zero This means that the six methods of controlling the value of the setpoint described above all result in types of ramp Chapter 4 HA261376 Page 4 4 Issue 8 Jly 04 VISUAL SUPERVISOR HAN DBO OK 4 1 3 1 CHANGING RAMP TYPE Cont TO CHANGE THE TYPE OF RAMP Example for Analog Input 1 The following example describes how to SP e GE Se change the ramp in Segment 2 from a time to target to a ramp to tar get In the Program Editor page the cell for Analog Input 1 Segment 2 shows R for Ramp and to 100 0 for the value indicating that it is currently a ramp to a specified value Press the cell A dialogue box appears displaying data about that cell Segment Press the yellowed Ramp field Setpoint Type A pick list of ramp types appears with Ramp highlighted
260. files These files allow the printing of reports which feature Customised layout of information Detailed control of the formatting of data items Text optionally internationalised LIN database variables System variables e g current date and time An example of a UYF file is given in figure 5 9 1 and the resulting output in 5 9 1b The various highlighted items are discussed below Literal Text database Total no of characters Directive variable No of decimal places PT DE Temperature pidl pv 6 3 NPressure SU pid2 pv 6 2 N pidi pv 230 0 290 0 Cold OK Hot N TIME 8 DATE 8 N Limit values Limit text Text comma System variable Figure 5 9 1a Sample UYF file Text left justified Values right justified Temperature 45 678 Pressure 999 23 OK 09 03 09 21 11 00 t Time Date Figure 5 9 1b Printed output HA261376 Chapter 5 Issue 8 Jly 04 Page 5 51 VISUAL SUPERVISOR HAN DBO 5 9 1 REPORT FORMS Cont 5 9 1 1 UYF FILE ENTRIES The UYF file contains identification information directive followed by a list of those items text and variables which are to be included in the report These items must be separated by commas OR by New Line Line feed or Carriage return instructions Rules 1 No line is to include more than 255 characters not counting commas linefeeds etc 2 No spaces or tabs may be included between
261. g See section 3 5 6 2 Alarms and events recorded on trends See section 3 6 1 3 Alarms and events recorded in log files 4 Printer if configured No Prefixes Notes 580 Original value in a block field change event 581 New value in a block field change event 582 Message acknowledge reason 583 Signature reason Auditor Option Only 584 Logged in user s name 585 Signature Auditor Option Only 586 Authorisation Auditor Option Only HA261376 Chapter 5 Issue 8 Jly 04 Page 5 27 VISUAL SUPERVISOR HAN DBO 5 3 THE ERROR TEXT DICTIONARY The contents of the Error text dictionary on delivery are as follows No CODE TEXT El 8301 Bad template E2 8302 Bad block number 8303 No free blocks 4 8304 No free database memory E5 8305 Not allowed by block create E6 8306 In use E7 8307 Max length E8 8308 No spare databases E9 8309 Not enough memory E10 8320 Bad library file Ell 8321 Bad template in library E12 8322 Bad server E13 8323 Cannot create EDB entry E14 8324 Bad file version E15 8325 Bad template spec E16 8326 Unable to make block remote E17 8327 Bad parent E18 8328 Corrupt data in DBF file E19 8329 Corrupt block spec E20 832A Corrupt block data E21 832B Corrupt pool data E22 832C No free resources E23 832D Template not found E24 832 Template resource fault E25 8330 Cannot start E26 8331 Cannot stop E27 8332 Empty database E28 8333 Configurator in use E29 8340 DBF file wr
262. g file c Ifneither a nor b are true the user is prompted for a decision During export the screen is normally locked to the Archive Manage page Setting Page Locked to No causes normal screen navigation to be restored with the export continuing as a background task Once export is complete a message appears to tell the user that the disk may be removed Any other export messages also appear at the user s current display page The user may return to the Archive manage page at any time Note The large frame unit displays an archiving in progress icon at the top of the screen The icon consists of a disk shape with an inward pointing arrow to the left The arrow and the upper central portion of the disk shape flash green during export 3 4 6 Data integrity Although the Visual Supervisor is designed to maintain logged data in a secure manner in the event of sudden loss of power it is not always possible to guarantee that no data will be lost or that any data record currently being written wll be complete Such problems will be minimised if logging is stopped prior to a controlled power down Logging can be stopped by turning logging off in LOGGING MONITOR or by using the STOP button in SYSTEM APPLN APP MGR HA261376 Issue 8 Jul 04 Chapter 3 Page3 15 VISUAL SUPERVISOR HAN DBO OK 3 5 ALARMS MESSAGE RESPONSE Section 2 6 above describes the alarm pane and the way in which it is used b
263. g the Application Manager as described in Section 4 3 5 Un loading an application 4 Run the Auto Database Create facility as described next Notes when using Profibus If the unit is configured as a Profibus master then the automatic database creation function will create function blocks for instruments located on the Profibus network not the Modbus network 2 For Profibus use the node number of the Instrument must be greater than eight to avoid any potential clash with a slave node 3 Only series 2500 I O controllers will be identified 2 61376 Chapter 2 Issue 8 04 2 17 VISUAL SUPERVISOR HAN DBO OK 2 10 1 Running Auto database create With no application loaded press the Menu key The seven pane version of the pop up menu appears If an application has just been unloaded the background will be the Appli cation Manager page instead of the System Summary Press CREATE The opening page of Auto Database Create is displayed This page allows each of the five options presented to be set to YES or NO the options toggle between YES and NO when selected If the database is to include a Setpoint Programmer Programmer should be set to YES see below If data is to be logged to a floppy disk Logging should be selected YES If you want to view or monitor PID in connected 2500s select YES to Loops No application loaded System Summary Instrume
264. g the CREATE key from the Load batch page described in section 3 8 1 above Operation of the CREATE key causes a pick list to appear allowing the user to define batch parameters as shown in the figure CREATE AS Filename Recipe Line Display Group Message Log Group Log Report OK CANCEL Filename Allows a filename eight characters max to be entered for the Batch file Recipe line Allows a recipe line to be chosen for batch action Display Group Allows one of the display groups to be selected for batch action see section 3 6 for further details Message Allows a message set up in LIN blocks configuration to be selected for display as appropriate Log Group Allows a log group to be selected for Batch action section 4 2 Log Report A logging group may have been configured to have reports In such a case one of the log group s report files may be selected to drive batch reports batch report is generated for start stop and abort The create facility generates an elementary report file UYF which may be customised by being exported and edited see section 5 9 1 for further details of UYF files Entry of a Filename is mandatory Other field entries are optional HA261376 Chapter 3 Issue 8 Jul 04 Page 3 39 VISUAL SUPERVISOR HAN DBO This page is deliberately left blank Chapter 3 HA261376 Page 3 40 Issue 8 Jul 04 VISUAL SUPERVISOR HAN DBO OK CHAPTER 4 M
265. ge C 1 VISUAL SUPERVISO HANDBOOK C2 GLOSSARY Application Archiving Brown out Configuration Configurator Configurer COSHH Customisation Database Dictionary files EMC Home page LIN database Log group Logging OEM Power outage Process variable PV Ramp An application consists of a LIN database a User Screen page set possibly some Setpoint Programs Sequences and Dictionary files plus actions profile files and sometimes GSD files for third party devices The application embodies the instrument s control strategy and also determines the behaviour of its user interface Archiving is the process of recording the history of a set of data values onto a removable floppy disk The data can only be replayed with an off line tool In this context archiving is the same as logging See also Logging and Log group A brown out is a transient power variation or partial power failure severe enough to provoke an automatic re set in the Visual Supervisor Configuration is the process of specifying the components of an application in order to deter mine the performance and behaviour of an instrument Configuration is usually carried out by the manufacturer or by an OEM See also Application and LIN database A configurator is a user interface or software tool that provides the editing capability to configure the instrument A configurer is any person who configures or wh
266. generates the Home page If there is no Home declaration it will default to the agent of numerically lowest Id in the Main pane 5 7 3 4 ROOT PAGE DECLARATION The Root page is displayed when the Pop up menu key is pressed and it usually consists of a menu Syntax R lt Id gt Example R1000 This defines the Root agent With no Root declaration it will default to the lowest Id in the Pop up pane If there are no pop up agents then it will be set equal to the Home agent 5 7 3 5 INITIAL PAGE DECLARATION The Initial page is displayed on start up only It offers the opportunity to have an introductory page that s different from the Home page Syntax I lt Id gt Example 11000 This defines the Initial agent Chapter 5 HA261376 Page 5 46 Issue 8 Jly 04 VISUAL SUPERVISOR HAN DBO OK 5 7 4 Agent types Table 5 7 4a sets out the types of agents used The Entry points column gives the number of entry points to each of the listed agents and the number of IDs allocated will be the number in this column starting at the specified ID This should be born in mind when assigning Ids to agents in order to avoid conflicts Table 1 3 1b give details of those parameters with multiple entry points For each agent the third column headed Invalid indicates under what circumstances if any the agent is not avail able A indicates that the agent is not available within an Application panel and B indicates that i
267. gram name Status Run Hold Held Back Idle Error Complete Duration Running time start to finish Completion Time of completion of current run assuming no interruptions Iteration Number of current run number of runs requested SEGMENT Name Segment name usually a number Time Remaining Time remaining to completion of the current segment decrementing second by second Current Program Program Segment Name Status Duration Completion Iteration Name Time Remaining SAMPLE RUNNING 03 55 00 17 06 34 T E 1 00 02 43 17 02 00 RUN HOLD ABORT HA261376 Issue 8 Jul 04 Chapter 3 Page 3 9 VISUAL SUPERVISOR HAN DBO 3 3 2 The preplot facility 2256548 _ 1 1 STANDARD DISPLAY MODE in With the Programmer menu displayed and a program running see step 8 in section 3 1 1 Running a program now press PREPLOT 2522 display appears showing a profile of the target and the actual PVs moving slowly perhaps imperceptibly from right to left past a vertical cursor at the centre of the screen 55 55 EM Note The trend resolution is such that short duration events in Figure 3 3 28 Preplot display program running particular zero duration spikes will not be visible 3 3 25 4 Comms The cursor marks the current time The
268. h Run USB connector 1 3 1 8 Keyboard connector CFG Comms Modbus indicator yellow Run indicator Health green indicator connectors red 1 3 1 1 Relay status LED Status Unit status Health Run Red Green Off De energised De energised Off Powering up De energised De energised On Application loaded Energised De energised Off Application running Energised Energised SLIN Comms activity at CFG port Yellow LED Status Data transfer in progress On Data transfer not in progress Off Figure 1 3 1a Rear panel details small frame units Caution When connecting the power cable ensure that it is properly secured in the cable clamp leaving a loop only just long enough to permit the connector to mate at 90 degrees to the rear panel If the loop is too short the connector may not mate correctly leading to early failure If too much cable is left in the loop or if the loop is left unclamped the connector can be disconnected accidentally In either case loss of any associated process control will ensue Chapter 1 HA261376 Pagel 8 Issue 8 Jul 04 VISUAL SUPERVISOR HAN DBO OK 1 3 1 REAR PANEL LAYOUT AND CONNECTOR PINOUTS Cont Parallel printer Fig 1 3 1 5 Profibus Fig 1 3 1 3a Supply Connector Profibus Fig 1 3 1 3b Fixed socket Config port Fig 1 3 3 1 or serial printer Fig 1 3 1 6 USB connector
269. he currently selected Id For any particular programmer display page the identical page for other LOAD valid Ids can be scrolled through using the right and left arrow keys 4 Press the yellowed field of question marks Load Save program On the left side of the screen a pick list vertical menu appears showing the programs that the instrument currently holds If necessary the scroll bar at the bottom of list can be used to reveal more 5 Press the name of the required program The background of the selected program s name changes to yellow 6 Press the Return key the green arrow IDLE Archive Manage The pick list disappears and the Load Save Program page now shows File Name SAMPLE the name of the selected program on a yellow background 7 Press the LOAD key LOAD SAMPLE IDLE 22 22 22 1 The full Programmer menu appears With no program running HOLD and ABORT are greyed out The Program pane reads IDLE on a white background showing the program is loaded but idling not running Programmer 8 Press RUN The Program pane changes to green with status RUNNING The ex pected time of completion and the number of the segment currently executing are also displayed The program is now running Chapter 3 H
270. he currently executing segment 712 LOGGRP File Type File type ASCII v PACKED 725 LOGGRP Name Type Type of log file name 727 LOGGRP Column Titles Enable disable column titles in ASCII files 728 LOGGRP Date Format Format of date time in ASCII files 729 LOGGRP Compr Ratio Compression of data in PACKED files 732 LOGGRP LOG NOW Log an ASCII sample now 777 LOGAMAN EXPORT ALL Expoprt from internal archive to removable medium 788 LOGGRP TYEM_TITLE Number of groups active out of total 796 LOGAMAN EXPORT Export from internal archive to removable medium 1018 ACCESS USERS Change to multi user access 1108 RCP CAPTURE AS Capture live value to a new recipe 1111 RCP ADD LINE Add a production line to a recipe file 1114 RCP CREATE Create a new recipe file 1115 RCP LINES Display list of production lines 1166 RECIPE ITEM_TITLE File name filter 1234 BATCH ABORT Abort a running batch 1236 BATCH NOTE Enter a batch note 1238 BATCH CREATE Create a new batch file Chapter 5 HA261376 Page 5 26 Issue 8 Jly 04 VISUAL SUPERVISOR HAN DBO 5 2 6 Alarm event customisation using the dictionary The following dictionary entries may be defined to add additional information into the alarm text In all cases the text if defined prefixes the another item If a space is required between the prefix and the item this must be included in the dictionary item when defined The text is used in the following contexts 1 Panel Event Lo
271. he number of values must correspond with the number of recipes 5 10 1 4 BASIC FILE EXAMPLE Figure 5 10 1 4 is an example of a basic UYR file with three recipes UYR 1 6 22 11 00 10 31 38 Richard 30 Setpoint 1 Amarillo Gulf Coast Ekofisk Methane GasConc Methane 90 67241 96 52220 85 90631 Nitrogen CasConc Nitrogen 3 128400 0 2595000 1 006800 Carbon dioxide GasConc CrbDiOx 0 4676001 0 5956001 1 495400 Ethane GasConc Ethane 4 527901 1 818600 8 491899 Propane GasConc Propane 0 8280000 0 4596000 2 301500 Water GasConc Water 0 000000 0 000000 0 000000 Hydrogen Sulphid GasConc Hsulphid 0 000000 0 000000 0 000000 Hydrogen GasConc Hydrogen 0 000000 0 000000 0 000000 Carbon Monoxide GasConc CrbMonOx 0 000000 0 000000 0 000000 Oxygen GasConc Oxygen 0 000000 0 000000 0 000000 i Butane GasConc iButane 0 1037000 0 09770000 0 3846000 n Butane GasConc nButane 0 1563000 0 1007000 0 3506000 i Pentane GasConc iPentane 0 032100 0 0473000 0 0509000 n Pentane GasConc nPentane 0 0443000 0 0324000 0 0480000 n Hexane GasConc nHexane 0 393000 0 0664000 0 0000000 Figure 5 10 1 4 Basic file example HA261376 Issue 8 Jly 04 Chapter 5 Page 5 57 VISUAL SUPERVISOR HAN DBO 5 10 2 More complex files 5 10 2 1 MULTI LINE FILES Figure 5 10 2 1 below shows a 2 line version of the basic file described above The differences are In the Title line field number 2 is included and the lines have been named In each variable line a s
272. he program now press the RUN key The main display reverts to the Programmer menu The Program pane changes to green showing RUNNING the time of completion and the segment number The program is now running from the specified point Programmer SAMPLE IDLE Program Duration 03 55 00 Run From 008008008 Segment Name 1 Duration 00 05 00 Time Through 00 00 00 RUN SAMPLE IDLE 22 22 22 Duration 03 55 00 Run From 01 45 00 Segment Name 4 Duration 01 50 00 Time Through 00 15 00 RUN PROGRAMS SCHEDULE PREVIEW PRE PLOT RUN HOLD RUN FROM SKIP E HA261376 Issue 8 Jul 04 Chapter 3 Page 3 3 VISUAL SUPERVISOR HAN DBO OK 3 1 3 Scheduling a program ACCESS SYSTEM ALARMS Scheduling a program means setting a time at which it will start to run automatically If another program is running at the scheduled start time the scheduled Press 1 program will be delayed and started later The late start is recorded in the PROGRAMMER key Alarm History Press menu key Programmer 1 In the row of navigation keys at the bottom of the screen press the Menu key SCHEDULE
273. hen the correct name has been entered press OK CANCEL If required the Date Format field can be edited in a similar fashion The format options Date Time Spreadsheet and Integer are de scribed in sections 4 2 1 and 4 5 4 3 5 5 Alarm summary page This provides an alternative way of displaying only those alarms which are currently active acknowledged or not and previously active alarms which are now cleared but which have not been acknowledged To display the alarm summary page either press the SUMMARY key in the Alarm menu or for SVGA units only the cycle screens key can be used to toggle between Alarm History and Alarm Summary display pages Operating the Option key calls an option bar like that described in section 3 5 1 for the alarm history display except that it includes only ACK ALL AREA BLOCK and GROUP Keys ACK ACKALL HISTORY SUMMARY LOG NOTE ARCHIVE MESSAGES Alarm Summary TYPE ACTIVE BadBat 14 02 99 08 13 21 14 02 99 08 13 21 Figure 3 5 5 Alarm summary access Note Initially the display shows only the highest priority alarm in each block Operation of the down arrow key at the bottom of the screen causes the display to change such that it shows all alarms A further operation of the keys returns to the single alarm block display and so on HA261376 Chapter 3 Issue 8 Jul 04 3 19 VISUAL SUPERVISOR HAN DBO OK 3 5 6 Event
274. hessell com e mail Technical support chessell com http www chessell com Invensys EUROTHERM EUROTHERM LIMITED Faraday Close Durrington Worthing West Sussex BN13 3PL Telephone 01903 695888 Facsimile 01903 695666 e mail info eurotherm co uk Website http www eurotherm co uk Specification subject to change without notice OEurotherm Limited HA261376 8 CN20449
275. ho are View only are prevented from file system modification and their logins are not recorded Remote Not used with this software release Reference column For use with user screens set up in Lin Blocks this allows individual users or groups of users allocated the same reference number to be identified as being logged on Deleting Retiring users To delete a user touch the required name in the Identity column and press DELETE in the resulting dialogue box To complete the process press OK in the confirmation dialogue box Notes 1 For units fitted with the Auditor option the DELETE key is named RETIRE See Chapter 8 for more details 2 Itis not possible to delete the current user 3 list of Retired Users can be viewed by touching the Cycle Screens key A second operation of the key returns the user to the Current Users list ie Disabling user IDs To disable a user touch the required name in the Identity column and press DISABLE in the resulting dialogue box The Identity and name of the disabled user appear in red and the user will not be able to log on until the login has been re enabled To re enable the login touch the required name in the Identity column then re enter the password and confirm it The Identity and Name return to their previous blue colour It is not possible to disable the current user Chapter 4 HA261376 Page 4 32 Issue 8 Jly 04 VISUAL SUPERVISOR HAN DBO
276. how the passwords User ID is used to gain access to various parts of the instrument configuration As described in section 4 5 5 it is possible to set a time period time out after which the access level returns to Locked HA261376 Chapter 4 Issue 8 Jly 04 Page 4 27 VISUAL SUPERVISOR HAN DBO 4 4 1 First time access LOCKED level OPERATOR and COMMISSION Commissioning Engineer levels For first time access no password is required For access to the LOCKED level at first time or at any other time no password is required ENGINEER level For first time access immediately after the instrument has been commissioned the factory set default password for Engineer level access should be entered This password is lt spacekey gt default I E a space character followed immediately by default eight characters in all The space key on the screen keyboard is the blank key at bottom right above the C key 4 4 2 Editing the passwords To change the passwords carry out the following procedure 1 Press the Menu key The Pop up menu appears 2 Press ACCESS The Security Access page appears displaying the current access level ENGINEER and two keys CHANGE and PASSWDS 3 Press PASSWDS The Passwords page appears 4 Press the password field you want to change e g Operator A qwerty keyboard display appears Continued 2 gt ACCESS SYSTEM ALARMS Press ACCESS key oVERVIEW PR
277. hting procedures Class C or soda ash extinguisher A Self Contained Breathing Apparatus SCABA or Air Purifying Respirator APR must be worn Cells may leak vent or explode If a bright white flame Unusual fire and explosion hazards is present lithium content is present and on fire Use one of the extinguishing media recommended above HEALTH HAZARD DATA Threshold limit value Not applicable LD 50 Oral Not applicable LD 50 Dermal Not applicable Skin and eye irritation Not applicable in normal use Leakage material is corrosive There are no effects in normal use Over exposure effects leakage has occurred vapours are very irritating to skin eyes and mucous membranes Inhalation may lead to pulmonary oedema and overexposure may lead to non fibrotic lung injury Extinguishing media Chemical nature See above There no risks in normal use FIRST AID PROCEDURES Flush with running cold water for at least 15 minutes Hold eyelids apart Seek immediate medical attention mentioning thionyl chloride Contact results in acidic burns Skin Rinse with copious quantities of running cold water Avoid hot water Do not rub skin If burns develop seek medical attention mentioning thionyl chloride Contact results in acidic burns Seek immediate medical attention If person is conscious supply copious amounts of milk or water Do not induce vomiting Do not attempt to administer anything by
278. ime field SUERTE HA261376 Chapter 3 Issue 8 Jul 04 Page 3 5 VISUAL SUPERVISOR HAN DBO 3 1 3 SCHEDULING A PROGRAM Cont 3 1 3 3 CHANGING THE NUMBER OF ITERATIONS RUNS 13 In the Iterations field press the 1 The numeric keyboard reappears 14 Key in the required number of runs and press the Return key To change the entered value the key and red cross key operate as described in step 8 If the program is to repeat continuously until further notice press 0 Schedule Program 15 The Schedule Program page displays the specified number of itera tions File Name BAMPLE Start Date 20 02 00 Start Time 10 30 00 Iterations 0 Continuous ACCEPT The program is now scheduled Chapter 3 HA261376 Page 3 6 Issue 8 Jul 04 VISUAL SUPERVISOR HAN DBO OK 3 1 4 Segment skip Skipping a program segment causes the program to stop running its current segment and start running the next seg ment immediately Skip is initiated from the Programmer menu Programmer MONITOR PROGRAMS SCHEDULE PREVIEW PRE PLOT EDIT HOLD ABORT SKIP Press SKIP key 3 1 4 1 SEGMENT TRANSITION CONSEQUENCES From dwell set or sevo SP or PV to any other type These transitions are safe and provide a bumpless transition of SP from one segment to the next The program fin ishes
279. incorrectly the file is ignored New password The required new password of up to eight characters If left blank the password remains unchanged Enable disable 0 IPRP disabled off 1 IPRP enabled on If left blank the seting remains unchanged For example to change the default password to 1 and enable IPRP the file content should be as follows OEM 1 OEM 1 1 Note Space characters are included in the password Commas are not allowable as password characters HA261376 Chapter 4 Issue 8 Jly 04 4 55 VISUAL SUPERVISOR HAN DBO This page is deliberately left blank Chapter 4 HA261376 Page 4 56 Issue 8 Jly 04 VISUAL SUPERVISOR HAN DBO OK CHAPTER 5 CUSTOMISING This chapter describes how to customise the Standard Interface it consists of the following sections 5 1 Introduction 5 9 Form files 5 2 The System text dictionary 5 10 Recipe files 5 3 The Error text dictionary 5 11 The writeable dictionary 5 4 The Event text dictionary 5 12 The recipe dictionary 5 5 The User text dictionary 5 13 The batch dictionary 5 6 The Programmer text dictionary 5 14 Batch files 5 7 Panel navigation 5 15 Reader files 5 8 Database names 5 1 INTRODUCTION 5 1 to 5 8 show how to replace the supplied screen displayed texts with ones more suited to a particular process in a different language and so on Each of these can involve either l
280. input module in 2500 IOS D25_AI4 Access 4 channel analogue input module in 2500 IOS D25_A02 Access 2 channel analogue output module in 2500 IOS Appendix A HA261376 PageA 4 Issue 8 Jly 04 VISUAL SUPERVISOR HAN DBO OK FUNCTION BLOCKS SUPPORTED Cont CATEGORY BLOCK FUNCTION DCM Cont D25_D14 Access 4 channel digital input module in 2500 IOS D25 DI6 Access 6 channel digital input module in 2500 IOS D25_DI8 Access 8 channel digital input module in 2500 IOS D25_D04 Access 4 channel digital output module in 2500 IOS D25_AICH Access single analogue input channel in 2500 IOS D25_AOCH Access single analogue output channel in 2500 IOS D25_DICH Access single digital input channel in 2500 IOS D25_DOCH Access single digital output channel in 2500 IOS D25_R_CV Access up to 8 user wiring real calculated values in 2500 IOS D25 B CV Access up to 8 user wiring Boolean calculated values in 2500 IOS D25 R UV Access the 8 real user values in 2500 IOS D25 UALM Access the user analogue or digital alarms in 2500 IOS D25 AIT Single channel analogue input block time delayed alarms D25 DI T Single channel digital input block time delayed alarms DCM AI Access single analogue input channel in 2500 IOS DCM AO Access single analogue output channel in 2500 IOS DCM DI Access single digital input channel in 2500 IOS DCM DO Access single digital output channel in 2500 IOS DCM B8 Access up to 8 Boolean parameters in 2500 IOS DCM_D8 Access up
281. ir RR 5 55 5710 FILES n EP rr ree Ier eren 5 56 5 101 Basie Recipe File kem ape et ba pn e UR utt 5 56 Se LO ed erc emer n er ep ens 5 56 5 210 1 2 2 e RET er Pe E e PE een 5 57 5 105 1 3 VA RIA BLESUN ES Ses e mrt tn mete EEE rre 5 57 5 10 1 4 BASIC FILE EXAMPLE ipi tct ta herren 5 57 5 10 2 More complex files ice rm i tt e rr t Pe te 5 58 5 10 21 MU TUNE PILES rh re rer Es 5 58 5 10 2 2 FILES WITH OPTIONAL CAPTURE VARIABLES 5 58 5 10 2 3 FILES WITH ITOR VARIABLES 5 59 5 11 WRITABIE DICTO 5 59 5712 THE RECIPE DICTION ARY dr ene de e tege er rena 5 60 5213 THEBATCH DICTIONARY iiir retra 5 61 5 4 BATCH FILES Pi etd 5 62 eer o a EN pe EA reed 5 62 5 14 2 Batclr in o Re Cete de ep dav p eode ede 5 63 5 15 BAR CO DE READER FILES 5 64 5515 1 OQ WerVIQW TL ee MH e CR TR ES 5 64 PATTERN DEUM ITER ert ove eret e en eco e nee eut 5 64 5 15 2 literal tappe 5 65 EMPTY STRING S hei ee awed 5 65 51543 1 5 66 5 15 4 LIN database 1
282. is currently Configuration ff th f Archive Int 00 01 00 on off or set to start upon the occurrence of an File Type ASCII event The event is specified by the customer and is Name Type Hourly File Name ascii configured at the factory or by the OEM Column Titles Present To change the current setting press the yellowed Date Format Date Time Logging field and select ON OFF or On Event as SAVE LOG NOW required then press ENTER The Logging Groups page now shows the new setting against Logging HA261376 Chapter 4 Issue 8 Jly 04 4 15 VISUAL SUPERVISOR HAN DBO 4 2 1 1 LOG CONFIGURATION The remaining fields concern the configuration of the files to be logged To change any of these fields Logging must be selected OFF as described above Archive Int File Type Name Type File Name Column Titles This is the interval at which data is archived saved to disk during the logging process The maximum rate is 1 file per 10 secs for example file 10 secs 3 files 30 secs Ifa faster rate than this is entered for example 4 files each 20 secs then the specified rate may not be reached in which case data samples will be lost For internal archiving the rate is 10 times faster than archiving to floppy The default format for this field is hh mm ss but this can be changed see section 4 5 Setting up and re setting the instrument V
283. it to use a keyboard or keypad as a supplement to the touch screen See section 4 5 1 for details If the unit is so configured then a cursor appears on the screen The cursor normally points up wards but inverts when pointing at the navigation keys a 1 4 VGA unit The cursor be Normal cursor moved by a number of means depending on the type of keyboard as described below The touch screen remains active so it is possible to use both keyboard and touch methods to provide optimum euio ease of operation TYPES OF KEYPAD 1 Cursor keys plus Enter Allows the cursor to be moved around the screen using the cursor keys with the Enter key being used to touch the screen i e this operates as a simple point and click interface Cursor keys numeric keys and Enter As described above but the numeric keypad can be used to jump from one touch sensitive area to another Num Lock not active or as numeric entry keys Num Lock active Functions with Num Lock not active Home Moves the cursor to the Menu key End Moves the cursor to the last touch sensitive area on the screen PgUp Moves the cursor to the next touch sensitive area PgDn Moves the cursor to the previous touch sensitive area Del Clears numeric values equivalent to using the pop up key Ins Moves the cursor to the pop up Enter key Functions with Num Lock active Ot
284. ite failed E30 8341 More than one RUN file found 1 8342 RUN file not found E32 834A Connection source is not an O P E33 834B Multiple connection to same I P E34 834C Connection destination not I P E35 834D No free connection resources E36 834E Bad conn Src dest block field E37 834F Invalid connection destination E38 8350 Hot start switch is disabled E39 8351 No database was running E40 8352 Real time clock is not running E41 8353 Root block clock is not running E42 8354 Hotstart time was exceeded E43 8355 Root block is invalid E44 8356 Too many control loops E45 8357 Coldstart switch is disabled Chapter 5 HA261376 Page 5 28 Issue 8 Jly 04 VISUAL SUPERVISOR HAN DBO OK 5 3 THE ERROR TEXT DICTIONARY Cont As with the System text dictionary it is possible to Replace any text item Error message in the Error text dictionary with messages customised for a particular in dustry or application and or 2 Internationalise the messages by creating a new dictionary for each of up to ten languages 5 3 1 Editing error messages The Error dictionary supplied is a part of the _system uyl file To customise it the principle is the same as for the System text dictionary 1 In the Error text dictionary find the text to be replaced 2 Note its reference number 3 Key in the reference number and then the text you want to replace it with related by the following syntax E lt N gt lt text gt where lt N
285. items although they may be included in text strings for formatting purposes Directive Literal Text Dictionary text The form identifier used to attach a number to the report for reference via function blocks Different reports can be included in one UYF file by preceding them with different Directives The directive must precede the list of displayed items and must occupy a line of its own The syntax is I lt number gt where number is an integer between 1 and 999 inclusive No spaces are allowed Enclosed within double quotes literal text is printed out as typed in Special characters may be included as shown in table 5 9 1 1a below Any ASCII character can be included by typing nn where nn is the hex code for the required character If a colon followed by a number is included immediately after the text then this will define the width of the field E G temperature 20 would produce the text temperature followed by seven spaces Text is left justified unless otherwise specified as described below in Formatting attributes Entry Definition Hex L or N Line feed new line 0A P Form feed 0C Carriage Return OD T Horizontal tab 09 Double quotes 22 Dollar symbol 24 2 Open curly bracket 7B Close curly bracket 7D Unicode Lain 1 charac nn ASCII character nn nn ter set codes Table 5 9 1 1a Special
286. its low voltage dc supply units 1 With the cover open and the fan connector disconnected the old fan be removed by removing its securing nuts and shake proof washers and sliding it of the studs The orientation of the fan should be noted 2 Ensuring correct orientation figure 10 2 1d fit the new fan over the studs and secure using the fixings re moved in step 1 Ensure that the flow direction indicator arrow is pointing towards the inside of the instrument 3 Connect the fan connector and the power connector if previously disconnected and re assemble the cover to the rest of the unit Figure 10 2 1d Fan replacement 10 2 2 Battery replacement Please refer to the warnings and note given in section 10 1 2 above before touching the battery 1 Once the cover is open the exhausted battery located as shown in figure 10 2 1a can be prized out of its holder and the replacement fitted 2 Ensure that positive end of the battery is towards the sign printed on the circuit board near the battery holder There is usually a sign printed on the battery sleeve Chapter 10 HA261376 10 4 Issue 8 Jly 04 VISUAL SUPERVISOR HAN DBO OK 10 3 BATTERY REPLACEMENT OLDER UNITS The battery contained in the unit may be of type CR2032 lithium manganese dioxide coin cell or LS14250 Lithium thionyl Chloride 1 2AA size according to when the unit was manufactured If the battery is of the Lithium thionyl chloride ty
287. lave Repeater Repeater 4 No 5 Terminating Terminating resistors resistors Section 5 Section 6 To maximize Baud rate Terminating Master Master keep stub lengths to the resistors slave slave absolute minimum Master slave Typical tree bus layout with five repeaters allowing a maximum of 11 slaves to be fitted Figure 7 4 1 2b Typical tree bus layout HA261376 Chapter 7 Issue 8 Jly 04 7 7 VISUAL SUPERVISOR HAN DBO 7 4 2 Adding the unit to the network Once the unit has been physically connected UYP files and any gsd files for third party equipment can be trans ferred and the database started 7 5 TROUBLESHOOTING WARNING Fault finding may affect the network and control system Ensure that no damage to personnel or equipment can be caused by any fault finding activity 7 5 1 No communications 1 Check the wiring 2 Ensure that the node address is unique and within the range 1 to 125 inclusive 3 Ensure that the network has been correctly configured and that the configuration has been correctly transferred to the master 4 Verify that the GSD and uyp files being used are correct 5 Ensure that the maximum line length of transmission line has not been exceeded for the Baud rate in use Table 71 3 above 6 Ensure that the final node on the transmission line no matter what type of instrument it is is terminated correctly using a terminator unit Note that some
288. length 8 5 File 4 16 Modbus PUSS M M RM RUD UN 3 11 p MI E uuu 673 DGM eee dee aie 6 11 6 14 Diagnostic function codes 6 8 Function Codes ie Decision 6 2 Id value ele 3 2 Gateway overview 6 1 Identity EE 8 4 Implementation 6 9 Importing application data 4 47 Interface performance 6 10 Initial page declaration 4 5 46 4 23 Inserting a 4 8 Monitoring a program 3 9 3 10 Installation Electtibalt cuc un eost a a 1 8 eI REI E 1 4 Instrument base E E TT 4 16 ing ates E E 4 4 Data cloning Audit mob uem 8 1 Setting Up suerte tu 4 35 4 25 Intellectual Property Right Protection RENNE E 4 m 55 manager ey eee eee TT IN 4 55 New US M E 89 85 Iteration number of 3 6 y ELE E Ex f It b 4 E 13 Oe No of decimal 5 68 J Node number
289. lt text gt is the text The dictionary can hold a maximum of 200 records each consisting of up to 32 characters THE PROGRAMMER TEXT DICTIONARY The Programmer text dictionary holds user generated text items for display by the Setpoint Program Editor For more details refer to The Setpoint Program Editor Handbook part no HA261134U005 Entries are user text so the items when written are held in the User text dictionary _user uyl The syntax of each record is P lt N gt lt text gt where lt N gt is the index number of the record lt text gt is the text The dictionary can hold 200 records each up to 16 characters long HA261376 Chapter 5 Issue 8 Jly 04 5 35 VISUAL SUPERVISOR HAN DBO 5 7 PANEL NAVIGATION This describes how to access the menu system in order to perform a task and achieve an objective This section consists of 1 The Panel Navigation file Section 5 7 1 The versions Coding The Bare Panel version system pnl Coding The Application Panel version _default pnl Editing the default pnl file Section 5 7 2 3 Line types Section 5 7 3 Panel Agent declaration Panel Driver declaration Home Page declaration Root Page declaration Initial Page declaration 4 Agenttypes Section 5 7 4 The architecture of the Standard Interface is coded in the Panel Navigation file more usually called the pn file This section of the manual describes the Panel Navigation file and how to edit it
290. ly 04 VISUAL SUPERVISOR HAN DBO 7 4 INSTALLATION 7 4 1 Wiring The cable details given on this page refer to standard 150W Profibus cable For Category 5 users a document entitled Installation Guidelines for Profibus networks is available from the manufacturer under part number HA261788 The Profibus link is terminated at the connection module using an RJ45 connector as described in section 1 3 1 of this manual 7 4 1 1 EARTHING THE SHIELD The PROFIBUS standard suggests that both ends of the transmission line be connected to safety earth If such a course is followed care must be taken to ensure that differences in local earth potential do not allow circulating cur rents to flow as these can not only induce large common mode signals in the data lines resulting in communications failure but can also produce potentially dangerous heating in the cable Where doubt exists it is recommended that the shield be earthed at only one point in each section of the network 7 4 1 2 NETWORK WIRING There are two distinct ways of wiring a network known as Linear topology and Tree topology In a linear network figure 7 4 1 2a the maximum number of repeaters is three giving a total number of stations of 122 In theory the tree set up figure 7 4 1 2b can have more stations but the PROFIBUS protocol limits the number of stations includ ing repeaters to 127 addresses 0 to 126 It is up to the user to deter
291. m the pick list Any changes are reversed on leaving the page Relay Test Health Relay CLOSED Run Relay OPEN Comms LED OPEN Figure 1 7 2 Relay Test display page 1 7 3 Reset instrument Touching this key causes the instrument to re initialise itself as if being powered down then up again To carry out the reset touch OK If reset is not required quit the page by touching the menu key Reset Instrument Confirming OK will reset the instrument if you do not wish to then exit from this page OK Press menu key to quit Figure 1 7 3 Reset instrument display HA261376 Chapter 1 Issue 8 Jul 04 1 25 VISUAL SUPERVISOR HAN DBO This page is deliberately left blank Chapter 1 HA261376 1 26 Issue 8 Jul 04 VISUAL SUPERVISO CHAPTER 2 GETTING STARTED This chapter is for all prospective users of the instrument including those responsible for installing and commission ing it The chapter consists of the following sections 2 1 Switch on and the opening display including the navigation keys 2 2 The Main pane information entry and display 2 3 The Pop up menu 2 4 The Program pane 2 5 The Programmer menu 2 6 The Alarm pane 2 7 The Logging pane 2 8 The Access pane 2 9 The floppy disk 2 10 Creating a database automatically 2 1 SWITCH ON AND THE OPENING DISPLAY 2
292. mands segment type names and text in menus and column heads are held elsewhere and cannot be customised In customising the System dictionary it is possible to 1 replace any text item with text for a particular industry or application and or 2 the text can be internationalised by creating new dictionaries for each of up to ten languages 5 2 1 File structure In the listing of the System text dictionary in section 5 2 4 the column header running throughout is NO CONTEXT CLASS MAX TEXT No Stands for REFERENCE NUMBER CONTEXT Describes the application to which the text relates For example STARTUP COMMS or CLOCK CLASS Describes the type of text For example title of a dialogue box button text or error message MAX The maximum permissible length of the replacement text in number of characters TEXT The default text that the instrument is supplied with for this item Chapter 5 HA261376 5 2 Issue 8 Jly 04 VISUAL SUPERVISOR HAN DBO OK 5 2 2 Editing system text The System text dictionary is held in the _system uyl file In the print out of this file in section 5 2 4 1 Find the text to be replace first find its Context then its Class then the Text itself 2 Note its reference number 3 Key in the reference number and then the new text related by the following syntax S lt N gt lt text gt where lt gt is the reference number of the record you want to change lt text gt is the replacement
293. ment It is possible to change this to show the start time and or the end time of the segment in addition to the duration or it can be changed to show start time only If start time only is selected the segment is edited by specifying how far into the program the segment is due to start not in terms of the segment duration In this case the time displayed for each segment must be greater than the preceding segment and less than the following segment To change these options press the LAYOUT button at the bottom of the Se Program Editor screen Editor Layout Long SP names 0 gt In Segment start Ana In Segment duration WHS Dig in Segment finish Dig in The Editor Layout window appears offering four fields to edit Press any field to alternate between YES and NO DONE Dig in The Long SP Names field re formats the display to permit names up to 16 LOAD SAVE SAVE NEW characters long but this will reduce the number of cells visible The settings for segment timing are not preserved across power failure However it is possible to switch between settings at any time as this has no effect on the actual program merely on how the data is presented Chapter 4 HA261376 4 14 Issue 8 Jly 04 VISUAL SUPERVISOR HAN DBO OK 4 2 LOGGING GROUPS OF DATA A group
294. mine which is the most cost effective way of organising the layout 7 4 1 3 CABLE TYPE Table 7 4 1 3 below gives the specification for a suitable cable such as Belden B3079A Cable capacitance Signal attenuation Impedance Resistance Core diameter Cable type Shielding 135 to 165 ohms at 3 to 20 MHz A 110 Ohms km TS 30 pF metre 0 34mm2 max 22 awg Ls Twisted pair 1x1 2x2 or 4x1 lines assy 9dB max over total length of line section es Cu shielding braid or shielding braid and shielding foil 7 4 1 4 MAXIMUM BAUD RATE Table 7 4 1 3 Cable specification The maximum transmission speed depends on the length of the cable run including stub distance from the bus to a station lengths Guaranteed minimum values are given below 100 12 000 200 1 500 400 500 Table 7 4 1 4 Maximum Baud rate versus line length 1000 187 5 1200 93 75 Line length segment metres Max Baud rate kbit sec HA261376 Issue 8 Jly 04 Chapter 7 Page 7 5 VISUAL SUPERVISOR HAN DBO 7 4 1 WIRING Cont Terminating Terminating resistors resistors Section 1 slave slave slave slave slave Repeater Terminating Terminating resistors resistors Section 2 Master Master Master slave slave slave Repeater Terminating Terminating resistors resistors Section 3 T
295. mouth to an unconscious person May result in pulmonary cedema Remove to fresh air If breathing is difficult administer oxygen If breathing has stopped administer artificial respiration Ingestion Inhalation REACTIVITY DATA STABILITY Conditions to avoid Do not short circuit recharge over discharge i e to below 0 0 Unstable Volts puncture crush or expose to temperatures above 120 C do not store in high humidity environments for extended periods Stable Yes Hazardous decomposition products Decomposes in water to give Sulphur Dioxide 502 Hydrogen Chloride and strongly acidic wastewater Hazardous polymerisation Will not occur SPILL OR LEAK PROCEDURES Internal contents are extremely hazardous Leaking Fluid is corrosive The cell may explode at high temperatures Do not breath vapours or touch liquids with bare hands see first aid procedures above Evacuate area If possible a trained person wearing suitable breathing apparatus should attempt to stop or contain the leak with soda lime or baking soda sodium bicarbonate NaHCO Once contained the leaking battery and soda lime baking soda should be sealed in a polythene bag and disposed of as Hazardous waste Contact should be avoided DISPOSAL Batteries must be disposed of according to current local regulations for Lithium thionyl chloride batteries They may not be disposed of as normal waste SPECI
296. n an exception response from a gateway in slave mode Code Name Meaning current implementation 01 Illegal function The function is illegal or not supported within the Modbus gateway 02 Illegal data address The address referenced does not exist in the slave device 03 Illegal data value The value in the data field is invalid 04 Failure in associated device 05 Acknowledge 06 Busy rejected message 07 NAK negative acknowledgement 08 Write error The data has been write protected via a bit in the appropriate table diag nostic register 091 Zone overlap Codes implemented in the controller supervisor OA Header error slave mode OB Slave absent Supplementary codes defined by the JBUS CRC error specification OD Transmission blocked Table 6 1 5 1 Exception responses from a slave 6 1 6 Notes on Modbus J BUS implementation Although based on the original Modbus specification different manufacturers implementations vary slightly in the correspondence between the actual register or bit addresses in a PLC for example and the Modbus JBUS address i e the protocol address It is this protocol address that is to be configured in the Modbus gateway implementation 6 1 6 1 MODBUS AEG MODICON Read only input and read write output registers and bits are assigned to separate tables each with its own ad dress offset relative to the Modbus protocol
297. n entry of 6 5 results in a format of xxxxx N Causes the following items to appear on a new line For some types of printer a carriage return R may also be needed As shown in figure 5 9 1a it is possible for a status line to be printed out according to the value of the variable In the example given the entry PID1 pv gt 30 0 lt 90 0 Cold OK Hot means that if the value of PID1 is 30 0 or more but less than or equal to 90 0 the word OK is printed If the value is below 30 0 the word Cold is printed and if the value is above 90 0 the word Hot is printed It is possible to use alarm limits as the limit values and also to use dictionary entries for the limit text e g PID1 PV gt Pid LL_SP lt PID1 HL_SP U10 U11 U14 would print the text string held in item 11 of the User dictionary if the value of PIDI lies between the limits If the value lies below the lower limit the message held in U10 is printed and if the value lies above the upper limit the text held U14 is printed For Boolean variables which are either false or true the format is Variable false text true text For example Pid7 mode Manual would cause the word Manual to be printed when Pid7 mode becomes True but nothing will be printed when the value becomes False System variables some of which are listed in table 5 9 1 1b can be used to include system information in the report In the example of
298. n the Event log 2 The mis typing of FTP passwords is included in the count of failed attempts to log in section 4 4 3 2 and therefore may result in the account being disqualified 3 Attempts to login to non FTP accounts are not included in the count of failed attempts to log in TIMEOUT FTP users are automatically logged out after 2 minutes of inactivity This happens regardless of any values for user timeout which have been set at the instrument user interface 9 1 2 File system The file system as viewed via FTP is seen as a simple set of folders with the characteristics shown in table 9 1 2 Notes 1 Itis not possible to access the floppy disk or USB bulk storage device via FTP 2 Itis not possible to create new folders via FTP FTP LIN Write Name device Description Permission Visibility E Internal flash memory for application files Yes If IPRP not enabled history H Internal archive if fitted No If archive fitted Table 9 1 2 File system 9 1 3 Archive File Transfer If Review software or any other FTP client is used to transfer files from the internal archive to a PC then it is recom mended a That the user account attribute configuration includes FTP Yes and View Only Yes and b The access level for this account be set to Operator c The account is used only for this purpose HA261376 Chapter 9 Issue 8 Jul 04 9 1 VIS
299. nabled and is shown in the normal blue colour on the screen The expiry date re mains as first set up for the user NAME Operating this button calls the Name pop up to the screen For new users whose details have not yet been Saved the name can be edited Otherwise as shown in figure 8 1 3c this is a View only function Name LinMan1 CANCEL Figure 8 1 3c Name pop up ATTRIBUTES Touching a particular user s Attributes cell calls the Attributes page This is used to define the Identity richard users ability to sign and authorise changes and to define whether the user can modify the dE TES View Only NO Admin Only NO instruments operation The numbers which appear in the attributes column can be decoded as shown in table 8 1 3 Remote No Thevalues are additive so if for example Sign and Authorise are both selected Yes and OK CANCEL all other fields are selected No then the attributes value would be 00000003 Authorise View only Admin only Remote Display No No No No 00000000 No No No 00000001 Yes No No 00000002 No Yes No 00000004 No No No 00000010 No No No 00001000 No No Yes 00002000 Table 8 1 3 Attribute coding Chapter 8 HA261376 Page 8 4 Issue 8 Jul 04 VISUAL SUPERVISOR HAN DBO 8 1 3 USER ID CONTROL Cont EXPIRES This column shows the expiry
300. nd USER SCREENS displays are view only at this locked stage only ACCESS will respond fully to menu and key selections to grant access as described in Section 2 8 Gaining access The functions of each pane ACCESS With a valid password this pane is the gateway to the functions sets below that are needed to do the job SYSTEM is the gateway to the system functions of the instrument that is the instrument specific and application specific functions as opposed to the program specific functions ALARMS is the gateway to the alarm functions PROGRAMMER If configured this is the gateway to the programming Engineer functions of editing setpoint programs This key is also the gateway to the operational Operator functions of loading running pausing and aborting setpoint programs RECIPE If configured this allows access to the recipe monitoring and editing functions BATCH If configured this provides a means by which batches can be loaded started and monitored LOGGING If configured this is the gateway to the data logging functions OVERVIEW If configured this provides an overview of the function blocks in the database with informa tion about each HOME USER SCREENS _ If configured this returns you to the Home page The Home page may be a single page or it may be the root page of a user written hierarchy of pages If HOME USER SCREENS is not configured the System Summary page acts as a default Home page displayed after a timeou
301. needs of the job and they gain access to that level by typing in a password The level of access is fixed for each type of user That is to say all Operators share the same password to their level of access all Commissioning Engineers share the same password to their level of access and all Engineers share the same password to their level of access The Engineer level password gives access to every facility in the instrument Only from Engineer level can passwords be changed The hierarchy of levels is LOCKED lowest OPERATOR next lowest COMMISSION middle ENGINEER highest You need a password to change up levels but not to change down No password is needed for Locked What follows are step by step instructions on how to navigate the menu system to get access to your level of facili ties The assumption is that you have your password ready Passwords are set and re set by the Engineer For first time access immediately after commissioning Section 4 4 Controlling Access should be referred to HA261376 Chapter 2 Issue 8 Jly 04 2 13 VISUAL SUPERVISOR HAN DBO OK 2 8 1 1 STANDARD ACCESS Cont 1 With the instrument powered up press the right most of the keys below 2 Press ACCESS key the screen the menu key In the Main pane the restricted version of the pop up menu figure 2 3 ACCESS SYSTEM appears The program pane shows RESET on a white background indicating that there is no program loade
302. ng of Modbus registers to points in a LIN database The mapping between the two is configured by the user Chapter 6 HA261376 Page 6 2 Issue 8 Jly 04 VISUAL SUPERVISOR HAN DBO 6 1 2 PRINCIPLES OF OPERATION Cont The gateway functions by keeping a copy of the relevant parameters in Modbus format This copy is updated from the slave s database by a scanner task running in the gateway This task regularly examines each value in both database and copy If it finds that a database value has changed since last time it transfers the new value to the copy ready to be read by the master at the next poll request If the scanner finds that a value in the copy has been updated by the master it writes that value to the database When a master reads a value across the Modbus the data is transmitted from the copy Note To maximise communications efficiency dynamic data should be grouped so that it is available in contiguous table entries for a multi parameter read MODBUS registers or bits LIN database blocks copy in slave instrument update value from database transfer new value from copy SL Mode to remote PV SL Mode from remote Master Figure 6 1 2 Slave mode operation 6 1 2 1 REFRESH RATES AND TIMING INFORMATION This section describes the calculations used for determining refresh rates Refer to section 6 1 7 below for typical figures Slave mode response time Defined
303. ngaged for it to be lifted clear 10 Place the relay board to one side The interconnect board is visible below with the jumper sockets just beyond and to each side of the Modbus connector To insert the appropriate jumper s 11 Determine visually whether figure 1 4 1 or figure 1 4 2 later instruments applies 12 Remove and insert the jumper s in accordance with the table associated with the relevant figure 13 Re assembly is the reverse of part of the above procedure steps 9 to 2 14 Finally with no application loaded bring up the Comms Setup page and press the Option menu HARDWARE button In the Comms Setup display Row 2 will update to show the new configuration E 4 lt J2 and J3 are shown with links between pins 1 and 3 and between pins 2 and 4 J4 and J5 are shown open 1 n a Relay Connector Master and Slave connectors Keyboard beneath Connector 3 J COMMUNICATIONS LINK SETTINGS Master Master Slave Slave unterminated terminated unterminated terminated LU lt LJ o u e c m EIA422 J2 Open J2 Link 1 amp 3 2 amp 4 J3 Open J3 Link 1 amp 3 2 amp 4 5 wire J4 Open J4 Open J5 Open J5 Open 485 42 J2 Link 1 amp 3 J3 Open J3 Link 1 amp 3 3 wire J4 Link 1 amp 3 2 amp 4 J4 Link 1 amp 3 2 amp 4 45 Link 1 amp 3 284 J5 Link 1 amp 3 2 amp
304. night For example a value of 1 5 would represent 1 Jan 1900 at noon The example in the previous column represents 30 September 1998 at 10 mins and 5 secs past midday that is 30 09 98 at 12 10 05 980930121005 An integer count of seconds since 31 Dec 1899 at 0 hours 00 04 30 00 A text format for expressing the time since start of logging The example represents 4hrs 30mins since start of logging 0 1875 Choose this format for data to be exported to a spreadsheet A single floating point value The example represents 4hrs 30mins since start of logging 00032000 Days Hours Minutes Seconds since start of logging The example represents 3hrs 20mins since start of logging Table 4 2 1 Date formats for logs HA261376 Issue 8 Jly 04 Chapter 4 Page 4 17 VISUAL SUPERVISOR HAN DBO 4 3 MANAGING AN APPLICATION This section describes the stopping saving starting unloading loading running and deleting of applications using the STOP SAVE START UNLOAD LOAD LD RUN and DELETE keys that appear at the foot of the Application Manager page UNLOAD and DELETE For many processes the Visual Supervisor will control one application all the time This will be loaded and run at commissioning or soon after and thereafter will never be unloaded and will never be de leted For many processes therefore UNLOAD and DELETE will not be used STOP SAVE and START All processes will use STOP SAVE and START because an a
305. nt Section Page Chapter 8 ADMINISTRATIVE FUNCTIONS eene 8 1 8 1 NETWORK AUDIT TRAIL cte PT 8 1 8511 te eds tede sop pata eU 8 2 8 1 2 CONFIGURATION 2 2120 8 2 CONSUMER SELECTION ii anes 8 2 AUDIT TRAIL FILTERING Rr rr pe bp BERI EHE 8 2 PARAMETERS itte Etre e o o e ex pa re Eds 8 2 8 1 3 User ID control actio t o teer err pr etre 8 3 SECURITY ACCESS DISPLAY PAGE 8 3 EXPIRES 8 5 SCREEN KEYS erp en ed 8 5 8 2 ELECTRON IG SIGNATURES tee eed aee 8 10 8 2 1 Enabling electronic signatures 2 44 8 10 8 2 2 Signature 4 memes 8 11 ACCESS LEVELS itr oret be ete et eec pere d c Rui 8 11 Chapter 9 REMOTE 5 9 1 QT Last tte o eot Pa ped us 9 1 9 Tel ete pne ET 9 1 it ee et hh terret 9 1 9 1 2 File pe e m ter appear RE Ex 9 1 9 1 3 Archive File Transfers ti t bte ee honte ttl tered neds 9 1 Chapter 10 PREVENTIVE 10 1 10 1 LARGE FRAME FAN BATTERY 10 1 10 1 1 Fan replac
306. nt type 1800 SUMMARY ACCESS APP MGR SETUP TEST CREATE MAINT Media FLOPPY Option cards lt NONE gt No application loaded Auto Database Create Create a database from nodes 1 8 Programmer YES Logging YES Loops NO 1 0 Modules YES I O Channels NO CREATE If 2500 I O is to be viewed I O Modules for most efficient communications or I O Channels for most detailed information should be selected YES It is not recommended to select both YES PROGRAMMER Selecting Programmer to Yes results in the following 1 A Pre Plot display is set up 2 If one does not already exist a sample program file a UYS file when SAVEd is created which has the same name as the saved database More details in Chapter 5 3 A display group for the program is set up LOGGING Setting logging to sets up logging to a single ASCII file for all the program variables for the auto created UYS file More details are to be found in Chapters 3 and 4 LOOPS Setting Loops to YES sets up a display group for all loops I O Setting I O to YES 1 Uses the definition of I O required by the 2500 to determine what I O is to be set up 2 Sets up display groups for the I O Chapter 2 HA261376 2 18 Issue 8 04 VISUAL SUPERVISO HANDBOOK 2 10 2 Database creation Once all th
307. nter device block PGROUP Printer Group RECORDING DR ALARM Filters alarms and events DR ANCHP Data recording analog channel point block DR DGCHP Data recording digital channel point block DR REPRT Report generator SELECTOR 2OF3 VOTE Selects best input from three averaging only the inputs in tolerance ALC Alarm collection producing a common logic O P SELECT Outputs the highest middle and lowest inputs or median of 2 3 or 4 SWITCH Single pole double throw switch for analogue signals TAG Specifies a user task loop tagname selected from list of eight tags SPP SPP_CTRL Monitors schedules and controls program running SPP_DIG Wires out digital setpoints from the setpoint program SPP_EXT Programmer extended functions SPP_RAMP Local Ramp TIMING DELAY Delay for dead time applications RATE_ALM Up down rate alarm applied to PV OP held at last non alarm value RATE_LMT Rate limiter and ramp generator SEQ Multi segment slope level time 15 O P digitals SEQE SEQ extender TIMEDATE Clock and calendar event TIMER Timer TOTAL Totaliser integrator for analogue variable TOT_CON Totalisation connector block TPO Time proportioning block Produces a pulse stream with mark space ratio proportional to its analogue input value Appendix A HA261376 PageA 6 Issue 8 Jly 04 VISUAL SUPERVSO HANDBOOK APPENDIX B ORDERING INFORMATION The Visual Supervisor is preconfigured according to the ordering codes shown in the third column of table
308. ntinues as normal Touch top left target Figure 10 4 Initial calibration display screen Chapter 10 HA261376 Page 10 6 Issue 8 Jly 04 VISUAL SUPERVISOR HAN DBO OK APPENDIX A TECHNICAL SPECIFICATION General specification In order to comply fully with BS EN61010 all I O and hardware alarms must be enabled Physical 1 4 VGA Dimensions Bezel Cutout Depth W eight Screen Type Display area Touch panel Character set 144 x 144 mm 138 x 138 mm 180 mm case X mm cabling where X 50 for Category 5 cable with RJ45 connectors 2 83 kg 1 4 VGA TFT colour 111x84 mm Resistive analogue Unicode Latin 1 Physical SVGA Dimensions Bezel 288 288 mm Cutout 281x281 mm Depth 254 mm case X mm cabling where X 50 for Category 5 cable with RJ45 connectors W eight 6 12 kg Screen Type SVGA TFT colour Display 245 x 183 mm Touch panel Resistive analogue Character set Unicode Latin 1 Environmental Temperature Storage 10 to 85 C Operation 0 to 50 C Humidity Storage 5 to 95 RH non condensing O peration 5 to 85 RH non condensing RFI Emissions BS EN 50081 1 Susceptibility BS EN 500822 Electrical Safety BS EN 61010 1 2001 Installation category Il Pollution degree 2 Vibration BS EN 60873 Section 9 18 Shock BS EN 60068 2 31 BS EN 60873 Section 9 12 Protection Front panel IP65 SVG A IP54 1 4 VGA Power Requirem
309. nued HA261376 Chapter 5 Issue 8 Jly 04 Page 5 37 VISUAL SUPERVISOR HAN DBO 5 7 1 1 THE VERSIONS Cont Coding Sample Application Panel version _default pnl Quarter VGA Driver D1 QVGA Home page is first User Page or will default to Overview else System Summary as this has the lowest Id in the main pane HI Initial page first page after power up is the user screen 100 if present I100 Root Menu R1000 A1000 MENU 3 4000 2000 9000 1500 3000 7000 5000 1 System Submenu A2000 MENU 3 S 130 S 131 2010 2200 2300 2080 A2010 SYS_SUM A2080 CLONE 4 Application sub submenu A2200 MENU 3 5396 S397 2020 2210 2220 2230 A2020 APP_SUM 2210 4 0 2220 3 5900 5901 2240 2241 2230 3 4 0 A2240 DIAGNOST 4 0 Setup sub submenu 2300 3 5398 5399 2030 2040 2050 2060 2070 A2030 STARTUP 3 A2040 COMMS 4 A2050 CLOCK 3 A2060 INTERNAT 4 A2070 PANEL 2 Continued Chapter 5 HA261376 5 38 Issue 8 Jly 04 VISUAL SUPERVISOR HAN DBO 5 7 1 1 THE VERSIONS Cont Programmer A3000 SPP MENU 2 3 3 3010 010 5 2 3 2 3000 1500 Security Access A4000 ACCESS Logging Submenu LOGGING has 4 entry points 5000 2 3 5700 5701 5010 5011 5012 5013 A5010 LOG 2 3 2 Area Group Point displays 1500 1 2 2 7000 _ 2 3 3 7010 A7010 RECIPE 2 3 2 7000 Batch A800
310. o 9 used to make numeric entries decimal point used to make numeric entries toggles the sign of the entered value Function keys plus the above This allows the keyboard function keys to mimic the instrument navigation keys as shown in figure 2 1 3 3 The keys are described in section 2 1 3 2 above APMIS oY 2 UP DOWN LEFT RIGHT CYCLE OPTION MENU F1 F2 F3 F4 SCREENS F9 F10 F8 Figure 2 1 3 3 Function key operation 4 Full PC Keyboard In addition to the above functions this allows direct entry of text strings etc The esc key closes an open pop up without entering any edited data The lt 4 t gt back arrow key performs a back space function during text entry Chapter 2 HA261376 2 4 Issue 8 Jly 04 VISUAL SUPERVISO 2 1 4 The opening display Note if the system has been configured with an overview screen then the opening display will be that overview screen refer to section 3 6 The opening display of the Standard Interface is the System Summary page depicted in figure 2 1 4 below RESET dn System Summary Variant Standard Touch keypad TOUCH KEYPAD Firmware V4 0 DRAM 4092 kBytes SRAM 256 kBytes FLASH 4096 kBytes Media FLOPPY IDE Option cards lt NONE gt Figure 2 1 4 System Summary page The System Summary page confi
311. o is responsible for configuring the instru ment Control of Substances Hazardous to Health This is the procedure by which a user can construct a Home page and sometimes other user screens See LIN database Dictionary files hold items of text for display on the screen Users can edit replace or delete many of the items Electromagnetic compliance The Home page is that which is displayed on power up and to which the display returns when no data has been entered during a specified time out period It can also be called up at any time The Home page will either stand on its own or be the root page of a hierarchy of user written pages LIN database stands for Local Instrument Network database a Eurotherm proprietary facility For any Eurotherm instrument the LIN database is a set of software function blocks that constitutes its control strategy The manufacturer and or OEMs select particular function blocks from a library of LIN database function blocks to build a particular control strategy for that instrument The LIN database of an instrument forms part of its application See tion A log group is a set of points that are logged archived together onto removable media for review off line Same as Archiving Original Equipment Manufacturer I E any organisation that buys Visual Supervisors incorpo rates them into its own products and sells these products onto other customers under its own name
312. o maximize Baud rate keep stub lengths to the absolute minimum Master Master Master slave slave slave Maximum line length per section is related to Baud rate set at Master as per table 7 4 1 4 above Line length includes sum of stub lengths Typical linear bus layout with two repeaters allowing up to 14 slaves to be fitted A maximum of three repeaters is allowed allowing up to 13 slaves to be fitted Figure 7 4 1 2a Typical linear bus layout Chapter 7 HA261376 7 6 Issue 8 04 VISUAL SUPERVISOR HAN DBO OK 7 4 1 WIRING Cont Maximum line length for each section is related to Baud rate set at Master as per table 7 4 1 4 above Line length includes sum of stub lengths Terminating Terminating resistors resistors Section 1 Master Master Master slave slave slave Repeater 1 Terminating Terminating resistors resistors Section 2 Master Master Master Master slave slave slave slave Repeater Repeater No2 No Terminating Terminating Terminating resistors resistors resistors Section 3 Section 4 Master Master slave s
313. oading and Running 4 22 Setpoint value 4 6 Management 4 18 Start up Strategy 4 4 4 40 Manager secte esee UMS 4 19 Clock Setup page 4 41 au ete tte 4 52 Glornitig 4 46 Selection DIEM PN 4 22 data 4 49 4 20 4 50 Application data ese 4 47 SUMMAry page 4 19 Instrument 4 48 Unloading e 4 21 System data 4 48 APPLN d E hao M 4 19 Cold Start 2 2 491 0 4 9 4 40 Archiving Commission level 4 28 2 19 5 ntis 4 35 ce 4 16 Communications 44 04404 4 4 35 ARCNET connectors 1 11 Available protocols 44 11 4 37 3 21 Parameter setting 4 35 Arhive Profiles iuter 4 47 File transfer ath dotted ns 9 1 Selecting EIA422 or EIA485 Attributes 4 32 Large frame 4 4 000 1 23 Small frame 1 22
314. ock ordering 2404 4 ddr diag loop5 2 moduls 5 2500 5 db diag mod5 01 pnl diag 2500 6 edbtable mod5 02 ramp5 1 alindiag edb diag mod5 03 ramp5 2 alh diag ise diag mod5 04 sppctr1 amc diag lin dext mod5 05 SppDig areal 1 5 1 5 06 T800 lt Il Cycle screens key only on SGVA versions Note For the sake of simplicity only those function blocks shown in figure 4 3 9b have been included in the above figure In reality function blocks hidden off screen in figure 4 3 9b would replace some of those shown above Chapter 4 Page 4 26 HA261376 Issue 8 Jly 04 VISUAL SUPERVISOR HAN DBO 4 3 9 2 FUNCTION BLOCK DETAILS Note This functionality applies only to instruments fitted with software versions 2 7 onwards Once a function block has been highlighted touching the down arrow key or cycle screens key if fitted displays block details Block name Block type and update rate figure 4 3 9 2 With the data base stopped the Delete key allows function blocks to be deleted from the database A further operation of the down arrow or cycle screens key calls the function block Connections page If the data base is stopped this page allows the adding deleting modifying of the function block In the case of subfields a number is displayed which is the number of connections when the database is running or the number of con necta
315. ock will reference a reader file UYD file These files allow for the match ing of bar codes and performing the corresponding actions required by those bar codes EXAMPLE Cr h 3 GOTO 1 r a _ALM_LVL ACK_ALL GOTO 9010 Qr temp PID1 SL 4W2 deg r 09 Prog RqNxtPrg 8W ST Prog NxtRdy TRUE Notes 1 The first line will match if the input is h plus any trailing characters It will cause the panel to jump to the home page user page with Id 1 2 second line will match if the input is plus any trailing characters and there are some active or unacknowledged alarms It will cause acknowledgement of all alarms and jump to the Alarm History page access level permitting or overridden 3 The third line will accept input such as temp98 4deg no trailing characters permitted and will assign the value 98 4 to PID1 SL provided the current access level is 2 or higher and not overridden 4 The fourth line will accept a TAB character followed by e g MyProg99 and will load and run the program via the ProgCtrl function block Prog 5 15 1 Overview A UYD file contains an ordered set of potential patterns to be matched When a bar code is read each of these is checked in turn in the order they appear in the file until a match is found i e if there is the potential to match more than one line in the file the first one will be matched Each test lin
316. of registers with default addresses 16 to 31 allows individual tables in the configuration to be moni tored and controlled Each register in the diagnostic table is automatically allocated to an entire table in the configu ration Specifically the diagnostic register at default address 16 is assigned to table 1 the register at address 17 is assigned to table 2 and so on up to table 16 HA261376 Chapter 6 Issue 8 Jly 04 Page 6 7 VISUAL SUPERVISOR HAN DBO 6 1 3 USING THE DIAGNOSTIC TABLE Cont 6 1 3 3 SLAVE MODE DIAGNOSTIC TABLE REGISTERS The slave mode diagnostic register includes bits that allow monitoring and control of the associated Modbus table by an application running in the database Figure 6 2 shows the allocation of the bits in the register The values in the register are used in the following way F le p e e 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 uec a Reserved Disable write Reserved Online Figure 6 1 3 3 Diagnostic registers Disable write Setting this bit disables writes across the Modbus serial link to the associated table The slave will return error code 8 see Table 6 4 Exception responses Online This bit is set to 1 if the table has been written to or read from in the period defined in Time out in the SETUP menu 6 1 4 Diagnostic function codes Table 6 1 4 summarises how the common Modbus diagnostic function codes have been supported by the gateway in slave mode The diagnostics ar
317. of the output Mode Shows the current mode Auto Manual or Remote Alarm The alarm beacon is red if the block is in alarm The beacon is continuously red if the alarm has ben acknowledged or flashes if unacknowledged Mode select These buttons allow the mode to be selected as R Remote A Auto or M Manual 3 6 3 Display modes Group data can be displayed in a number of formats as listed below When a group is touched in the area display section 3 6 1 above it will appear in the format last used Other modes are scrolled to by means of the down arrow key The display modes are described below in the order in which they appear after a power up This order is User screen if one has been set up not described here Faceplate display Numeric Vertical bargraph _ Horizontal bargraph Down arrow Option key Vertical trend with point faceplates bay Vertical trend full width without faceplates Horizontal trend with point faceplates Horizontal trend full width without faceplates Each of the above mentioned displays supplies a real time display of point data By using the option key then VIEW trend displays become trace history displays In such displays real time trending stops although it is still held in the database for later display and using various control sliders the history of the traces can be displayed at a selectable magnification
318. on a text editor and loaded into the database The format is as follows Field Address Type Operations Where Underlined items do not need to be included if the defaults are acceptable Field is the name of the LIN database block being mapped and Address is the required register of the point being accessed This entry can be a simple decimal number or it can be of the form Constanti1 Constant2 Field name tConstant3 Where Constants 1 2 and 3 are a simple decimal numbers Field name is any field name in the block which has a 16 bit integer value A sample expression might be 200 10 Slot No Chan_No 1 In which Constants 1 2 and 3 are 200 10 and 1 respectively and the field name is Slot_No Chan_No Type is number type This field needs to be entered only if the default Unsigned Integer UINT is not the correct type See table 7 3 for number type entries Operations One or more of RC WC RA WA where R read W write C cyclic A acyclic Default RC read cyclic If VOID is specified this field is disabled i e it will not communicate This feature is provided to allow the disabling of communication for individual fields in standard DCM blocks HA261376 Chapter 7 Issue 8 Jly 04 7 3 VISUAL SUPERVISOR HAN DBO 7 3 THE FILE Cont Number type Number type definition entry BOOL Value of 0 or 1 in the LSB DINT Signed 32 bit register DINT X Signed 32 bit regist
319. onsumer diagnostics PMC_DIAG Profibus diagnostics PNL_DIAG T800 front panel information RSRCDIAG Database and system resource diagnostics SFC_DIAG Sequence diagnostics block XEC_DIAG Task diagnostics HA261376 Appendix A Issue 8 Jly 04 Page A 5 VISUAL SUPERVISOR HAN DBO OK FUNCTION BLOCKS SUPPORTED Cont Category Block Function LOGIC AND4 4 input AND Boolean function COMPARE Indicates greater less than equal of two inputs COUNT UP DOWN pulse counter with START END count target LATCH D type flip flop function NOT NOT Boolean function OR4 4 input OR Boolean function PULSE Pulse output monostable function XOR4 4 input exclusive OR Boolean function MATHS ACTION Action control with use of stored variables and elapsed time ADD2 Adds two inputs DIGACT Action control with use of stored digital variables and elapsed time DIV2 Divides two inputs EXPR Free format maths expression with up to four inputs MUL2 Multiplies two inputs SUB2 Subtracts two inputs OPERATOR EVENT Act upon as audit trail event PNL CMD Panel Command PNL DLG Panel dialogue generation PNL MSG Panel message generation PNL ACC Access to panel system READER Bar code reader ORGANISE AREA Associates GROUP blocks into an AREA GROUP Associates display and recorder channels into a GROUP LOGDEV Specifies and controls access to an archive medium LGROUP Collects data from point blocks for archiving LOGGRPEX LGROUP extension block LPTDEV Pri
320. ontal time base PRE PLOT is a graphical version of MONITOR above but extended showing a plot of both target and actual variables A vertical cursor at the centre of the display marks the current time and the display moves from right to left past it showing on the left the actual values of the process variables PVs setpoints and digital outputs and on the right the required target setpoint profile Enables Engineers to edit and Operators to view the setpoints of the current program dis played in a table Runs a program from the start or re starts a program after a Hold from the point where it paused Stops a program running and holds it paused at that point Switches a program from Hold state to Idle Starts or re starts a process from a specified time into program These are the functions most frequently used in normal operation 2 61376 Issue 8 Jly 04 Chapter 2 Page 2 9 VISUAL SUPERVISOR HAN DBO OK 2 6 THE ALARM PANE The Alarm pane appears at the top right hand corner of the screen and is used to display any alarm signals triggered by abnormal conditions detected in the process under control instrument alarms etc NAT FINN Figure 2 6 A typical Alarm pane display In this particular example BADBAT means that voltage delivered by the battery has fallen below its operational threshold In general there are four possible types of alarm annunciation as summa
321. or inserting a segment except that 1 the DEL SEG key is used 2 the first segment of a program cannot be deleted the DEL SEG key is greyed out deactivated The setting is saved in the same way 4 1 6 Changing hold back properties Hold Back is a state that is automatically induced when the SP ramp rate is too fast for the process to be able to fol low it When the process has fallen behind the SP by an amount equal to a pre set holdback value then the SP ramp is stopped held until the PV catches up The Holdback value is set by the Engineer For example if the setpoint is ramping up but the PV has fallen behind and is now falling below the pre set lower bound the program will automatically switch the setpoint profile to a dwell to give the PV a chance to catch up The dwell will continue until the PV climbs above the lower bound whose profile of course could now also be a dwell At this point the setpoint profile will switch back to a ramp up The result of this is that the overall process time extends by the length of time during which the PV was out of bounds which is the same as the length of the dwell The remainder of this section explains which type of limit or limits can be set and how to set the values After setting the new values they are saved by pressing the option key at the bottom of the screen second key from the right On the Option bar that appears at the bottom of the screen press the
322. p to three E suite systems the Consumers Network Audit Trail is accessed from the Administration menu by operation of the NET AUDIT key as depicted in figure 8 1 below Administration NET AUDIT SIGN CONFIG 3 5 7800 BadBat Network Audit Trail Mode PROVIDER Destination node 1 LIN Node Alarm active Alarm cleared Alarm ack ed Cached alarms System event Block event Operator note Block value change Message active Message cleared Message ack ed Min alarm priority Min event priority A 3 Destination node 2 LIN Node Disabled Destination node 3 LIN Disabled SAVE CANCEL lt T Figure 8 1 Network Audit trail access HA261376 Chapter 8 Issue 8 Jul 04 8 1 VISUAL SUPERVISOR HAN DBO 8 1 1 Modes The function can be programmed in the following ways 1 Isolated The instrument displays only its own alarms and events Alarms and events are not transmitted to any other node 2 Provider As Isolated except that the unit can also transmit its alarms and events to up to three other Audit Trail consumers 3 Consumer The instrument displays its own alarms and events plus those of up to eight other Visual Supervisors Alarms and events are not transmitted to any other node The node number of the provider is prefixed to the relevant line s in Ala
323. pan Densei Lambda K K Strategic Products Dept 5F Nissay Aroma Square 37 1 Kamata 5 Chome Ohta ku Tokyo 144 8721 Telephone 81 3 5714 0620 Fax 81 3 5714 0621 e mail Sales k iwama densai lambda com e mail Technical v rendle densai lambda com http www densei lambda com Korea Eurotherm Korea Limited J Building 402 3 Poongnab Dong Songpa Ku Seoul 138 040 Telephone 82 2 478 8507 Fax 82 2 488 8508 Netherlands Eurotherm BV Genielaan 4 2404CH Alphen aan den Rijn The Netherlands Telephone 31 172 411 752 Fax 31 172 417 260 e mail Sales eurotherm nl http www eurotherm nl Norway Eurotherm A S Vollsveien 13D 1366 Lysaker Postboks 227 NO 1326 Lysaker Norway Telephone 47 67 592170 Fax 47 67 118301 http www eurotherm no Spain Eurotherm Espa a SA Pol Ind De Alcobendas Calle de la Granja 74 28108 Alcobendas Madrid Telephone 34 91 661 60 01 Fax 34 91 661 90 93 http www eurotherm es Sweden Eurotherm AB Lundavagen 143 5 21224 Malm Telephone 46 40 38 45 00 Fax 46 40 38 45 45 e mail info eurotherm se http www eurotherm se Switzerland Eurotherm Produkte Schweiz AG SchwerzistraBe 20 CH 8807 Freienbach Telephone 41 55 415 44 00 Fax 41 55 415 44 15 e mail epsag eurotherm ch http www eurotherm ch United States of America Eurotherm Recorders Inc 741 F Miller Drive Leesburg VA 20175 8993 Telephone 1 703 669 1342 Fax 1 703 669 1307 e mail Sales sales c
324. pe please refer to the Warnings and Note in section 10 1 2 above 1 Remove the top plate of the unit by removing the four M2 5 countersunk head securing screws A in figure 10 3a and the M3 pan head screw B in the figure Remove the four power supply securing screws two each side 3 The power supply unit can now be rotated out of the chassis giving access to the battery located on the intercon nection PCB figure 10 3b Figure 10 3c shows how to eject coin cells Figure 10 3a Top cover removal Instrument rear panel Press on tab to eject battery Figure 10 36 Battery location Figure 10 3c Coin cell eject Coin cell shown 1 2AA location similar HA261376 Chapter 10 Issue 8 Jly 04 Page 10 5 VISUAL SUPERVISOR HAN DBO 10 4 TOUCH SCREEN CALIBRATION This ensures that the image is positioned correctly relative to the TOUCH screen At switch on continuously hold a finger in contact with the display screen until the calibration display appears proximately 60 seconds after switch on as depicted in figure 10 4 Using a soft small diameter item e g a pencil point which will not damage the touch screen touch the intersection of the upper set of crosshairs as requested by the display Once the top left target has been accepted continue as requested by the display Once the targets have been accepted initialisation co
325. pplication has to be stopped to save application data to preserve cold start values if they need changing This is true even if the process runs only one application START simply restarts an application after a SAVE LOAD and LD RUN processes require a LOAD or LD RUN at least once These tasks are described under the following headings Displaying the Application Summary page section 4 3 1 Displaying the Application Manager page section 4 3 2 Stopping an application section 4 3 3 Saving application data section 4 3 4 Unloading an application section 4 3 5 Loading an application or Loading and running section 4 3 6 Deleting an application section 4 3 7 Displaying application diagnostics section 4 3 8 Function Block Manager section 4 3 9 If the very first application is being loaded and run on an instrument LOAD and then START or just LD RUN will be used If an application is already running and it is to be replaced by another the sequence from Displaying the Application Manager page to Loading an application or Loading and running should be referred to Application Summary and Function Block Manager provide useful summaries and overviews at any time Chapter 4 HA261376 Page 4 18 Issue 8 Jly 04 VISUAL SUPERVISOR HAN DBO OK 4 3 1 Application summary page This page displays the percentage of the instrument s various memory resources that are currently in use Press the Menu key and select S
326. pressure temperature and density GASCONC Contains gas concentration units in Mole units INVERT Analogue inversion block LEAD LAG Lead lag RANGE Re ranges an analogue input UCHAR 16 point characteriser for analogue input blocks CONFIG T800 System block T2900 System block CONTROL 3_TERM Incremental form of the PID block ANMS Analogue manual station AN_CONN Analogue connections DGMS Digital manual stations DG_CONN Digital connections MAN_STAT Manual station with connections to front panel displays MODE Control mode selection with push button masking PID PID control function PID_LINK Faceplate for SETPOINT 3_TERM MAN_STAT MODE combination SETPOINT Generates a setpoint with bias limits and alarms SIM Simulates two first order lags or capacity with noise TP_CONN Specifies up to nine fields as EEPROM tepid data at power down CONVERT ENUMENUM Converts between enumerated number types ENUMUINT Converts from enumerated type to integer type UINTENUM Converts from integer to enumerated type DCM D2X LOOP Access PIB control loop in 2200 2400 2500 D2X TUNE Tune PID loop in 220 2400 2500 D25 LOOP Access PID control loop in 2500 IOS D25eLOOP 2500E Version of 025 RAMP D25 TUNE Tune PID loop in 2500 IOS D25eTUNE 2500E Version of D25 TUNE D25 RAMP Ramp remote setpoint D25eRAMP 2500E Version of D25_RAMP D25 MOD Access single I O physical module in 2500 IOS D25 AD Access 2 channel analogue input module in 2500 IOS D25_AI3 Access 3 channel analogue
327. previous versions used cross head screws 3 Replace the fuse Part Number CH280252 located on the PSU board as shown in figure 1 3 6 3b 4 Re fit the top cover Original version Current version Figure 1 3 6 3a Top cover removal Type T 2A5 Anti surge Rear panel of instrument Figure 1 3 6 3b DC Fuse location view on top of the rear part of the instrument Chapter 1 HA261376 Page 1 20 Issue 8 Jul 04 VISUAL SUPERVISOR HAN DBO OK 1 3 6 4 FUSE REPLACEMENT large frame units Warning As hazardous voltages are generated by the power supply board the internal fuse may be replaced only with the supply voltage isolated and by trained personnel who are aware of the potential hazard Note This procedure refers to low voltage dc supply units only For high voltage units it is not recom mended that the fuse be replaced by the user The instrument manufacturer or the local agent or service centre should be contacted for advice See Appendix A for supply voltage definitions Note For units manufactured prior to June 2002 follow the instructions for Small frame units in section 1 3 6 3 above 1 Isolate the instrument from supply power 2 Release the combined top rear cover by removing the four countersunk screws marked
328. r Screen gt lt Display Group gt lt Message Filter gt lt User Item1 gt lt User Item6 gt Where lt User Screen gt is the number of a user screen page associated with the batch or 0 is none lt Display Group gt is the optional name of a GROUP block to be associated with the batch or blank if none lt Message Filter gt is the optional name of block to be used to give the context for message to be associated with this batch this may the name of the BAT_CTRL block itself or a GROUP block containing the BAT_CTRL plus other blocks of interest lt User Item gt specifies a title and value to be displayed on the BATCH start screen The value may be edited prior to starting the batch Each user item is of the form lt Title gt lt Value gt lt Width gt lt Initial value gt lt Attributes gt where lt Title gt is a dictionary reference of the lt Dict gt lt Index gt e g U12 lt Value gt is either a writeable dictionary value e g W12 or else a LIN dB value e g PID SL lt Width gt is the number of characters wide to display the value lt Initial value gt optional is the text value to be used to initialise a writeable dictionary entry value For example U13 user dictionary entry 13 The value may only be another dictionary reference and must be applied at load lt Attributes gt optional Can have one of the following W Value must be written This implies that data entry must occur after load If the
329. ram Standard setpoint program Basic sequencing Enhanced 160kB database See note below Standard sequencing No setpoint program Batch Manager No Batch Manager batch Manager included Barcode reader Not supported Barcode ID card reader with PS2 keyboard connector see also Field 3 option STK Auditor Feature Not supported Electronic records and signature See note below Note Available only with 520 CPU Table B Order code information HA261376 Appendix B Issue 8 Jly 04 1 VISUAL SUPERVSO HANDBOOK ORDERING INFORMATION Cont The coding bar below shows the format in which the manufacturer prefers to receive ordering information The codes already entered are for those items for which there are currently no alternatives The order can be prepared on this bar before it is submitted on a formal purchase order Field 1 Processor Field 2 Archive Interface Field 3 Field 4 Config port Field 6 Battery Field 7 Modbus Field 8 Profibus ALIN ELIN Field 9 Field 10 Printer Field 11 Mounting Language Field 12 BATT Field 13 Colour 422 Field 14 Label Field 15 Int Archive Field 16 Recipe Field 17 Report TPNL Field 18 Setpoint Field 19 GN Field 20 Batch Barcode Field 21 Auditor Appendix B Page 2
330. re stored as ASCII The syntax for replacing an existing function block name is lt Block Alias gt lt Block Name gt where Block Alias is the replacement text and Block Name is the original LIN database name for the block For example First Loop Lp1 replaces the LIN database name Lp1 with the new name First Loop Note The maximum number of characters for block aliases is eight for the small frame 1 4 VGA unit and 16 for the large frame SGVA unit 5 8 2 Alarm names These are displayed in the Alarm History page Syntax lt Alarm Alias gt lt Block Name gt Alarms lt Alarm Name gt where Alarm Alias is the replacement text and Alarm Name is the original LIN database name for the block For example Battery T800 Alarms BadBat replaces the current name text BadBat with the new name text Bat tery Note The maximum number of characters for alarm aliases is seven for the small frame 1 4 VGA unit and 16 for the large frame SGVA unit although only the first eight characters appear in the alarm pane see section 2 6 for alarm pane details HA261376 Chapter 5 Issue 8 Jly 04 5 49 VISUAL SUPERVISOR HAN DBO 5 8 3 Enumerations Enumerations are nearly always Boolean two state variables such as TRUE FALSE and OPEN CLOSED They are displayed as part of the Programmer graphical facilities PREVIEW PREPLOT and EDIT and are also used in log
331. rements 1 RUN Runs the entire program now 2 RUN FROM Runs the program now but from a specified point after its start 3 SCHEDULE Runs the entire program at a specified time 3 1 1 Running a program now ACCESS SYSTEM ALARMS 1 In the row of navigation keys at the bottom of the screen press PROGRAMMER LOGGING USER SCREENS the Menu key to call the Pop up menu The Program pane displays RESET if there is no program Press loaded at the moment or IDLE if a program has already been PROGRAMMER key selected Press menu key 2 Select PROGRAMMER Programmer PROGRAMS SCHEDULE The Programmer window appears offering two choices PRO GRAMS and SCHEDULE 3 Select PROGRAMS HA261376 Chapter 3 Issue 8 Jul 04 3 1 VISUAL SUPERVISOR HAN DBO 3 1 1 RUNNING A PROGRAM NOW Cont The Load Save Program page appears prompting for a file name To the left of the page title is the current time and to the right is the current date Note Up to four setpoint programs can be supported simultaneously Where more than one such program is running the load save screen shown at the top of this page has an additional field Id This field can take the value 1 2 3 or 4 to identify which programmer is to run this File Name 22777727 program All display pages refer to the program associated with t
332. replacing text items displayed by the instrument s Standard Interface and or 2 writing new text either for any other national language versions of the Standard Interface that might be required or for any so called User screens being developed 5 9 describes how to format reports 5 10 to 5 15 contain details of how to create or edit recipe batch and card reader files 5 1 1 The dictionaries Displayed texts are held in files called dictionaries covered in sections 5 2 to 5 6 and 5 11 to 5 13 There are specific customisable dictionary files for each of the following types of texts Standard Interface excluding the Error and Event messages Error messages Event messages The texts of any User pages the User screens Programmer texts Writeable modifiable texts for use with the batch system and in reports Recipe texts Batch texts O ta The texts of the Standard Interface are held in the System text dictionary Error messages are held in the Error Text dictionary and Event messages are held in the Event Text dictionary These three dictionaries make up the _system uyl file User screen and Programmer text dictionaries are initially empty for users to fill as required These two dictionaries make up the _user uyl file HA261376 Chapter 5 Issue 8 Jly 04 Page 5 1 VISUAL SUPERVISOR HAN DBO 5 1 1 THE DICTIONARIES Cont DICTIONARY NAME FILE NAME RECORD SYNTAX System tex
333. res Start up strategy This defines the way in which the process under control recovers from a partial or total power loss The Engineer may select one of several start up strategies USB Universal Serial Bus High speed serial communications bus User screen A user screen is a page or a set of linked pages for display on the Visual Supervisor created by a user HA261376 Appendix C Issue 8 Jly 04 PageC 3 VISUAL SUPERVISO HANDBOOK C3 COSHH STATEMENT C3 1 UTHIUM THIONYL CHLORIDE BATTERY CELLS Product BACK UP BATTERY Part numbers PA234093 HAZARDOUS INGREDIENTS Name Range TLV Toxicological data Lithium Li Not established Thionyl Chloride 0 15 1 0ppm 4 9mg m9 Aluminium Chloride AICI3 2mg m3 Lithium Chloride Not established PHYSICAL DATA Boiling point Thionyl Chloride 77 Specific gravity Thionyl Chloride 1 63 m Thionyl Chloride decomposes Vapour pressure Thionyl Chloride 92mm at 20 C Solubility in water violently on contact with water Thionyl Chloride colourless to Thionyl Chloride Pungent irritant Colour pale yellow FIRE AND EXPLOSION DATA Flash point deg C Method used Not applicable FLAMMABLE LIMIT Lith X powder Class D fire LEL UEL extinguisher Dry lithium chloride or carbon powder Pyrene G 1 Not applicable Not applicable WATER MUST NOT BE USED Do not use moist sand CO9 or Special fire fig
334. ress the RESET button to reset all counters to 0 4 3 9 Function block manager The function blocks set up in LinTools for this application can be viewed as a group by touching the FB MGR button of the Application pop up Touching a particular function Block calls its details to the display Reference to the LinTools manual will normally have to be made to understand the entries completely Highlighted items in the Function Block list can be edited Figure 4 3 9a shows how to access the Function Block Manager and figure 4 3 9b shows the initial Function Block Manager display pages 2 Press SYSTEM key ACCESS SYSTEM ALARMS OVERVIEW PROGRAMMER LOGGING 1 SETUP Press APPLN key Application 4 APP SUM APP MGR Press FB MGR key co Figure 4 3 9a Access to the Function Block Manager HA261376 Chapter 4 Issue 8 Jly 04 Page 4 23 VISUAL SUPERVISOR HAN DBO 4 3 9 FUNCTION BLOCK MANAGER Cont T800 lin dext 2500 5 mod5 01 ise diag mod5 02 ddr diag edbtable ramp5 2 mod5 03 pnl diag alindi 44 loop5 1 mod5 04 alh diag Spp tr1 loop5 2 mod5 05 amc diag Spppig areal mod5 06 db diag 2401 4 moduls 5 2500 6 lll N 12 To display further Function Blocks touch and drag slider or press arrow key ramp5 1 SPP_RAMP ResetSP HL_SP LL
335. rest 2 byte boundary i e the nearest even number This means that total bit counts of from 1 to 16 need 2 bytes of storage space from 17 to 32 bits need 4 bytes from 33 to 48 bits need 6 bytes and so on The calculation can be done using the following formula assuming truncation and integer arithmetic 2 x INT bitcount 15 16 bytes Examples 1 A register table with 40 values occupies18 overhead 40 x 2 data 40 x 6 descriptors 338 bytes 2 The requirements for a digital table depend on how the data is mapped between the Modbus and the database The examples below show the two extremes for mapping 64 bits to the database In case a below the bits are mapped onto the database in 16 bit units needing only 4 descriptors In case b each bit is separately mapped to a different point in the database needing a total of 64 descriptors a l8 overhead 8 data 4 x 8 descriptors 58 bytes 18 overhead 8 data 64 x 8 descriptors 538 bytes HA261376 Chapter 6 Issue 8 Jly 04 6 5 VISUAL SUPERVISOR HAN DBO 6 1 2 3 DATA CONVERSION The conversion of data between standard Modbus format and the LIN database format is described here Data conversion of digitals Modbus digital signals can be mapped onto database bitfields booleans and alarms The following rules apply to mapping these types into the Modbus address space Bitfields can be mapped individually or as a complete set of 8 or 16
336. rised in table 2 6 1 below The question mark symbol on a flashing orange black background means that there is a new message to be investigated as described in ACTIVE MESSAGE DISPLAY below Alarms can be set to be latching or non latching auto acknowledging Latching alarms are annunciated until ac knowledged auto acknowledge alarms are annunciated until the alarm trigger returns to a non alarm state Decisions on which conditions should trigger an Auto Ack Alarm rather than an Acknowledge Alarm latching alarm are made during configuration 2 6 1 Alarm state indication Alarm state is active or inactive acknowledged or not An alarm is triggered becomes active when the value it is monitoring moves outside a pre set value or range of values It becomes inactive when the signal returns to within the preset value or range of values These values are set up during configuration Alarm indicators flash until the alarm has been acknowledged at which time they become illuminated steadily To acknowledge an alarm the alarm pane can be touched followed by Access permission needs to be set Flashing One or more active alarms are present one or more of Red Black which have not been acknowledged Steady One or more active alarms are present all of which have Red been acknowledged Flashing One or more unacknowledged alarms were active but White black have now returned to their non active states Steady Ther
337. rm and Event Logs section 3 5 6 local Alarms and Events are prefixed with space char acters 8 1 2 CONFIGURATION PROVIDER Configuration is in two parts selecting the E suite systems the Consumers to which the Audit Trail is to be trans mitted and if required disabling one or more alarm or event types so that only those items of interest are transmit ted CONSUMER SELECTION From mode enter the decimal node addresses of the E suite systems to which the Audit Trail is to be sent Once this has been done the SAVE key should be operated and power removed from the instrument for a few sec onds then reapplied AUDIT TRAIL FILTERING Again from Provider mode the various parameters associated with each node s Audit trail can be enabled set to Yes or disabled set to No PARAMETERS Lin Mode UNINIT No attempt is currently being made to establish communications with the Consumer INIT Initialised but no communications have taken place as yet CONNECTED Initial communications have been established but no Audit Trail files are being transmitted ACTIVE The Audit Trail is being transferred to the Consumer Alarm active YES include active alarms Alarm Cleared YES include cleared alarms Alarm Ack ed YES include acknowledged alarms Cached Alarms No do not include cached alarms see note below System Event YES include system events Block events YES include block events Operator not
338. rm history archive 3 5 5 Alarm summary page 3 5 6 09 TW O LIN E DISPLAY 3 6 AREA AND GROUP DISPLAYS 3 6 1 TREN D DISPLAYS ALARM INDICATION 3 6 2 Function block faceplates TW O CHANN ELAN ALO GUE IN PUT 12 ANALOGUE OUTPUT 1 33 eH DIGITAL IN PUT M O DULES DIGITAL O UTPUT MO DULES RAM P FACEPLATES LO O P FACEPLATES PID FACEPLATE S 3 6 3 Display FACEPLATE DISPLAY NUMERIC DISPLAY VERTICAL BA RG RAPH RIZO N TAL BA RG RAPH VERTICAL TREN D W ITH VERTICAL TREN D FULL WIDTH we HO RIZO N TAL TREN D W ITH FACEPLATE HO RIZO N TAL TREN D FULL 1 m Contents Page 4 HA261376 Issue 8 Jly 04 VISUAL SUPERVISOR HAN DBO OK LIST OF CONTENTS Cont HA261376 Issue 8 Jly 04 Section Page 3 7 DOWNLOADING RECIPES Er UR 3 33 REC IPE SETSELEGTIO eot m re ere eere ne reseed 3 34 34 1 Download procedure s m tds 3 34 LO ADIN G ii rea er e re ro Fer prn 3 34 SELECTING A RECIPE UN
339. rms menu press NOTE SUMMARY LOG NOTE ARCHIVE MESSAGES The Add Note window appears To enter the note press the yellowed field then key in a string of max 16 characters at the pop up keyboard followed by Enter Add Note This will add a note to the Alarm History List To abandon the note before completion press CANCEL Your note EE OK CANCEL When the message is compete press OK The note is added to the alarm history where it is displayed along with its time of entry Chapter 3 HA261376 3 18 Issue 8 Jul 04 VISUAL SUPERVISOR HAN DBO 3 5 4 Alarm history archive The ARCHIVE facility permits the current alarm history to be saved in ASCII format to floppy disk Note In order to avoid the possibility of loss of logging data it is strongly recommended that archiving is performed with normal logging turned off ACK ACK ALL HISTORY 1 Inthe Alarms menu press ARCHIVE SUMMARY LOG NOTE The Alarm Archive window appears ARCHIVE MESSAGES The File Name field shows the default of YY MMDDHH ALH which the instrument supplies automatically To change this name press the field to get the keyboard display and enter a new name Archive to disk the alarm history The file extension is always ALH not editable File Name 99072009 ALH Date Format DaEG Time 2 abandon the name before completion press CANCEL 3 W
340. rms the order options that were specified for this instrument For versions 2 7 on wards operation of the down or cycle screens key calls a second page which shows which software options are fitted These two pages can be cycled through using the down or cycle screens key Note The cycle screens key is available only on the SVGA version of the instrument Initially the opening display is Locked In this state the only interactive items are the right most of the navigation keys the Menu key and for the SVGA version of the instrument only the ACCESS pane Operation of the menu key causes the opening Pop up menu of the Standard Interface to appear section 2 3 Operation of the ACCESS pane calls the Security access page as described in section 2 8 of this manual This allows the display to be unlocked using an appropriate password or an ident 2 61376 Chapter 2 Issue 8 04 2 5 VISUAL SUPERVISOR HAN DBO OK 2 2 THE MAIN PANE The Main pane is the display area for collecting information from the user by means of keys menus pick lists dia logue boxes and windows and for displaying information to the user by means of dialogue boxes windows panes and pages 2 2 1 Information display The Standard Interface is a menu system whose structure is hierarchical like a family tree At the top is the Pop up menu which offers a choice of submenus as depicted below ACCESS ALARMS
341. rrent point values as horizontal bars with faceplates The length of each bar is proportional to the current value of its associated point Zero and full scale values appear below the bars Figure 3 6 3d Horizontal bargraph display mode VERTICAL TREND WITH FACEPLATE Standard display This view displays points as though they are being traced on a chart which is rolling downwards The latest data is at the top of the display and the extent of the data shown on the screen is displayed at the bottom left of the screen in hours and minutes For 1 4 VGA SVGA displays Only the faceplates associated with the first six 16 group items can be displayed Where there are more than six 16 trends these are plotted without faceplate As a part of the group s configuration it is possible to re order the group contents to define which faceplates are displayed The colour bar at the top of each faceplate is that of its associated trend Scroll bar display An alternative view be obtained by pressing the option key to display the options bar then pressing VIEW This calls the scroll bar display shown in figure 3 6 3f below If no further action is taken trend data will continue to up date normally Figure 3 6 3e Vertical trend with faceplates Figure 3 6 3f Vertical trend with scroll bars HA261376 Chapter 3 Issue 8 Jul 04 Page 3 29 VISUAL SUPERVISOR HAN DBO 3
342. rument can be configured to start logging immediately at this point but if that has not been done the MONITOR page needs to be accessed as described below The Logging menu appears with four choices MONITOR OFF LINE MANAGE and GROUPS ACCESS SYSTEM ALARMS PROGRAMMER LOGGING USER SCREENS Press LOGGING Logging MONITOR OFFLINE LINE Chapter 3 HA261376 Page 3 12 Issue 8 Jul 04 VISUAL SUPERVISOR HAN DBO 3 4 4 TRAINING SEQUENCE Cont MONITOR Allows the user to start and stop logging and to determine how much space is left on the disk The Files field shows the number of files present on the archive device againt the maximum number permitted If the number of files present exceeds the maximum this represents a disk full condition which will invoke any deletion strategy configured in the LOGDEV block Note For internal archives file size is limited to either 1 32 of the size of the internal archive or to 1 MB whichever is the smaller Logging Monitor OFF LINE Disk Off Line Used exclusively to stop recording usually to change a disk Logging OFF Media Size 0 kBytes MANAGE Free Space 0 kBytes Used to delete files from the disk For internal archives Manage also is Time used to export files to a removable device See section 3 4 4 below riles
343. s rg rre 4 5 4 1 3 2 CHANGING 4 6 4 1 4 Changing 99 emm 4 7 4 1 4 1 CHANGING SEGMENT IDEN TIFIER seen 4 7 4 1 4 2 CHANGING 4 8 4 1 5 Inserting deleting segments sss 4 8 4 1 5 1 INSERTING A NULL 4 8 4 1 5 1 INSERTING A NULL 5 4 9 4 1 5 2 DELETING A SEGMEN T rer reet cen 4 9 4 1 6 Changing hold back 4 9 4 1 6 1 CHOOSING THE 2 3 2 2 6 0 00 00 4 10 4 1 6 2 CHANGING HOLD 4 10 4 1 6 3 CHANGING 4 10 4 1 7 Changing program Hem 4 11 4 1 7 1 CHANGING PROGRAM NAMES 4 11 4 1 7 2 CHANGING RATE UN 5 4 12 4 1 7 3 CHOOSING END OF RUN ACTION 4 12 4 1 7 4 CHANGING DEFAULT 5 4 13 4 1 8 Changing setpoint names 4 13 41 9 Segment ming display IER LEE 4 14 4 2 LOGGING GROUPS
344. s a scaled integer such that 999 9 is returned as 9999 and 1 234 is returned as 1234 The control program in the PRO FIBUS master must convert these integers into floating point numbers if required Alternatively scaled integer number types can be used in the uyp file to achieve the same end see section 7 3 above 7 8 GSD FILES Figure 7 8 shows that for each instrument on the communications link a Device Database File is constructed and loaded into the Profibus configuration terminal These files called Ger testammdaten or GSD files contain informa tion relating to the instrument s parameters which the PROFIBUS master a PLC in the figure needs in order to communicate with the device When operating as a Profibus slave unit not supported in this version it is necessary to load a Visual supervisor gsd file into the master unit before communications can be established A suitable gsd file is supplied with the unit When operating as a master unit gsd files are required for all third party equipment with which the Visual Supervi sor is to communicate Such gsd files are normally supplied with the third party equipment The Visual Supervisor will normally come ready loaded with suitable gsd files for I O systems for example supplied by the Visual Super visor manufacturer Visual supervisor System Profibus i Configuration configuration terminal ET V U Device database files GSD files PROF
345. s highlighted gt To write changes to the data base press the SAVE key first using the Option key to display it if necessary Oth erwise press CANCEL HA261376 Chapter 4 Issue 8 Jly 04 4 31 VISUAL SUPERVISOR HAN DBO 4 4 3 2 USER ID MANAGEMENT Cont Editing other fields The editing of remaining fields is carried out in a similar manner except for the access level field which is selected from a pick list rather than being typed in as a keyboard entry Attributes column Touching this column allows the ADMIN level user to enable or disable the following functions for all other users View only Admin only FTP Remote User button User screen All functions are set to No by default The display column reflects the features set to Yes as shown in the table below The numbers are cumulative so for example if View only and FTP were both selected Yes and all other items No the attribute display would be 00001004 View only Admin only Display No 00000000 No 00000004 Yes 00000010 No 00001000 No 00002000 Table 4 4 3 2 Attribute coding View only Users with this attribute set have Read Only permission Admin only This attribute appears only for users with Admin Access level and means that they can modify only ADMIN pages If View only is also set such users are denied all write permissions FTP Users with this permission may log in via FTP FTP users w
346. s likely that safety earth protection has been impaired the unit shall be made inoperative and se cured against accidental operation The manufacturer s nearest service centre should be contacted for advice 4 Any adjustment maintenance and repair of the opened apparatus under voltage should be avoided as far as possi ble and if inevitable shall be carried out only by a skilled person who is aware of the hazard involved 5 Where conductive pollution e g condensation carbon dust is likely adequate air conditioning filtering sealing etc must be installed in the equipment enclosure 6 Signal and supply voltage wiring should be kept separate from one another Where this is impractical shielded cables should be used for the signal wiring 7 The equipment is designed for process monitoring and supervision in an indoor environment If the equipment is used in a manner not specified by the manufacturer the protection provided by the equipment might be impaired 8 The battery within the unit must not be short circuited When exhausted the battery must be disposed of in ac cordance with local regulations for lithium thionyl chloride 11 5 2 cells 9 When connecting a USB device it must be plugged directly into the visual supervisor The use of extension USB leads may compromise the unit s ESD compliance 10 There are no specific insulation requirements for external circuitry A full definition of Hazardous voltages appears und
347. s re setting it Follow the instructions in Chapter 4 Management sec tion 4 5 3 Re setting the clock 1 7 MANUAL SELF TESTS Self test facilities are provided to check the Relay LED operation and to display the battery status A reset facility is also available Note The Self test facilities are available only if all applications have been unloaded For details of how to unload an application see Chapter 4 section 4 3 With all applications unloaded the TEST menu is accessed from the main menu as shown in figure 1 7 below APP MGR ACCESS 2 Press menu key Press TEST key RELAYS RESET SUMMARY CREATE Figure 1 7 Test menu access 1 7 1 Battery test Touching the Battery key calls the battery test display as shown in figure 1 7 1 below Touching the Force key causes a re test Battery Test Battery Condition BAD FORCE Figure 1 7 1 Battery Test display Chapter 1 HA261376 Pagel 24 Issue 8 Jul 04 VISUAL SUPERVISOR HAN DBO OK 1 7 2 Relay LED test Touching the Relay key causes the relay test page to be displayed figure 1 7 2 showing the current status of the Health and Run relays and of the Comms LED The current settings can be overridden by touching the status area e g CLOSED of the required item and selecting a setting fro
348. scribed in sections 4 1 5 1 and 4 1 5 2 respectively Once the segment changes are complete the SAVE button is used to save the changes If necessary the SAVE button is called to the display by pressing the option key located at the bottom of the screen Option key 4 1 4 1 CHANGING SEGMENT IDENTIFIER In the dialogue box press the Segment field A qwerty keyboard appears A numeric symbol keyboard can be called by pressing the up arrow key at bottom left A further operation of the arrow key calls a keyboard of accented lower case letters Pressing the up arrow key again re displays the original qwerty keyboard The segment identifier can be a name a number a character or a digit but DOS file name rules apply The required segment identifier for example a is keyed in using one or more of these keyboards To clear the entry so far but retaining the keyboard display press the key P 00 50 00 To cancel the entry and return to the setpoint display press the red cross key Once the segment identifier has been keyed in the Return key is operated to save it The Program Editor page reappears showing the new identifier for the segment HA261376 Chapter 4 Issue 8 Jly 04 Page 4 7 VISUAL SUPERVISOR HAN DBO 4 1 4 2 CHANGING SEGMENT DURATION Caution 1 Changing the duration of ramp at rate segments is not permitted
349. section Note Any application data saved will not include the current setpoint program Chapter 4 HA261376 Page 4 20 Issue 8 Jly 04 VISUAL SUPERVISOR HAN DBO 4 3 4 Saving application data File RISE The application must be stopped before application data can be saved State STOPPED UNLOAD SAVE SAVE AS START Appl n Manager File RISE Saving Select SAVE Saving starts confirmed by a Saving window File RISE DBF Please wait UNLOAD SAVE SAVE AS START To save the current application data under a different name select SAVE AS File RISE A SAVE AS window appears with a yellowed field into which another File MEN file name can be entered if required not shown OK CANCEL UNLOAD SAVE SAVE 45 START To re start the application select START File RISE The Appl n Manager page reverts to its opening display reporting the cur State RUNNING rent application running You can also use START to start another application that you might have loaded STOP 4 3 5 Unloading an application File RISE The application must be stopped before it can be unloaded State STOPPED Select UNLOAD UNLOAD SAVE SAVE AS START The screen might
350. ser pages Forms Comms Profiles This is the instrument s LIN database consisting of file types dbf gwf run and uyn Sequential Function Charts are part of any special strategies in software that may have written to support particular events circumstances or requirements They consist of sdb files Setpoint programs and or recipes that have typically have been created on this instrument and which the user now wishes to copy to another instrument These files can be large enough to fill most of a floppy disk so the pick list of data types allows for example the database SFCs and user pages to be loaded onto one disk and the recipe programs on to another Recipes and Programs consist of uys and uyr files and if Batch files are present uyb files Written by users to satisfy the control requirements of their particular process User pages may consist of a single Home page or a hierarchy of user pages with a Home page at its root They consist of ofl and pnl files Text files that determine how reports and alarm formats for printers are generated Consist of uyt and uyf files Parameters that determine how the instrument communicates with other instruments Consist of uym uyp and gsd files Once the required fields have been set to YES the data is exported by touching the EXPORT key at the bottom of the page 4 6 2 2 IMPORTING APPLICATION DATA From the Cloning page select IMPORT The
351. sing an IEC socket to mate with the plug fitted at the rear of the instrument as shown in figure 1 3 6 1 below Safety Earth Supply voltage connector AC Supply Connector AC Large frame Small frame Figure 1 3 6 1 AC supply connector not drawn to the same scale Chapter 1 HA261376 1 18 Issue 8 Jul 04 VISUAL SUPERVISOR HAN DBO OK 1 3 6 2 DC SUPPLY DC power is applied to one or both connectors at the rear of the instrument figure 1 3 6 2 The instrument draws current from whichever supply has the higher voltage When the two supplies are within 0 7 Volts of one another current is drawn from both supplies Warning Voltages of greater than 50 peak relative to the safety earth potential must never be applied to any of the dc input terminals positive or negative as under such circumstances the unit may become hazardous to the touch Note In order to ensure compliance with EMC directives local lightening protection must be fitted if the dc power supply unit is located more than 30 metres away from the Visual Supervisor s it is supplying OSafety Earth Supply voltage connectors 19 to 32 V 30W DC1 DC2 DC2 e eje Supply voltage connectors G 19 to 32 V 30W large frame Small frame Figure 1 3 6 2a DC supply connector locations not drawn to the same scale It is recommended that ext
352. ss value PV falls too far behind the setpoint SP value What happens is that the program holds the SP constant holds it back A constant SP is called a dwell With the program in Run state the Program pane is green and displays the following data 1 The name of the program 2 The program status e g Running 3 estimated time or date of completion of the program 4 The name of the segment currently running The pane is similar with the program in Hold state except that the Program pane is yellow and has the word HELD instead of RUNNING The program pane for the Held Back state is similar to the pane except that HELD BACK appears instead of HELD In Idle state the Program pane is white and displays the word IDLE and the time is displayed as 2 There is no current segment In Complete state the Program pane is pale blue with the word COMPLETE displayed In Error state the Program pane is red with the word for example provoked by a COMMS breakdown displayed 2 4 2 Programmer menu access With access granted the Programmer menu is called either by touching the Program Pane or by pressing the printed Menu key below the screen and then the PROGRAMMER key in the resulting Pop up menu Chapter 2 HA261376 2 8 Issue 8 Jly 04 VISUAL SUPERVISO 2 5 THE PROGRAMMER MENU Broadly the Programmer menu combines th
353. strings to be displayed between curly braces immedi ately following the variable name Examples door In Bit3 closed open counter2 op Zero One Two Three Four i op Lo Lo Lo Hi Hi Hi For booleans the enumerations always refer to FALSE and TRUE respectively whereas for integers they correspond to values 0 1 2 etc As with literal text ST format may be used for non ASCII characters this will also be necessary to obtain the characters using or 7D and using or 2C as well as itself using or 24 In the case of enum type variables an explicit list may be given as above if omitted then the value will still be displayed as an enumeration but using strings extracted from the database Where the enumeration text is not literal but is to be obtained from a dictionary the bracketed list is preceded with the dictionary character For example door In Bit3 U22 U23 HA261376 Issue 8 Jly 04 Chapter 5 Page 5 67 VISUAL SUPERVISOR HAN DBO 5 15 5 Number of characters A width may be given for text and variables For example i Count 6 would allocate 6 characters to this variable If the width is omitted for variables it will default to zero unless an enumeration has been specified in which case the width will default to that of the longest enumeration string 5 15 6 Number of decimal places For REAL variables th
354. strument Section 4 5 1 details the setting of Communications parameters such as Baud rate parity etc All fixings should be retained for use in re assembly 1 4 1 Small frame units 1 Isolate the unit from supply power To remove the lid see figure 1 3 6 3a above 2 Remove the four screws securing the top cover to the side panels These may be pozidriv or for later instru ments Torx T8 headed screws 3 At the top of the rear panel securing a tab there is a larger pan headed Posidriv screw Unscrew this 4 Liftthe lid up and off The power supply is visible below at the back To release the power supply 5 In each side panel about 4 cm below the rear screw removed at step 3 there are two similar countersunk Posidriv screws Unscrew these four screws in all 6 Liftout the power supply and hang it on the left hand side panel viewed from the rear of the instrument taking care not to tension the connecting cables To release the relay board 7 Inthe back panel immediately to each side of the relay connector viewed from the outside there are two pan headed Posidriv screws Unscrew these 8 Inthe right hand side of the relay board viewed from the rear of the instrument there is a Posidriv screw that fixes the board to a standoff underneath Unscrew this 9 Holding the relay board with the tips of your fingers gently disengage it from the relay connector This can be awkward but persist until the relay board is sufficiently dise
355. t Of the two or three further levels in the hierarchy all are available to Engineers but only some are available to Opera tors and Commissioning Engineers This helps to improve usability by hiding those facilities which are not currently required 2 61376 Chapter 2 Issue 8 04 2 7 VISUAL SUPERVISOR HAN DBO 2 4 THE PROGRAM PANE SAMPLE RUNNING SAMPLE RUNNING 14 18 23 1 14 18 23 Segment 1 Figure 2 4 A typical Program pane displays Located at the top left of the screen this area which varies in appearance according to instrument type and options fitted has two functions 1 To display data about the status state of the program currently running if any 2 As a touch pad to call the Programmer menu directly 2 4 1 Displaying program status WITH NO PROGRAM LOADED When there is no program loaded the Program pane is white and blank except for the word RESET WITH A PROGRAM LOADED In the example shown in figure 2 4 the program pane reports the following 1 that a program called SAMPLE is loaded 2 thatitis Running 3 that it is expected to complete at 14hr 18mins 23secs 4 thatthe name of the segment currently running is 1 Generally a loaded program can be in one of six states reported on the Program pane Run Hold Held Back Idle Complete and Error Alone among these Held Back is not under the control of the user Programs adopt the Held Back state automatically when a proce
356. t If such customisation is required the optional file SYSTEM UYE may be added to the system This is a text file containing a single line for each event requiring customisation The syntax is Event number gt lt Priority gt where the event number is obtained from the table above and Priority is O to 15 For example 41 0 42 0 would cause the events Database loaded and Database started to be disabled Chapter 5 HA261376 Page 5 34 Issue 8 Jly 04 VISUAL SUPERVISOR HAN DBO 5 5 5 6 THE USER TEXT DICTIONARY This dictionary initially empty is available for users who wish to enter their own texts for display on their Home page and User screens with additional files to hold versions in other languages if required The User text dictionary is used in conjunction with the User Screen Editor For more details refer to The User Screen Editor Handbook part no HA260749 U005 For every System file there may be an optional User file to go with it Filenames and record syntaxes follow the pattern of those for the _system uyl files Filenames are _user uyl for the file holding terms customised in English or other home language _user lt n gt uyl for files holding other language international versions with n taking integer values from 0 up to 9 one value for each language to be made available The syntax of each record is U lt N gt text where lt N gt is the index number of the record
357. t _system uyl S lt N gt lt text gt Error text _system uyl E lt N gt lt text gt Event text _system uyl V lt N gt lt text gt User text _user uyl U lt N gt lt text gt Programmer text _user uyl P lt N gt lt text gt Writeable text _user uyl W lt N gt lt initial text gt Recipe texts Not applicable Not applicable Batch texts Not applicable Not applicable where lt N gt is the index number of the record section 5 2 2 File structure Customising an existing uyl file or building a new one is done by editing the files on a PC using a standard text editor for example Windows Notepad and then cloning them into the Visual Supervisor by floppy disk 5 1 2 Panel navigation and database names Panel navigation section 5 7 describes how to change the layout the architecture of the Standard Interface A com pletely new architecture can be created if required Database names section 5 8 describes how to change the names of function blocks alarms and of items called enu merations which are usually two state Boolean variables such as ON OFF and TRUE FALSE 5 2 THE SYSTEM TEXT DICTIONARY The System text dictionary holds all the text displayed by the instrument s Standard Interface except for the follow ing 1 Error messages 2 Event messages 3 Segment type names and text in menus and column headers Of these Error messages and Event messages are held in their own dictionaries and can be customised through those Com
358. t is not available within a Bare panel MNEMONIC ENTRY INVALID DESCRIPTION POINTS ACCESS 1 Security access AGP 1 B Overview displays ALM_HIST 2 B Alarm History Summary ALM_MENU 1 B Alarm Menu APP_SUM 1 B Application summary AUTODB 1 A Automatic database creation BAT_MENU 1 B Batch menu BATCH 2 B See table 5 8 CLOCK 1 Real time clock maintenance CLONE 1 ISE cloning utilities COMMS 1 Communications setup DIAGNOST 1 B Modbus master comms diagnostics DIALOG 1 Dialogue box manager FB_MGR 1 B Function Block Manager FILE_MGR 1 A File Manager INTERNAT 1 Internationalisation LOGGING 4 B Logging control and monitoring MENU 1 General purpose menu MESSAGE 2 B See table 5 8 NET_AUDIT 1 Network Audit Trail Configuration PANEL 1 Panel parameters e g brightness RCP_MENU 1 B Recipe menu RECIPE 4 B See table 5 8 RESOURCES 1 A System resources allocation SIGN 1 Electronic Signatures manager SPP 7 B Setpoint Programmer SPP_MENU 1 B Setpoint Programmer Menu STARTUP 1 Startup strategy definition SYS_SUM 1 System summary TEST 3 A See table 5 8 UPGRADE 1 A ISE product upgrade utility Table 5 7 4a Agent types HA261376 Chapter 5 Issue 8 Jly 04 5 47 VISUAL SUPERVISOR HAN DBO 5 7 4 AGENT TYPES Cont The second column in Table 5 7 4a on the previous page shows that some agents have more than one entry point The parameter values to invoke the respective sub menus are as follows AGENT VALUE FACILITY
359. t log only A9010 ALM_HIST 2 2 Dialogue Agent A100000 DIALOG 4 Signature Agent A200000 SIGN 5 END OF FILE Chapter 5 Page 5 40 HA261376 Issue 8 Jly 04 VISUAL SUPERVISOR HAN DBO OK 5 7 1 2 AUDITOR PACK VERSIONS Cont Coding Sample Application Panel version _default pnl SAMPLE APPLICATION PANEL SYSTEM Auditor Option fitted Quarter VGA Driver D1 QVGA Home page is first User Page or will default to Overview else System Summary as this has the lowest Id in the main pane HI Initial page first page after power up is the user screen 100 if present I100 Root Menu R1000 A1000 MENU 3 4000 2000 9000 1500 3000 7000 8000 5000 1 System Submenu A2000 MENU 3 S 130 S 131 2010 2200 2300 2080 2500 A2010 SYS_SUM A2080 CLONE 4 Application sub submenu A2200 MENU 3 S396 S 397 2020 2210 2220 2230 A2020 APP_SUM 2210 4 0 A2220 MENU 3 S900 S901 2240 2241 2230 3 4 0 A2240 DIAGNOST 4 0 Setup sub submenu 2300 3 5398 5399 2030 2040 2050 2060 2070 A2030 STARTUP 3 A2040 COMMS 4 A2050 CLOCK 3 A2060 INTERNAT 4 A2070 PANEL 2 Continued HA261376 Chapter 5 Issue 8 Jly 04 5 41 VISUAL SUPERVISOR HAN DBO 5 7 1 2 AUDITOR PACK VERSIONS Cont Admin A2500 MENU 5 3 S 1400 S 1401 2510 2520 A2510 NET_AUDIT 5 A2520 SIGN_CFG 5 Programmer A3000 SPP MENU 2 3 3 3010 010 5 2 3 2 30
360. t supported by this release of software If Binary is selected as File Type then Compr ression Ratio replaces Column Titles and Date Format Compression ration can be selected form a pick list to be either Normal or High Normal provides an exact copy whilst High compresses the data more than Normal but with a slight loss of accuracy Once configuration is complete SAVE should be operated SAVE LOG NOW Saves the specifications for future logging For ASCII files only LOG NOW logs a sample immediately it has been selected This manual initiation can be used to take samples as and when required in addition to samples taken under timed logging FORMAT ABS REL EXAMPLE DESCRIPTION Date Time Spreadsheet Integer Duration Days DHMS Absolute Absolute Absolute Relative Relative Relative 25 09 98 10 30 00 Choose this format to set up the program to accept the date and time as dd mm yy hh mm ss The first example in the previous column means 25 September 1998 at 10 30 am 09 25 98 10 30 00 The date format can be set to be mm dd yy as described in section 4 5 4 below The second example expresses the date and time in the new format 36068 51 Choose this format for data to be exported to a spreadsheet The format is a single floating point value the integer part of which is the number of days since 31 Dec 1899 at 0 hours and the decimal part is the proportion of the day since mid
361. ted If instead the first node is entered by the user say node 10 the FILL operation will automatically fill in the remain ing node numbers starting at 11 in this example If non consecutive node numbers are netered say nodes 17 3 9 103 and 14 then the SORT button can be used to reorder the nodes in ascending order 3 9 14 17 103 The CLEAR key is used to reset all the mode numbers to 0 Operation of the OK key returns to the previous page only this time the newly configured items appear Deploy Access Number of slave nodes 5 Slave nodes 3 Cy Gitte DEPLOY CONFIG USERS Figure 8 1 31 Completed configuration Operation of the DEPLOY key causes he deploy to be initiated once signed and authorized if necessary Figure 8 1 3m shows the confirmation page Chapter 8 HA261376 8 8 Issue 8 Jul 04 VISUAL SUPERVISOR HAN DBO OK 8 1 3 SECURITY ACCESS PAGE Cont Deploy Access Number of slave nodes 5 Slave nodes 3 9 14 17 103 Confirm Action DEPLOY Reason Signed by Ident ADMIN Password eee Authorised by Ident Password xxix CANCEL Figure 8 1 3m Deploy confirmation page HA261376 Issue 8 Jul 04 Chapter 8 Page 8 9 VISUAL SUPERVISOR HAN DBO OK 8 2 ELECTRONIC SIGNATURES 8 2 1 Enabling electronic signatures Note Once Electronic signatures have been enabled they can not su
362. tention then a short time out needs to be set If however the process is robust enough to regain normal processing conditions even after a lengthy power outage then a longer Hot Start time out may be set Actual times are process dependent but the general rule is that the process must not restart automatically beyond the time when it requires manual attention This sets an alarm when a power variation has persisted for longer than a preset time Unless the alarm is set up to take some action the Brown out time acts only as a warning in case some special strategies exist that might need implementing in those circumstances or that have been set up to run automatically If power totally fails but returns within the interval specified as Brown out time then the instrument treats it as a brown out If it returns after the Brown out time then a restart is either possible or certain depending on how soon after the time limit it returns The type of restart attempted depends on the programmed strategy 4 5 2 2 CHANGING START UP VALUES Changing Hot Cold start settings Hot Start YES In the Startup Strategy page press the Startup setting to be changed Edit Cold Start WES the entry using the pick list which appears then press Return The pick Hot start ta 00 00 00 list disappears and the Startup Strategy page displays the new value Brown out time SAVE CANCEL Changing time out values simple IDLE 22 22 22 In the Startup Str
363. ter 7 HA261376 7 8 Issue 8 Jly 04 VISUAL SUPERVISOR HAN DBO 7 5 4 Communication seems slow 7 6 7 7 The normal cyclic exchange of data should be very fast Should so much data be requiring transfer that it cannot be fitted into the cycle rate then it will be sent acyclically and this results in a much slower transfer rate of all data To maximise efficiency module DCMs should be used wherever possible instead of individual channel DCMs Module DCMs provide a process variable s value and alarm status only Refer to the Lin Blocks reference manual for further details The diagnostic block pmc_diag provides information showing any communications overflow GLOBAL COMMANDS Freeze and Sync from a PROFIBUS master have no effect OPERATION PROFIBUS DP performs a cyclical scan of the network devices during which input and output data for each node is exchanged Values from each node input data are read by the Profibus master which then runs its control program and gener ates a set of values output data to be transmitted to the nodes This process is called an I O data exchange This process is repeated continuously to give a cyclical I O data exchange Examples of input data are a A set of digital readings for a digital input b The measured temperature and alarm status from a PID controller Examples of output data are a A setpoint to be sent to a PID controller The I O data exchange can be
364. text For example 12 Display error For any text item not replaced in the uyl file the version in the ROM file will be used 5 2 3 New language versions For each language a file called a _system lt n gt uyl file must be built using the same syntax as above The variable n in each file name specifies the particular national language by taking integer values from 0 up to a maximum of 9 one value for each language which is to be available The correspondence mapping between language and integer is decided by the user For example the file holding terms in English might be the file named _system0 uyl with a typical record S2 FILE UPDATE 5 2 4 The dictionary On delivery of the Visual Supervisor the contents of the System text dictionary abridged are as set out below Notes 1 Items where is the final character always have a space after the for formatting purposes 2 Leading space characters are significant 3 Any printable character of the Unicode Latin 1 set may be used HA261376 Chapter 5 Issue 8 Jly 04 Page 5 3 VISUAL SUPERVISOR HAN DBO 5 2 4 THE DICTIONARY Cont NO CONTEXT CLASS MAX TEXT 1 GLOBAL BUTTON_TEXT 12 OK 2 OIFL DIALOG TITLE 28 FILE UPDATE 3 OIFL DIALOG TEXT 80 The User Page file has changed The panel system will now reload 4 GLOBAL HIDE CHAR 1 5 GLOBAL UPDATE_ERROR 1 6 GLOBAL DISP_ERROR 1 12 OIFL OIFL_ERROR 20 OIFL ERROR 13 OIF
365. that neither the exhausted battery or its replacement are shorted out otherwise an explosion may occur resulting in the emission of hazardous products Do not use a metal object to remove the battery from its holder if necessary use a plastic or wooden item instead WARNING If the battery is damaged and leakage has occurred do not allow skin contact with the leak material Refer to the COSHH statement included in section C3 of Appendix C for details Note Although the circuitry and the battery are protected against incorrect battery insertion the clock hot start data etc held in the unit s SRAM will not be protected against power loss should the battery be inserted back to front 1 Once the cover is removed the exhausted battery located as shown in figures 10 1 and 10 1 can be prized out of its holder and the replacement fitted 2 Ensure that positive end of the battery is towards the sign printed on the circuit board near the battery holder There is usually a sign printed on the battery sleeve 10 2 SMALL FRAME FAN BATTERY REPLACEMENT Note The fan replacement procedure detailed below applies only to small frame units with status levels of Q36 or higher July 2004 Small frame instruments manufactured prior to this were not fitted with fans See section 10 3 for battery replacement procedures Warning As hazardous voltages are generated by the power supply board this procedure ma
366. that works for all applications If default pnl cannot be found the instrument loads a firmware copy that can always be found ROM The instru ment is shipped with these files and they are loss proof With no application loaded the system looks for a file called system pnl known as the bare panel version see also Chapter 4 section 4 3 Managing an Application If this file cannot be found the corresponding version in ROM is used Chapter 5 HA261376 Page 5 36 Issue 8 Jly 04 VISUAL SUPERVISOR HAN DBO 5 7 1 1 THE VERSIONS Cont Coding The Bare Panel version system pnl Quarter VGA Driver D1 QVGA Home Agent set up for user page 1 if this does not exist then it will default to the System Summary which has the lowest Id in the main pane HI Initial page first page after power up is the same Root Agent R1000 A1000 MENU 3 2010 4000 22 10 2300 2100 2130 2400 1 A2010 SYS_SUM 2210 4 0 SETUP submenu A2300 MENU 3 S398 S399 2030 2040 2050 2060 2070 A2030 STARTUP 3 A2040 COMMS 4 A2050 CLOCK 3 A2060 INTERNAT 4 A2070 PANEL 2 TEST submenu TEST has 2 entry points 2100 3 3 5610 5611 2110 2111 A2110 TEST 3 MAINTENANCE submenu A2400 MENU 4 3 S930 S931 2080 2120 2140 A2080 CLONE 4 2120 4 A2140 FILE_MGR 4 2130 4 2210 4000 55 Dialogue Agent A100000 DIALOG 4 END OF FILE Conti
367. the absence of an enumeration list using the text defined within LIN If an enumeration list is included then all the desired strings must be included Empty or Over range valued do not default to the LIN strings 2 Alarm subfields e g PIDI ALARMS HIGHABS behave as integers taking values 0 to 3 0 Alarm not active Alarm not unacknowledged 1 Alarm active and acknowledged 2 Alarm no longer active but remains unacknowledged 3 Alarm active but not acknowledged If the entire field is specified e g PIDI ALARMS a bitwise OR of all alarms is performed Note The subfield Combined is also accessible This is derived from the individual alarms using a differ ent algorithm 3 It is mandatory to supply size information for all variables except when an enumeration list has been given in which case the width defaults to that of the longest string Chapter 5 HA261376 Page 5 54 Issue 8 Jly 04 VISUAL SUPERVISOR HAN DBO OK 5 9 2 Alarm forms Note Ensure correct operation of each customised IDs as any error in the ID will not be reported as an alarm in the LPTDEV block For any application with printer support there can be an optional alarm message formatting form UYT file The file syntax is similar to the UYF file described in section 5 9 1 above to which reference should be made if neces sary UYT files are used to customise the way in which alarm and Event messages are printed in reports Th
368. the application has been stopped it can be unloaded and the File Manager called from the Maintenance pop up as shown in figure 4 7 2 2 Press SYSTEM key ACCESS SYSTEM ALARMS Appl n Manager File T800 OVERVIEW PROGRAMMER LOGGING 1 State STOPPED SUMMARY APPLN TUI E 8 E UNLOAD SAVE SAVE AS STOP SETUP CLONING 6 Press APPLN key Press UNLOAD Appl n Manager 4 File 2222222 Press APP MGR Appl n Manager File T800 Press MAINT State RUNNING Press menu key stor 3 Maintenance CLONING UPGRADE FILE MGR Press STOP 1 Press FILE MGR Figure 4 7 1 Application stop Figure 4 7 2 Calling the file manager Chapter 4 HA261376 Page 4 50 Issue 8 Jly 04 VISUAL SUPERVISOR HAN DBO 4 7 3 File Copy and Delete Operation of the FILE MGR button in the Maintenance pop up calls the File Manager page Once this page is display either an individual file name can be selected from the relevant drive and the copy or delete key operated or the COPY ALL DEL ALL keys can be used to copy or delete all the files within the selected filter on that drive CAUTION Files of the form SYSTEM XYZ must not be del
369. thin Customisation see Chapter 5 of this manual User pages User pages also form part of Customisation Note If Access is selected the exported data must be imported into the destination unit within 60 minutes of export time 4 6 3 3 IMPORTING SYSTEM DATA Imported config options apply on next power up dictionaries apply on next power up or on next change of prefer ences From the Cloning page select IMPORT The same page appears as for exporting shown above and the same expla nations apply Note An instrument may import access data only if it has been exported by the source unit within the previous 60 minutes Chapter 4 Page 4 48 HA261376 Issue 8 Jly 04 VISUAL SUPERVISOR HAN DBO OK 4 6 4 Cloning both application and system data ALL From the Cloning page select ALL Thereafter the procedures are similar to those in sections 4 6 2 and 4 6 3 HA261376 Chapter 4 Issue 8 Jly 04 Page 4 49 VISUAL SUPERVISOR HAN DBO 4 7 FILE MANAGER The File Manager allows the copying of files between the internal Flash memory and a floppy disk loaded in the unit s disk drive It also allows files to be deleted from the internal memory As shown in the figures below any applica tion must be stopped and unloaded before File Manager can be accessed 4 7 1 Stopping the application Figure 4 7 1 shows the keystrokes necessary to stop the application 4 7 2 Calling the file manager Once
370. ting 456 SPP DIALOG_TITLE 28 PROGRAM SAVE 457 SPP BUTTON_TEXT 12 OK 458 SPP BUTTON_TEXT 12 CANCEL 459 SPP DIALOG_TEXT 80 Deleting 460 SPP DIALOG_TITLE 28 PROGRAM DELETE 461 SPP BUTTON_TEXT 12 OK 462 SPP BUTTON_TEXT 12 CANCEL 463 SPP DIALOG_TEXT 80 File Saved 464 SPP DIALOG_TITLE 28 PROGRAM SAVE 465 SPP BUTTON_TEXT 12 OK 466 SPP DIALOG_TEXT 80 Program File not found 467 SPP DIALOG_TEXT 80 Program File too large 468 SPP DIALOG_TEXT 80 File read error 469 SPP DIALOG_TEXT 80 File write error 470 SPP DIALOG_TEXT 80 Unresolved block references 471 SPP DIALOG_TEXT 80 Program Already Running 472 SPP DIALOG_TEXT 80 Insufficient file space 473 SPP DIALOG_TEXT 80 Unrecognised file format 474 SPP DIALOG_TEXT 80 Schedule already loaded 475 SPP DIALOG_TEXT 80 Max nested subprograms limit exceeded 476 SPP DIALOG_TITLE 28 PROGRAM LOAD SAVE ERROR 477 SPP BUTTON_TEXT 12 OK 478 SPP MENU TITLE 11 Programmer 479 SPP LEGEND 11 MONITOR 480 SPP LEGEND 11 PROGRAMS 481 SPP LEGEND 11 SCHEDULE 482 SPP LEGEND 11 PREVIEW 483 SPP LEGEND 11 PRE PLOT 484 SPP LEGEND 11 EDIT 485 SPP LEGEND 11 PROGRAMMER 486 SPP SPP_FP_VALUE 8 NODATA 487 SPP ITEM_TITLE 16 Run From 488 SPP ITEM_TITLE 16 Name 489 SPP BUTTON_TEXT 12 CANCEL 490 SPP LEGEND 11 RUN FROM 491 SPP BUTTON_TEXT 12 RUN 492 SPP ITEM_TITLE 16 Duration 493 SPP ITEM_TITLE 16 Time Through 494 SPP DIALOG_TEXT 80 A program is scheduled Continue with LOAD 495 SPP DIALOG_TITLE 28 L
371. to 8 ABCD hex word 16 bit parameters in the I O unit DCM_B8 Access up to 8 Boolean parameters in the I O unit DCM_D8 Access up to 8 double precision integer 32 bit parameters in the I O unit DCM_S8 Access up to 8 signed short integer 8 bit parameters in the I O unit DCM_T8 Access up to 8 time duration parameters in the I O unit DCM_US8 Access up to 8 unsigned short integer 8 bit parameters in the I O unit DCM_Y8 Access up to 8 AB hex byte 8 bit parameters in the I O unit 7 2 2 8 INSTRUMENT DIAGNOSTIC BLOCKS D2000 Provides overall view of the I O unit comms parameters status indication etc D2500 Provides overall view of the I O unit comms parameters status indication etc Notes 1 Refer to the Lin blocks reference manual for details of the difference between CH and non CH ver sions 2 Ineach 16 way I O base a maximum of 12 eight way digital input modules 0185 may be fitted 7 3 THE UYP FILE A uyp file is required for every DCM 7 2 above in order that the Visual Supervisor may know the address at which a particular point channel value alarm threshold value etc is to be found For third party equipment this informa tion has to be obtained from the third party documentation Note An unlimited number of blocks may use the same uyp file provided only that their register usage i e the range of addresses in the target instrument is identical The uyp file is a text file created
372. ty of forms and cover different groups of points or function blocks but all operate the same protocol as follows Indicator colour Definition Unfilled No active alarm Black There was an active alarm which returned to its non active state before it was acknowledged Steady red There is an active alarm that has been acknowledged Flashing red There is an active alarm that has not been acknowledged For more details of alarms including acknowledgement see the preceding section Section 3 5 of this chapter HA261376 Chapter 3 Issue 8 Jul 04 3 21 VISUAL SUPERVISOR HAN DBO OK 3 6 1 OVERVIEW Cont Touch a faceplate to call its group display below Fill colour red black white defines alarm status for point This group Group name d 1 mm Group name Show last faceplates if any That group P Slide to show 4 required faceplates zi Process value Alarm status PID loop setpoint Show next faceplates if any Digital module Yellow Actuated Red alarm Auto manual status E _ Green auto p _ This group 08 01 00 Yellow manual Programmer digital block status Yellow actuated Remote enabled green currently being ramped 8 888 Digital block name 10000010 Analogue channel n
373. ually aborted as described in 3 2 2 below 3 2 2 Aborting a program Starting from the end of 3 2 1 Holding a program press ABORT The Program pane changes to white and reports IDLE The program is now idling which means that it is still loaded in short term memory but not being run At this point the same program can be again from the start or a new program run see section 3 1 1 Running a program now SAMPLE IDLE MONITOR PROGRAMS SCHEDULE PRE PLOT PREVIEW EDIT ABORT Chapter 3 HA261376 Page 3 8 Issue 8 Jul 04 VISUAL SUPERVISOR HAN DBO OK 3 3 MONITORING A PROGRAM There are two ways of monitoring a program as it s running 1 Viewing a textual numeric display generated by the Monitor facility 2 Viewing a graphical display generated by the Pre plot facility MONITOR displays text and numeric information about the program as a list PREPLOT displays a graphic profile of the target and actual process variables PVs Generally MONITOR is used when precise values are needed PREPLOT is used to provide an overview 3 3 1 The monitor facility With a program running and the Programmer menu displayed step 8 in section 3 1 1 Running a program now press MONITOR The Current Program page appears displaying the following information about the program as it is running most of the fields are self explanatory PROGRAM Name Pro
374. ue 8 Jul 04 Pagel 9 VISUAL SUPERVISOR HAN DBO 1 3 1 1 MASTER SLAVE COMMS SOCKETS Rx LED IX LED Rx LED Tx LED Note Master Slave designation applies only to small frame units Large frame units have separate pairs of master and slave connectors Slave Master MASTER SOCKET PIN OUT Pin EIA422 EIA485 Core colour 1 Rx Data White Orange 2 Rx Data Orange 3 O volts 0 volts White Green 4 Not used Not used Blue 5 Not used Not used White Blue 6 0 Volts 0 Volts Green 7 Tx Not used White Brown 8 Tx Not used Brown SLAVE SOCKET PIN OUT Pin EIA422 EIA485 Core colour 1 Tx Data White Orange 2 Tx Data Orange 3 0 volts 0 volts White Green 4 Not used Not used Blue 5 Not used Not used White Blue 6 0 Volts 0 Volts Green 7 Rx Not used White Brown 8 Rx Not used Brown Shroud screen connected to the unit safety earth Figure 1 3 1 1 Master and Slave Comms connector pinouts Notes Core colours vary from cable manufacturer to cable manufacturer so those listed above might not apply to your particular cable Where doubt exists the pin numbers and associated signal names in figure 1 1 3 1 1 should be regarded as definitive Connectors labelled Master may be user configured as slaves and connectors labelled Slave may be configured by the user as masters In either case the pinouts remain unaltere
375. unit as described in chapter 1 HA261376 Chapter 6 Issue 8 Jly 04 Page 6 1 VISUAL SUPERVISOR HAN DBO 6 1 1 OVERVIEW Cont 6 1 1 3 MODBUS JBUS FUNCTION CODES SUPPORTED Table 6 1 1 3 lists the Modbus function codes supported by the gateway together with their maximum scan counts i e the maximum number of registers or bits that can be read or written in a single Modbus transmission of this type For full details on Modbus messages and functions please refer to the Gould Modicon Modbus Protocol Reference Guide Code Function 1 Read digital output status Read digital input status Read output registers Read input registers Write single digital output Write single output register Fast read of single byte not configurable in master Diagnostics not configurable in master supports subcodes 0 1 2 3 4 A C D E F 10 11 12 see Table 6 1 4 15 Write multiple digital outputs FW 16 Write multiple output registers Table 6 1 1 3 Modbus function codes supported Note The gateway makes no distinction between inputs and outputs Thus any register or bit assigned in the gateway can be accessed as both an input or an output as required This follows the JBUS implementation of Modbus 6 1 2 Principles of operation The LIN database groups related data into blocks such blocks representing an input an output a controller etc The LIN configurators and display pack
376. urity Access Retired 1315 ACCESS DIALOG_TITLE 28 Retire User 1316 ACCESS BUTTON_TEXT 12 RETIRE 1317 ACCESS DIALOG_TITLE 28 ACCESS ERROR 1318 ACCESS DIALOG_TEXT 80 Illegal Password 1319 ACCESS DIALOG_TEXT 80 Illegal User ID and or Name 1320 ACCESS DIALOG_TEXT 80 User ID and or Name Already In Use 1321 ACCESS ITEM_TITLE 18 Sign 1322 ACCESS ITEM_TITLE 18 Authorise 1323 ACCESS ITEM TITLE 18 View Only 1325 ACCESS ITEM_TITLE 18 Admin Only 1333 ACCESS ITEM_TITLE 18 FTP 1334 ACCESS ITEM_TITLE 18 Remote 1353 ACCESS BUTTON TEXT 12 STATS 1354 ACCESS PAGE_TITLE 20 Statistics 1355 ACCESS ITEM_TITLE 18 Users 1356 ACCESS ITEM_TITLE 18 Retired Users 1357 ACCESS ITEM_TITLE 18 New Users 1359 ACCESS BUTTON_TEXT 12 MAINT 1360 ACCESS PAGE_TITLE 20 Account Maintenance Chapter 5 HA261376 Page 5 22 Issue 8 Jly 04 VISUAL SUPERVISOR HAN DBO 5 2 4 THE DICTIONARY Cont No Context Class Max Text 1361 ACCESS ITEM_TITLE 18 Recovery Account 1362 ACCESS ITEM_TITLE 18 Master Access 1363 ACCESS ITEM_TITLE 18 Edit Own Expired Password 1393 ACCESS MESSAGE 128 Administrator Rights are Disabled 1394 ACCESS BUTTON_TEXT 12 RECOVER 1395 ACCESS PAGE_TITLE 20 Administration Recovery 1396 ACCESS INTRO 64 Please report the key date and time below to the sup port desk who will issue you with the recovery pass word 1397 ACCESS ITEM_TITLE 18 Recovery Key 1398 ACCESS ITEM_TITLE 18 Date Time 1399
377. urrent name displayed in the yellowed Name field A qwerty keyboard display with a cursor flashing under the first charac ter of the current name shown in a black confirmation bar above the key board gt qu x C dic 1 IDLE 72 09 99 Key in the new name impl alw ej ri t When the confirmation bar shows correct new name for example simple Press the Return key The keyboard disappears revealing the Properties window showing the SIMPLE 22 22 22 new name Properties Rate Units Minutes At End EndefinitejDwell Press DONE HA261376 Chapter 4 Issue 8 Jly 04 4 11 VISUAL SUPERVISOR HAN DBO OK 4 1 7 2 CHANGING RATE UNITS simple In the Properties window press the Rate Units field A pick list appears with Seconds Minutes Hours as selectable options Select say Seconds Press Return
378. ust that alarm to be acknowledged ARCHIVE Allows the alarm history to be archived to disk as described in section 3 5 4 below 3 5 2 Alarm Message Acknowledgement ALARMS Alarms can be acknowledged the following ways 1 Press the Menu key below the screen In the pop up menu which appears press ALARMS then press ACK to acknowledge the displayed alarm or ALL to acknowledge all current unacknowledged alarms 2 Press the Alarm Pane In the pop up menu which appears press ACK to acknowledge the displayed alarm or ALL to acknowledge all current unacknowledged alarms 3 From the option bar in the Alarm History page Section 3 5 1 or the Alarm summary page section 3 5 5 press the ACK key MESSAGES Some messages are cleared by the system itself without operator intervention In such cases entries appear in the Alarm history page CLEAR column but not in the acknowledge column large frame units only All message indica tion stops For other messages touching the alarm pane or operating the Menu Alarms Messages key displays the latest message in a pop up window Subsequent operation of the OK button for this window both clears and acknowledges the mes sage Batch Message The batch has now started OK 3 5 3 Adding notes to alarm history The NOTE facility allows an operator defined text message to be added to the alarm history as follows ACK ACK ALL HISTORY In the Ala
379. uter box is not damaged remove the instrument from its packing with all accessories and documentation Once the unit has been installed store any internal packing with the external packing in case of future despatch Note For large frame units manufactured prior to mid June 2002 the information given for small frame units applies HA261376 Chapter 1 Issue 8 Jul 04 Pagel 3 VISUAL SUPERVISOR HAN DBO OK 1 2 MECHANICAL INSTALLATION 1 2 1 Current units 1 Check that the mounting panel is no thicker than 25mm typically for wood or plastic and no thinner than 2mm for steel and that it meets the maximum panel mounting angle figure given in figure 1 2a 1 2b 2 Inthe panel cut an aperture 138mm x 138mm small frame or 281mm x 281mm large frame If more than one instrument is to be mounted in the panel the recommended minimum spacings are as shown in figure 1 2a 1 2b 3 From the front side of the mounting panel insert the instrument rear end first through the aperture gt Support the rear of the instrument so that the seal is flat against the front of the panel 5 For installations that will not be subject to vibration insert two panel clamps into any opposing pair of the four groups of rectangular apertures at the sides of the case either the top and bottom pair or the left and right pair For installations subject to vibration often referred to as seismic versions use both pairs that is four cl
380. ve After editing is complete the green return key is pressed The summary page reappears showing the new name To save the database press SAVE to retry press CANCEL No application loaded Auto Database Create File 180077 Nodes Found 7 Num Blocks 30 Loops 2 I o modules 6 SAVE CANCEL No application loaded Auto Database Create 261376 Issue 8 04 Chapter 2 Page 2 19 VISUAL SUPERVISOR HAN DBO OK This page is deliberately left blank Chapter 2 HA261376 2 20 Issue 8 Jly 04 VISUAL SUPERVISOR HAN DBO OK CHAPTER 3 OPERATION The tasks in this chapter all require at least the Operator level of access to the instrument The chapter consists of the following sections 3 1 Running a program 3 2 Holding and aborting a program 3 3 Monitoring a program 3 4 Logging data 3 5 Responding to alarms 3 6 Area and group displays 3 7 Downloading recipes All the descriptions assume that access at Operator level has already been gained as described in Section 2 8 above If at any point the display shows results that differ from those that the instructions tell you to expect then the Menu key at the bottom of the screen can be operated to call the Pop up menu and the beginning of the task or another facil ity if required 3 1 RUNNING A PROGRAM There are three ways to run a program depending upon requi
381. vision level of the file 22 11 00 1 the day month year that revision was carried out 09 51 16 is the hours minutes seconds that the revision was carried out Fred Ungineer is the name of the person who last modified the file Line 3 Line three defines the recipe set block to be used and recipe download timeout value in seconds Recipe Set Block gt lt Timeout gt e g SET1 30 The recipe Set Block is the name of SET block to be used If left blank this field implies any SET block If the download timeout is exceeded the recipe download is assumed to have been unsuccessful and the recipe goes into a failed state Chapter 5 HA261376 Page 5 56 Issue 8 Jly 04 VISUAL SUPERVISOR HAN DBO OK 5 10 1 2 TITLE LINE This line defines how many recipes there are in the file minimum one setpoint lt Line Name gt lt Recipe 1 gt lt name gt where lt Line name gt defines the name of the recipe line not required for single line files lt Recipe N name gt is the name of the Nth recipe 5 10 1 3 VARIABLE LINES For each variable in the recipe a line is required of the form lt Name gt lt Tag gt lt Value 1 Value N gt where Name is the name of the variable Tag is the tag name in the database If the tag name is enclosed within braces the variable is considered to be non verifiable Value N is the value of the Nth recipe T
382. wer supply board this procedure may be followed only with the supply voltage isolated and by trained personnel who are aware of the potential hazard Isolate the instrument from supply power Release the combined top rear cover by removing the four countersunk screws marked A in figure 10 1 and the pan head screws B and C All these fixings should be retained for use in re assembly For current in struments screws A are T8 Torx headed screws Previous versions used cross head screws For previous ver sions items C were two part plastic rivets Once all the fixings have been removed the cover can be removed by lifting its bottom edge upwards and out wards figure 10 1b Ne G B Figure 10 1 Remove cover fixings Figure 10 1b Remove cover HA261376 Chapter 10 Issue 8 Jly 04 10 1 VISUAL SUPERVISOR HAN DBO 10 1 SVGA LARGE FRAME INSTRUMENTS Cont This reveals the internal structure of the instrument Figure 10 1d shows the locations of the fan A and the battery Figures 10 1d and 10 1 show details Fan connector Figure 10 1c Fan and battery locations Figure 10 1d Fan replacement details Figure 10 1e Battery and fan connector 10 1 1 Fan replacement Disconnect the fan connector located as shown in figure 10 1e above Cut the cable tie figure 10 1b above which secures th
383. with a cursor flashing under the first number space in the black confirmation bar at the top 8 Key in the required date in the format set for your instrument ask your Engineer After the first digit has been keyed in the cursor moves under the space for the next one and so on The last entered character can be deleted by pressing the key To abort the whole date entry process and return to the full Schedule Program page press the red cross key 9 When you ve finished and the confirmation bar shows the date in the correct format press the Return key The keyboard disappears and the Schedule Program page now shows the specified date in the Start Date field 3 1 3 2 SPECIFYING THE PROGRAM START TIME 10 Press the Start Time field The numeric keyboard reappears 11 Key in the time in the format hh mm ss Schedule Program Wi 2 27 22 Schedule Program File Name Start Date 20 02 00 Start Time Iterations d 30 8 9 5 6 2 3 0 12 When time entry is complete and the confirmation bar shows the time in the correct format press the Return key File Name SAMPLENS Start Date 20702700 Start Time 10 30 00 The keyboard disappears and the Schedule Program page now shows Heri M the specified time in the Start T
384. y be followed only with the supply voltage isolated and by trained personnel who are aware of the potential hazard Isolate the instrument from supply power Release the cover by undoing the two T8 Torx headed screws A in figure 10 2a and the Cross headed screw B in the figure 3 Lift and turn the cover over as shown in figure 10 2b to reveal the internal structure of the unit Ne Figure 10 26 Liftand invert cover Figure 10 2a Undo cover fixings The battery can now be replaced as described in section 10 2 2 below HA261376 Chapter 10 Issue 8 Jly 04 10 3 VISUAL SUPERVISOR HAN DBO 10 2 1 Fan replacement Note It is recommended that the fan be replaced with no further disassembly of the unit If more convenient the cover can be detached from the rest of the instrument by disconnecting the power and fan connectors Figure 10 2 1 shows the locations of the battery the fan connector and the power connector Figures 10 2 1b and 10 2 1c show the high voltage ac dc supply and low voltage dc supply units respectively with cover removed It is recommended that the cover be removed only if absolutely necessary because the latching power connector is diffi cult to disconnect reconnect Fan connector p Battery A Power connector Gu Figure 10 2 1a Figure 10 2 1b Figure 10 2 1c Battery and connector locations Fan location Fan location high voltage supply un
385. y of the user For example some processes are so sensitive that power loss of any duration will always mean that the process plant or the load or both will need manual attention before re starting In this case automatic restart either hot or cold would be inappro priate Hot start and Cold start selected The most common strategy is to set both the Hot Start and the Cold Start to YES so that should power return before the end of the time out the instrument will attempt a Hot Start If the time out has expired the instrument makes a Cold Start Hot Start only power loss or a brown out lasting long enough to trigger an automatic restart which returns to normal before the Hot Start time out causes the instrument to attempt a Hot Start If the power does not return to normal within the time out period a manual restart will be required as described in section 3 1 1 Running a program now Cold start only If a power loss or a brown out lasting long enough to trigger an automatic restart occurs then provided that power returns before the Hot start time out interval the instrument will do a Cold Start on power up Neither Hot start nor Cold start If both Hot start and Cold start are set to No the instrument will not restart automatically under any circumstances 4 5 2 1 START UP STRATEGY PAGE 2 Press SYSTEM key ACCESS SYSTEM 1 Press the Menu key
386. y the instrument to annunciate alarm event and message occurrence The sections below describe the alarm history page and how to acknowledge alarms events and messages TIME REPRESENTATION If time synchronisation is configured then the date and time of a cached block are the date and time of alarm event occurrence at the originating block and are displayed as DD MM HH MM If it is not certain that the original block s instrument has its own clock synchronised then the date and time of detection of the alarm or event will be used and these are displayed as HH MM 3 5 1 Alarm history page To display the alarm history page either SYSTEM ALARMS PROGRAMMER RECIPE 1 Press the Menu key below the screen then press ALARMS in LOGGING the pop up menu or 2 Press the Alarm pane The Alarms menu appears The name of the current alarm condition ALL HISTORY is displayed in the Alarm pane 3 Press HISTORY The Alarm History page depicted in figure 3 5 1a below appears Indicates there are TR further alarm history E pages accessible via US TYPE ACTIVE arrow key s TREND Abort 10 07 01 12 00 03 Program Aborted 10 07 01 12 00 03 TREND Loaded 10 07 01 11 59 13 Run Prog Download 10 07 01 11 57 12 PRINTER Config 10 07 01 11 57 12 Amarillo Download 10 07 01 11 57 12 Database Started 10 07 01 11 44 52 2500 7 Comms 10 07 01 11 44 51 GASCONIC Load 10 07 01 11 44 50 SFC_CON2 Clear 10 07 01 11 44 50 SF

T800 Visual Supervisor Handbook Issue 8 - E

Contents

Download Pdf Manuals

Related Search

Related Contents